Tabla de contenidos

Conseguir Iniciado 9
Sistema Requisitos 10
Registro 10
Instalación 11
Mantenimiento/upgrade 12
Usuario final Licencia Acuerdo 12
Conexión 19
PremiumSoft Navicat Nube 20
Configuración general 23
Avanzada Configuración 26
SSL Configuración 30
SSH Configuración 31
Http Configuración 32
Servidor Objetos 34
MySQL/MariaDB Objetos 34
MySQL/MariaDB Mesas 34
MySQL/MariaDB Mesa Campos 35
MySQL/MariaDB Mesa Índices 37
MySQL/MariaDB Mesa Extranjeros Llaves 38
MySQL/MariaDB Mesa Desencadenadores 39
MySQL/MariaDB Mesa OPciones 40
MySQL/MariaDB views 43
MySQL/MariaDB Funciones/procedimientos 44
Eventos MySQL/MariaDB 46
Oracle Objetos 47
Bomba de datos Oracle (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 47
Datos de Oracle Bomba Exportación 48
Datos de Oracle Bomba Importación 51
Oracle Debugger (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 55
Atributos físicos/predeterminado de Oracle Almacenamiento Características 57
Oracle Mesas 58
Oracle Normal Mesas 59
Oracle Mesa Campos 59
Oracle Mesa Índices 61
Oracle Mesa Claves extranjeras 62
Oracle Mesa Único 62
Oracle Mesa Cheques 63
Oracle Mesa Desencadenadores 63
Oracle Mesa Opciones 65
Oracle Externos Mesas 66

2
 Campos para Oracle Externos Mesas 66
Propiedades externas para Oracle Externos Mesas 67
Parámetros de acceso para Oracle Externos Mesas 67
Índice de Oracle Organizado Mesas 68
Opciones para Oracle index Organizado Mesas 68
Vistas de Oracle 69
Oracle Funciones/procedimientos 70
Oracle Enlaces de base de datos 71
Oracle Índices 72
Oracle Java 74
Oracle Vistas materializadas 75
Oracle materializado Vista Registros 78
Oracle Paquetes 79
Oracle Secuencias 80
Oracle Sinónimos 81
Oracle Desencadenadores 82
Oracle Tipos 85
Oracle XML Esquemas 86
Oracle Papelera de reciclaje 87
Oracle Directorios 87
Oracle Tablespaces 88
Oracle Public Base Enlaces 90
Oracle Público Sinónimos 91
PostgreSQL Objetos 91
Depurador de PostgreSQL (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 91
PostgreSQL Esquemas 93
PostgreSQL Mesas 93
PostgreSQL Normal Mesas 94
PostgreSQL Mesa Campos 94
PostgreSQL Mesa Índices 96
PostgreSQL Mesa Extranjeros Llaves 97
PostgreSQL Mesa Sólo 98
PostgreSQL Mesa Cheques 99
PostgreSQL Mesa Excluye 100
PostgreSQL Mesa Reglas 101
PostgreSQL Mesa Desencadenadores 102
PostgreSQL Mesa Opciones 103
PostgreSQL Extranjeros Mesas 104
Campos para PostgreSQL Extranjeros Mesas 104
Cheques para PostgreSQL Extranjeros Mesas 106
Desencadenadores para PostgreSQL Extranjeros Mesas 106
Mesa Opciones para PostgreSQL Extranjeros Mesas 108

3
 PostgreSQL Vistas 108
PostgreSQL Funciones 110
PostgreSQL Agregados 112
PostgreSQL Conversiones 113
PostgreSQL Dominios 114
PostgreSQL Índices 115
PostgreSQL Vistas materializadas 117
PostgreSQL Operadores 118
PostgreSQL Operador Clases 119
PostgreSQL Secuencias 121
PostgreSQL Desencadenadores 122
PostgreSQL Gatillo Funciones 123
PostgreSQL Tipos 125
PostgreSQL Tablespaces 129
PostgreSQL Moldes 129
PostgreSQL Extranjeros Servidores 130
PostgreSQL Idiomas 130
SQLite Objetos 131
SQLite Mesas 132
SQLite Mesa Campos 132
SQLite Mesa Índices 134
SQLite Mesa Claves extranjeras 135
SQLite Mesa Único 136
SQLite Mesa Cheques 137
SQLite Mesa Desencadenadores 138
SQLite Mesa Opciones 139
Vistas de SQLite 139
SQLite Índices 140
SQLite Desencadenadores 141
SQL Servidor Objetos 142
Backup/restore de SQL Server (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 148
SQL Servidor Backup 148
SQL Servidor Restaurar 150
SQL Servidor Esquemas 151
SQL Servidor Mesas 152
SQL Server Mesa Campos 152
SQL Server Mesa Índices 154
SQL Server Mesa Claves extranjeras 155
SQL Server Mesa Únicos 156
SQL Server Mesa Cheques 157
SQL servER Mesa Desencadenadores 157
SQL Server Mesa Opciones 159

4
 SQL Server Mesa Almacenamiento 160
SQL Servidor Vistas 160
SQL Servidor Funciones/procedimientos 161
SQL Servidor Índices 163
SQL Servidor Sinónimos 168
SQL Servidor Desencadenadores 169
SQL Server Backup Dispositivos 171
SQL Server Vinculados Servidores 171
SQL Server Servidor Desencadenadores 173
SQL Servidor Asambleas 174
SQL Server Base Desencadenadores 175
SQL Server Partición Funciones 176
SQL Server Esquemas de partición 177
SQL Vista previa 177
Mantener 177
Mantener MySQL/MariaDB 177
Mantener Oracle 178
Mantener PostgreSQL 183
Mantener SQLite 184
Mantener SQL Servidor 184
Mesa Espectador 186
Vista de cuadrícula 186
Usando Barra de navegación 186
Edición Registros 188
Ordenar/buscar/reemplazar registros 192
Filtrado de registros 194
Manipular Primas Datos 194
Formato Mesa Rejilla 195
Vista de formulario (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 196
Editores auxiliares 197
Filtro Asistente 197
Consulta 200
Generador de consultas (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 200
Consulta Editor 202
Editor Avanzada Características 202
Consulta Resultados 206
Consulta Parámetros 207
Depurar la consulta de Oracle (disponible sólo in Completo Versión) 207
Modelo (disponible sólo en Navicat Premium y Versión Enterprise) 208
Modelo Lado 208
Modelo Explorer Panel 208
Modelo Historia Panel 209

5
 Modelo Propiedades Panel 209
Modelo Resumen Panel 212
Diagrama Lona 212
Crear Mesas 212
Crear vistas 213
Crear Claves extranjeras 214
Crear etiquetas 215
Crear Notas 216
Crear IMagos 217
Crear formas 217
Crear capas 219
Formato Diagrama 219
Vista previa y Modelo de impresión 220
Inversa Ingeniería 221
Script Generación 221
Configuración general para Exportar SQL 221
Configuración avanzada para Exportación SQL 221
Adelante Engineering 223
Selección de la sincronización Tipo 223
Selección de esquemas/objetos y conexión 223
Seleccionar comparar y Ejecución Opciones 223
Ver comparación Resultado 225
Modelo Conversión 226
Sugerencias de modelos y Consejos 226
Avanzada Herramientas 228
Importación Asistente 228
Configuración del formato de archivo de importación (paso 1) 228
Establecer el nombre del archivo de origen (paso 2) 228
Delimitador de ajuste (paso 3)- Txt, XML 229
Configuración de opciones adicionales (paso 4)- Txt, XML, Excel, HTML 230
Ajuste Tabla de destino (paso 5) 231
Ajustar las estructuras de campo y los campos de asignación (paso 6) 231
SELmodo de importación refl (Step 7) 232
Guardar y confirmar la importación (Step 8) 233
Exportación Asistente 233
Configuración del formato de archivo de exportación (paso 1) 234
Estableciendo el nombre de archivo de destino (Step 2) 234
Seleccionar campos para exportar (paso 3) 235
Configuración de opciones adicionales (paso 4) 235
Ahorro y confirmando la exportación (Step 5) 236
Transferencia de datos (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 236
Configuración general para Datos Transferencia 236

6
 Configuración avanzada para el mismo servidor Tipo Datos Transferencia 237
Configuración avanzada para la transferencia de datos entre servidores (sólo disponible en Navicat Premium) 239
Sincronización de datos (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 241
Configuración general para Sincronización de datos 242
Configuración avanzada para Sincronización de datos 242
Sincronización de la estructura (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 242
Configuración general para Estructura Sincronización 242
Resultado de la sincronización de estructura 244
Backup/restore (disponible sólo en Versión completa) 245
Backup 246
Restaurar 246
Extracto SQL 248
Trabajo por lotes/programación (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 248
Configuración general para Lote Trabajo/horario 249
Configuración avanzada para Lote Trabajo/horario 249
Convertidor de trabajo por lotes (disponible sólo en Navicat Premium) 250
Volcado de archivo/ejecución SQL SQL Archivo 250
Imprimir base de datos/esquema/estructura de tabla (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 251
Consola 251
Informe (disponible sólo en Navicat Premium y Versión Enterprise) 252
Informe Datos 252
Informe Consulta Asistente 253
Informe Consulta Diseñador 253
Informe Diseño 255
Informe Asistente 255
Informe Diseño Barras 255
Informe Diálogos 264
Diseño de informes 267
Vista previa del informe 269
Servidor Seguridad 270
Seguridad de MySQL/MariaDB 270
Usuario de MySQL/MariaDB Diseñador 270
Oracle Seguridad 272
Oracle Usuario Diseñador 272
Oracle Papel Diseñador 274
PostgreSQL Seguridad 275
PostgreSQL Server 7.3 a 8.0 275
PostgreSQL Usuario Diseñador 275
PostgreSQL Grupo Diseñador 276
PostgreSQL Server 8.1 o encima 277
PostgreSQL Diseñador de roles 277
SQL Servidor Seguridad 278

7
 SQL Server Diseñador de login 280
Servidor SQL Server Diseñador de roles 283
Base de datos de SQL Server Usuario Diseñador 283
Base de datos de SQL Server Rol Ddiseñador 284
Aplicación de SQL Server Papel Diseñador 285
Seguridad de SQLite 286
SQLite Usuario Diseñador 286
Privilegio Manager 286
Útil Herramientas 287
Lista/detalle/er Diagrama Vista 287
Objeto Información 289
Server Monitor (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 290
Agrupación virtual (disponible sólo en Versión completa) 291
Conexión Colorantes 291
Favoritos (disponible sólo en su totalidad Versión) 291
Buscar en la base de datos/esquema (disponible sólo en Completo Versión) 292
Búsqueda Filtro 292
Opciones 294
Opciones generales 294
Opción de apariencias 295
Opciones de modelo (disponibles sólo en Completo Versión) 301
Varios Opciones 301
Comandos (disponibles sólo en Versión completa) 303
Caliente Llaves 305
Registro Archivos 308

8
Cómo empezar
Navicat es una herramienta de administración de múltiples conexiones que le permite conectarse a bases de datos
MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite, SQL Server y/o MariaDB, MAKAdministración de base de datos a múltiples
tipos de base de datos tan fácil. También puede administrar Amazon RDS y el corrimiento al rojo del Amazonas. Las
características de Navicat son lo suficientemente sofisticadas para proporcionar a los desarrolladores profesionales
para todas sus necesidades específicas, pero fácil de aprender para los usuarios que son nuevos en el servidor de
base de datos. Con su bien diseñado interfaz gráfica de usuario (GUI), Navicat le permite crear, organizar, acceder y
compartir información de una manera segura y fácil de forma rápida y sencilla.

Navicat está disponible en tres plataformas: Microsoft Windows, Mac OS X y Linux. Puede conectar a los usuarios al
servidor local/remoto, proporcionando varias herramientas de utilidad tales como modelado de datos, transferencia de
datos, sincronización de datos/estructura, importación/exportación, backup/restore, generador de informes y
programación para facilitar el proceso de mantenimiento de datos. Para más detalles, visite nuestro sitio web:
https://www.Navicat.com

Navicat Main Barra

Navicat barra de herramientas principal le permite acceder a los objetos básicos y características, tales como
conexiones, usuarios, tablas, copia de seguridad, programación y mucho más. Para utilizar iconos pequeños u
ocultar el título, simplemente haga clic con el botón derecho en la barra de herramientas y deshabilite Usar iconos
grandes o Mostrar título.

Conexión
El panel de conexión es la forma básica de navegar con las conexiones, bases de datos y objetos de base. Emplea la
estructura de árbol que le permite tomar acción sobre la base de datos y sus objetos a través de sus menús
emergentes rápida y fácilmente. Después del registroen Navicat Cloud , el panel de conexión se dividirá en Navicat
Cloud y Mis conexiones secciones. Para mostrar sólo los objetos abiertos, elija Vista -> Mostrar sólo objetos
9
activos del menú principal. Para ver u ocultar la conexiónpanel de iones, elija Vista -> Mostrar conexión del menú
principal.

10
 Ficha Bar
La barra de pestañas permite cambiar entre la lista de objetos y las ventanas con fichas. También puede elegir
siempre mostrar ventanas emergentes en una ficha nueva o mostrarlos siempre en un nuevo ventana. Si tiene
varias pestañas abiertas, puede usar Ctrl + Tab para cambiar fácilmente a otras pestañas. Ver también
Opciones.

Lista de objetos Barra

La barra de herramientas de lista de objetos proporciona otros controles que se pueden utilizar para manipular los objetos.

Objeto Lista
Panel de lista de objetos muestra una lista de objetos, como tablas, vistas, consultas, etc.

Objeto Información
El panel información de objeto muestra la información detallada de los objetos del servidor y los objetos Navicat.
Para ver u ocultar el panel de información de objetos, elija Vista -> Mostrar información de objeto del menú
principal.

Navicat Cloud Actividad

El panel de actividad de Navicat Cloud muestra los miembros y actividades del proyecto. Seleccione un proyecto en el
panel de conexión o un objeto Cloud Navicat en el panel lista de objetos. Para ver u ocultar el panel de actividad de la
nube Navicat, elija Vista -> Mostrar Navicat Cloud Activity del menú principal.

Requisitos del sistema

Requisitos del sistema para Windows

 Microsoft Windows XP SP3, vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Server 2003, Server
2008, Server 2012

Requisitos del sistema para Mac OS X

 Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, 10.8 Mountain Lion, 10.9 Mavericks, 10, 10 Yosemite, 10, 11 IE Capitan
 Intel CPU

Requisitos del sistema para Linux

 Ubuntu 12,04, Ubuntu 14,04, CentOS 6.7, CentOS 7, Fedora 22, Fedora 23, Linux Mint 13, Linux Mint 17.3,
openSUSE 13.2, openSUSE 42,1

Registro

Para hacerla económica y eficiente para que usted compre nuestros productos, sobre el 95% de los clientes piden
Navicat vía nuestro En Tienda usando principales Crédito Tarjetas - MasterCard, Visa, Euro tarjeta, JCB y Americano
Express. All En órdenes se procesan por Paypal y WorldPay. La VeriSign Certificado para SSL transacciones siempre
11
se asegurarse de que a asegurado en línea transacciones.

12
Si ha solicitado el software Navicat y desea revisar la información de su pedido, o si tiene preguntas sobre pedidos,
pagos o procedimientos de envío, póngase en contacto con nuestro Navicat salDepartamento de es.

Después de la compra obtendrá un Clave de registro para activar su Navicat con licencia por correo electrónico
dentro de 24 horas después de haber recibido su pedido. Por favor, asegúrese de introducir una dirección de correo
electrónico válida en su pedido. Si usted no ha recibido las llaves Widelgadas 24 horas, es probable que el correo
electrónico que enviamos fue bloqueado por su filtro de spam de correo electrónico. Para reenviar su información de
descarga y las llaves, envíe por favor su dirección de email registrada a nuestro Centro de atención al cliente. Si usted
consigue ninguna contestación del formulario de reenvío, entre en contacto con por favor nuestro Departamento de
ventas de Navicat.

Además, si usted se siente incómodo con el suministro de su información personal a través de Internet, aceptamos la
orden de compra y el banco/transferencia bancaria. Visite por favor nuestro Orden offline.

Instalación

Que le sugiero encarecidamente que Apague cualquier aplicación abierta. Esto ayudará a asegurar una instalación suave.

Nota: Instalar Navicat no incluye la instalación del servidor. Debe descargar e instalar el servidor manualmente. Para
el usuario que ha estado probando nuestra versión no registrada, simplemente clave en el Clave de registro
(16 dígitos) en la pantalla de registro emergente.

Instalación para la versión de descarga

1. Abrir o guardar el . exe archivo.

2. Clic Siguiente en la bienvenida Pantalla.
3. Lea el contrato de licencia. Acéptalo y haz clic en Siguiente.
4. Aceptar la Ubicación de la Programa iconos por clic Siguiente. Si que deseo Para cambio la destino de la
carpeta para el programa Navicat haga clic en Navegar.
5. Siga las pasos.
6. Después de instalado, clave en el Clave de registro (16 dígitos) en la pantalla de registro emergente y
haga clic en Activar para activar en línea el clave.

Instalación para la versión CD

1. Cargue el disco de instalación del CD Navicat en la unidad de CD-ROM.

2. Abra el . exe archivo.
3. Clic Siguiente en la bienvenida Pantalla.
4. Lea el contrato de licencia. Acéptalo y haz clic en Siguiente.
5. Aceptar la Ubicación de la Programa iconos por clic Siguiente. Si que deseo Para cambio la destino de la
carpeta para el programa Navicat haga clic en Navegar.
6. Siga las pasos.
7. Después de instalado, clave en el Clave de registro (16 dígitos) en la pantalla de registro emergente y
haga clic en Activar para activar en línea el clave.
13
Migrar Navicat a un nuevo cálculor

14
 1. En Navicat, elija Archivo -> Exportar conexiones. El archivo exportado (. NCX) contiene toda la conexión
Configuración.
2. Copia de seguridad del archivo exportado (. NCX).
3. En Navicat, elija Ayuda -> Registro y haga clic en Desactivar en línea desactivar el clave.
4. Uninstall Navicat de la existente ordenador.
5. Vuelva a instalar Navicat en el nuevo ordenador.
6. Abra Navicat y elija Archivo -> Importar conexiones en el nuevo ordenador.

Cuando se establece una nueva conexión, Navicat creará una subcarpeta bajo el Ubicación de configuración. La
mayoría de los archivos se almacenan en esta subcarpeta. Para buscar la ruta, haga clic con el botón derecho en la
conexión y elija Editar conexión -> Avanzada
-> Ubicación de configuración.

Además, todos los perfiles guardados se almacenan en perfiles. Para buscar la ruta, elija Herramientas -> Opciones ->
Varios -> Ubicación de perfiles.

Mantenimiento/upgrade

¿Cómo comprar el plan de mantenimiento?

El plan de mantenimiento de software Navicat permite a los usuarios Navicat recibir PRIibilidad el soporte de correo
electrónico, recibiendo actualizaciones de software y recibiendo versiones de corrección de errores sin costo adicional
durante el período protegido.

La suscripción al plan de mantenimiento se realiza en el momento de la compra de su licencia de software o dentro de

los 90 días a partir de su PURCfecha de caducidad-no se puede añadir a un producto adquirido previamente en una
fecha posterior. Para más detalles, por favor Haga clic aquí.

¿Cómo actualizar su Navicat?

Si desea actualizar la copia instalada de Navicat a la última versión, por favor elija Ayuda -> Buscar actualizaciones
para iniciar el Updater. Comprobará automáticamente la versión instalada. Si hay una nueva versión, simplemente
siga los pasos en el actualizador a ustedpgrade tu Navicat. Reemplazará a su Navicat anterior y sus ajustes actuales
permanecerán inalterados.

O, puede enviar su dirección de correo electrónico registrada en el Centro de atención al cliente para descargar la última
versióninstalador de Sion.

Contrato de licencia de usuario final

Nota: Para el acuerdo de licencia de Navicat Cloud Service, por favor haga clic en aquí.

Importante: esta licencia de usuario final de software El acuerdo ("EULA") es un acuerdo legal entre usted (ya sea un
individuo o, si es comprado o adquirido de otra manera por o para una entidad, una entidad) y PREMIUMSOFT

15
CYBERTECH Ltd. Léalo cuidadosamente antes de completar el proceso de instalación y usando el SoftwSon.
Proporciona una licencia para utilizar el software y contiene información de garantía y renuncias de responsabilidad. Al
instalar y utilizar el software, está confirmando su aceptación del software y aceptando convertirse en

16
Obligado por los términos De este acuerdo. Si no está de acuerdo en estar obligado por estos términos, entonces
no instale el software y devuelva el software a su lugar de compra. Este CLUF se aplicará únicamente al software
suministrado por PREMIUMSOFT CYBERTECH Ltd. con la presente, independientemente de Si otro software es
referido o descrito aquí.

1. Definiciones

a. "versión no comercial" significa una versión del software, así identificada, para uso de i) el individuo que es
un natural persona y no a Corporation, empresa, Asociación o Asociación o otros entidad o Organización II) el
individuo que es un estudiante, una facultad o un miembro del personal de una institución educativa, y (III) el
personal de una organización sin fines de lucro o una organización benéfica solamente. A los efectos de esta
definición, "EDUCATIONAl institución "significa una escuela pública o privada, Colegio, Universidad y otro
establecimiento de educación post secundaria. Una organización sin fines de lucro es una organización cuyo
objetivo primordial es apoyar una cuestión o asunto de interés privado o estafa públicaCERN para no
comercial fines.
b. "versión no para reventa (NFR)" significa una versión, así identificada, del software que se usará para
revisar y evaluar el software, solamente.
c. "PremiumSoft" significa PremiumSoft CYBERTECH Ltd. y sus licenciatarios, si cualquier.
d. "software" significas sólo el programa (s) de software de PremiumSoft y programas de software de terceros,
en cada caso, suministrados por PremiumSoft adjunto, y la documentación correspondiente, medios
asociados, materiales impresos, y en línea o electrónica documentación.
e. "Versio no registradon "," versión de prueba "o" versión demo "significa una copia no registrada del software
(" software no registrado ") que puede ser utilizada por el usuario para fines de evaluación por un período de
catorce (14) días después de la instalación inicial del Softw no registradoSon. Al final de la período de
prueba ("período de prueba"), el usuario debe registrar el software o retirarlo de su sistema. El software no
registrado puede ser copiado y distribuido libremente a otros usuarios para su evaluación.
f. "Navicat Essentials" significa un versión del software, así identificado, que se utilizará para el comercio propósito.

2. Licencia Subvenciones

Las licencias concedidas en esta sección 2 están sujetas a los términos y condiciones estipulados en este CLUF:

a. Con sujeción a la sección 2 (b), puede instalar y utilizar el software en un único ordenador; O instalar y
almacenar el software en un dispositivo de almacenamiento, como un servidor de red, utilizado sólo para
instalar el software en sus otros equipos a través de una red interna, proporcioned tiene una licencia para
cada equipo separado en el que se instala y ejecuta el software. Salvo que se disponga lo contrario en la
sección 2 (b), una licencia para el software no podrá ser compartida, instalada o utilizada concurrentemente
en diferentes Computadoras.
b. Además de THe una sola copia del software permitida en la sección 2 (a), el usuario principal del
ordenador en el que el software está instalado puede hacer una segunda copia del software e instalarlo en
un ordenador portátil o un ordenador situado en su casa para His o su uso exclusivo, siempre que:
A. la segunda copia del software en el ordenador portátil o doméstico (i) no se utiliza al mismo tiempo que
el copia de la Software en la primaria ordenador y II) es utilizado por la primaria usuario únicamente
como permitido para tal versión o edición (por ejemplo para el uso educativo solamente),
17
B. la segunda copia del software no se instala ni se utiliza después del tiempo en que el usuario
ya no está el usuario principal del equipo principal en el que se encuentra el software instalado.

18
 c. En el caso de que el software se distribuya junto con otros productos de software PremiumSoft como parte
de un conjunto de productos colectivamente, la "estudio"), la licencia de la Estudio es licencia como a solo
producto y ninguno de los productos en THe Studio, incluido el software, puede ser separado para su
instalación o uso en más de un ordenador.
d. Puede hacer una copia del software en forma legible por máquina únicamente para propósitos de copia de
seguridad. Debe reproducir en cualquier como copia todos Copyright avisos y cualquier otros propietario
leyendas en la Texto original en copia de el software. Usted no puede vender o transferir ninguna copia del
software hecho para la copia de seguridad fines.
e. Usted acepta que PremiumSoft puede auditar su uso del software para cumplir con estos términos en
cualquier tiempo, uPon un aviso razonable. En el caso de que dicha auditoría revele cualquier uso del
software por parte de usted, excepto en el pleno cumplimiento de los términos de este contrato, usted
deberá reembolsar a PremiumSoft por todos los gastos razonables relacionados con dicha auditoría,
además de cualquier otros pasivos en los que pueda incurrir como resultado de incumplimiento.
f. Sus derechos de licencia bajo este CLUF son no exclusivo.

3. Licencia Restricciones

a. Aparte de lo estipulado en la sección 2, no podrá hacer ni distribuir copias del software, o transferir
electrónicamente el software de un ordenador a otro o a través de un red.
b. Usted no puede alterar, fusionar, modificar, adaptar o traducir el software, o descompilar, invertir
Ingeniero, desmontar, o de otra manera reducir el software a un ser humano-perceptible forma.
c. A menos que se estipule lo contrario, usted no puede alquilar, arrendar o sublicenciar el Software.
d. Otros que con respeto Para a Juicio / Demo Versión No comercial Lite Versión o a No Para Versión de
reventa de los Software, usted puede permanentemente transferencia todos de quer derechos bajo Este
CLUF sólo como parte de a venta o transferencia, siempre que no retenga copias, transfiere todo el software
(incluidos todos los componentes, los medios y los materiales impresos, cualquier actualización, este CLUF,
los números de serie y, si corresponde, todos los demás productos de software suministrados junto con tel
software), y el destinatario está de acuerdo con los términos de este CLUF. Si el software es una
actualización, cualquier transferencia debe incluir todas las versiones anteriores del software desde el que se
está actualizando. Si la copia del software está licenciada como parte de todo el estudio (como se define
anteriormente), el software se transferirá sólo con y como parte de la venta o transferencia de todo el estudio,
y no por separado. Usted puede no retener copias de la Software. Que puede no vender o transferencia
cualquier Juicio / Demo Versión No comercial Iluminadoe Versión o No Para la versión de reventa de la
Software.
e. Salvo disposición en contrario, no podrá modificar el software ni crear obras derivadas basadas en el
software.
f. Las versiones no comerciales del software no se pueden utilizar ni distribuir a ningún PArty para, cualquier
propósito comercial.
g. A menos que se estipule lo contrario, no
A. en el agregado, instale o use más de una copia de la versión Trial/demo y la versión Lite no comercial
del Software,
B. Descargue la versión Trial/demo y la versión Lite no comercial del software bajo más de un nombre de
usuario,

19
C. alterar el contenido de un disco duro o un sistema informático para permitir el uso de la versión
Trial/demo del software por un período agregado en eXcess del período de prueba para una licencia
a dicha versión de prueba/demo,

20
 D. revelar los resultados de los benchmarks de rendimiento de software obtenidos mediante la versión
Trial/demo o versión no comercial Lite a cualquier tercero sin PremiumSoft consentimiento previo
por escrito, o
E. Utilice la versión de prueba/demo del software para un propósito que no sea el único propósito de
determinar si Para compra a licencia Para a comercial o Educación Versión de la software; siempre, sin
embargo, a pesar de la foregOING, está estrictamente prohibido instalar o utilizar la versión
Trial/demo o la versión Lite no comercial del software para cualquier formación comercial propósito.
h. Sólo puede utilizar la versión no para reventa del software para revisar y evaluar el Software.
i. Usted puede recibir el software en más de un medio, pero sólo debe instalar o utilizar un medio.
Independientemente del número de medios que reciba, puede utilizar sólo el medio apropiado para el
servidor o equipo en el que se encuentra el software que se instalará.
j. Puede recibir el software en más de una plataforma, pero sólo deberá instalar o utilizar un plataforma.
k. No usará el software para desarrollar ninguna aplicación que tenga la misma función primaria que la Software.
l. En el caso de que usted no cumpla con este CLUF, PremiumSoft puede rescindir la licencia y debe
destruir todas las copias del software (con todos los demás derechos de ambas partes y todas las
demás disposiciones de este EULA sobreviviendo cualquier terminación).
m. Este PRogram puede incluir Oracle Instant Client (OCI). Usted está de acuerdo en que se
1. no uso del cliente instantáneo de Oracle en el negocio operaciones;
2. no asignar, dar o transferir el cliente instantáneo de Oracle o un interés en ellos a otro individuo o
entidad;
a. hacer THe los programas disponibles de cualquier manera a cualquier tercero para el
uso en el tercer operaciones comerciales del partido; y
b. el título de los programas de pasar al usuario final o a cualquier otro partido;
3. no ingeniería inversa, desmontar o descompilar el cliente instantáneo de Oracle y duplicar los
programas excepto para a suficiente número de copias de cada Programa para su licencia uso y uno
copia de cada medio de programa;
4. Deje uso y destruir o volver Para todos copias de la Oracle Instante Cliente y documentación después
de la terminación de la Acuerdo;
5. no pubish ningún resultado de pruebas de referencia que se ejecuten en el Programas;
6. cumplir plenamente con todas las leyes y reglamentos de exportación pertinentes de los Estados
Unidos y otras leyes aplicables de exportación e importación para asegurar que ni el cliente
instantáneo de Oracle, ni ningún producto directo de los mismos, se exporten, directa o
indirectamente, en violación de aplicable leyes;
7. permitir a PremiumSoft auditar el uso de Oracle Instant Cliente;

4. Actualizaciones

Si esta copia del software es una actualización de una versión anterior del software, se le proporciona en una base
de intercambio de licencias. Usted acuerda por su instalación y uso de tal copia del software para terminar
voluntariamente su EULA anterior y que you no continuará utilizando la versión anterior del software ni la transferirá
a otra persona o entidad a menos que dicha transferencia esté de acuerdo con la sección 3.

5. Propiedad

21
La licencia anterior le da licencia limitada para usar el software. PremiumSoft y sus proveedores conservan todos los
derechos, títulos e intereses, incluidos todos los derechos de autor y de propiedad intelectual, en y para el software
(como un trabajo independiente y como un trabajo subyacente que sirve como base para cualquier aplicación que
pueda desarrollar), und todas las copias de las mismas. Todos los derechos no concedidos específicamente en este
CLUF, incluidos los derechos de autor federales e internacionales, son reservados por PremiumSoft y sus
proveedores.

6. Garantía limitada y Descargo

a. Excepto con respecto a la versión de prueba/demo, no-Commerversión de cial Lite y no para la versión de
reventa del software, PremiumSoft garantiza que, para a período de treinta 30) días De la fecha de entrega
(como evidencia por una copia de su recibo): el medio físico en el cual el software está amueblado estará
libre de defectos en materiales y mano de obra bajo uso normal. El software se suministra "tal cual".
PremiumSoft no hace garantías, expresas o implícitas, que surjan de cla nuestra de la negociación o el uso
del comercio, o la ley, en cuanto a cualquier asunto en absoluto.
b. PremiumSoft no ofrece ningún recurso o garantía, ya sea explícita o implícita, para el juicio/demo
versión no comercial Lite y la versión no para reventa del software. Trial/demo Versión
La versión Lite no comercial y la versión no para reventa del software se proporcionan "tal cual".
c. Salvo lo estipulado en la orden limitada anteriory con respecto al software que no sea prueba/versión demo,
versión Lite no comercial y no para la versión de reventa, PremiumSoft y sus proveedores renuncian a todas
las demás garantías y representaciones, ya sean expresas, implícitas o de otro tipo, incluidas las
garantíalazos de comerciabilidad o idoneidad para un fin determinado. También, no hay garantía de la no-
infracción y el título o el goce reservado. PremiumSoft no garantiza que el software esté libre de errores o
que funcionará sin interrupción. El software no es diseñado, destinado o autorizado para su uso en entornos
peligrosos que requieran controles a prueba de fallas, incluyendo, sin limitación, el diseño, la construcción, el
mantenimiento o la operación de instalaciones nucleares, avión navegación o comunicación sistemas, aire
tráfic control, y vida apoyo o armas sistemas. PremiumSoft específicamente renuncia a cualquier garantía
expresa o implícita de idoneidad para tales fines.
d. Si aplicable Ley requiere cualquier garantías con respeto Para la Software, todos como garantías son limitada
en duración de treinta (30) días a partir de la fecha de entrega.
e. Ninguna información o Consejo oral o escrito proporcionado por PremiumSoft, sus distribuidores,
distribuidores, agentes o empleados creará una garantía o de cualquier manera aumentará el alcance de
cualquier garantía proporcionada Aquí.

7. Limitación de Responsabilidad

(a) ni PremiumSoft ni sus proveedores serán responsables ante usted o cualquier tercero por daños indirectos,
especiales, INCIDENTALES, punitivos o consecuentes (incluyendo, pero no limitándose a, daños por la incapacidad
de usar equipost o los datos de acceso, pérdida de negocio, pérdida de beneficios, interrupción del negocio o
similares), que surjan del uso de, o la incapacidad de usar, el software y basado en cualquier teoría de
responsabilidad incluyendo incumplimiento de contrato, incumplimiento de la garantía,
agravio (incluyendo NEGligence), responsabilidad del producto o de otro tipo, incluso si PremiumSoft o sus
representantes han sido advertidos de la posibilidad de tales daños.

22
8. Tercera parte Software

El software puede contener software de terceros que requiera avisos y/o términos y condiciones adicionales. Al
aceptar este CLUF, usted también acepta los términos y condiciones adicionales del software de terceros.

23
9. General

Ningún distribuidor, agente o empleado de PremiumSoft está autorizado a hacer ninguna enmienda a este CLUF.

Este CLUF contiene el acuerdo completo entre las partes con respecto a la materia de que se trata, y sustituye a
todos los acuerdos anteriores o contemporáneos o understandings, ya sea oral o escrita. Usted acepta que cualquier
término variado o adicional contenido en cualquier orden de compra u otra notificación escrita o documento emitido
por usted en relación con el software licenciado bajo el presente no tendrá ningún efecto. El fracaso o retraso de
PremiumSoft para ejercitar cualquiera de sus derechos bajo este CLUF o sobre cualquier incumplimiento de este
CLUF no se considerará una renuncia de esos derechos o de la infracción.

Si alguna disposición de este CLUF será mantenida por un tribunal de jurisdicción competente para ser contrary a la
ley, esa disposición se aplicará en la medida máxima permitida, y las disposiciones restantes de este CLUF
permanecerán en plena vigencia y efecto.

10. Base de Ganga

La garantía limitada y la responsabilidad limitada establecidasre elementos fundamentales de la base del acuerdo
entre PremiumSoft y usted. PremiumSoft no sería capaz de proporcionar el software sobre una base económica sin
tales limitaciones. Tal garantía limitada y responsabilidad limitada redundará a la beneficio de los licenciantes de
PremiumSoft.

11. Plazo

Al descargar y/o instalar este software, el licenciante acepta los términos de este CLUF.

Esta licencia es efectiva hasta su terminación. El licenciante tiene el derecho de rescindir su licencia
inmediatamente si usted no cumple con cualquier término de esta licencia.

"tal cual". El licenciante no otorga garantías, expresas o implícitas, que surjan del curso de negociación o USAGe del
comercio, o la ley, en cuanto a cualquier asunto en absoluto. En particular, se excluyen expresamente todas y cada
una de las garantías o comerciabilidad, idoneidad para un propósito particular o no infracción de los derechos de
terceros.

12. Consejo Ley

Esta licencia se regirád por las leyes vigentes en Hong Kong. Por la presente, usted da su consentimiento a la
jurisdicción no exclusiva y sede en Hong Kong para resolver cualquier disputa que surja en virtud de este CLUF.

Si tiene alguna pregunta acerca de la validez de esta licencia, por favor comuníquese con: [email protected]. Si
desea ponerse en contacto con el licenciante por cualquier otra razón, póngase en contacto con
[email protected].

PremiumSoft y otras marcas registradas contienenEd en el software son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales
registradas de PremiumSoft CyberTech Ltd. en los Estados Unidos y/o en otros países. Las marcas registradas,
nombres comerciales, nombres de productos y logotipos de terceros pueden ser las marcas registradas o marcas
24
registradas de su respepropietarios de ctive. Usted no puede remover o alterar ninguna marca registrada, nombres
comerciales, nombres de productos, logotipos, derechos de autor u otros avisos de propiedad, leyendas, símbolos o
etiquetas en el

25
Software. Este CLUF no le autoriza a utilizar PremiumSoft o sus nombres de licenciantes ni ninguna de sus marcas
comerciales respectivas.

26
Conexión
Para empezar trabajo con tu servidor en Navicat, usted debe primera establecer a conexión o varios conexiones
usando la ventana de conexión. Si usted es nuevo en el servidor o ' net en general ' y no está muy seguro de cómo
funcionan las cosas, es posible que desee ver:

 Usuario de MySQL Manual

 Base de datos Oracle Documentación
 Usuario de PostgreSQL Manual
 Usuario de SQLite Manual
 SQL Server MSDN Biblioteca
 Documentación de MariaDB

Para crear una nueva conexión, haga clic en o elija Archivo -> Nueva conexión. A continuación, introduzca la
información necesaria en las propiedades de conexión ventana.

Después de haber creado las conexiones, las bases de datos/esquemas aparecerán en el panel conexión. Si el
Mostrar objetos en el panel conexión la opción se comprueba en el Opciones Window, todos los objetos de
esquema de base de datos también se muestran en el panel. Para conectarse a una base de datos/esquema,
simplemente haga doble clic en él en el panel.

Nota: Navicat le autoriza a hacer conexión a servidores remotos que se ejecutan en DIFplataformas diferentes, es
decir, Windows, Mac, Linux y Unix.

Puede editar la información de conexión haciendo clic con el botón derecho en la conexión y elija

Editar conexión. Navicat Cloud

Para copiar o mover una conexión entre Mis conexiones y Navicat Cloud, Haga clic con el botón derecho en la conexión y
elija
Copiar conexión a o Mover conexión a.

Flush MySQL/MariaDB Connection

Ras tiene varias formas variantes que borran o recargan varias cachés internas, limpian tablas o adquieren bloqueos.
Para ejecutar Flush, you debe tener la Cargar privilegio, vea Seguridad de MySQL/MariaDB.

Haga clic con el botón derecho en la conexión y seleccione Ras en el menú emergente.

Privilegios Volver a cargar los privilegios de las tablas de permisos en el MySQL base.
Hosts Vacíe las tablas de caché de host. Debe vaciar las tablas del host si algunos de sus anfitriones
cambian el número de IP o si recibe el mensaje de error El host ' host_name ' está bloqueado.
Cuando más de max_connect_errors los errores se producen en una fila para un host dado,
mientras que la conexión a Mservidor ySQL, MySQL asume que algo está mal y bloquea el

27
 host de otras solicitudes de conexión.
Al purgar las tablas del host, el host intenta conectarse de nuevo.

Registros Cierra y reabre todos los archivos de registro. Si ha especificado el archivo de registro de
actualización o una barchivo de registro inary

28
 sin una extensión, el número de extensión del archivo de registro será incrementado por uno
relativo al archivo anterior. Si ha utilizado una extensión en el nombre de archivo, MySQL
cerrará y volverá a abrir
el archivo de registro de actualización.
Estado Restablecer la mayoría de las variables de estado a cero. Esto es algo que uno sólo debe usar
al depurar un
consulta.
Mesas Cierre todas las mesas abiertas y obligue a cerrar todas las tablas en uso.

Configuración de Firewall de SQL Azure

No puede conectarse a SQL Azure hasta que haya concedido el acceso IP de su cliente. Para acceder a la base de
datos de SQL Azure desde su ordenador, asegúrese de que el cortafuegos permite la comunicación TCP saliente en
el puerto TCP 1433. Debe tener al menos una regla de cortafuegos antes de puede conexión a SQL Azure.

Haga clic con el botón derecho en la conexión de SQL Azure y seleccione Reglas de Firewall de SQL Azure en el
menú emergente. Puede Agregar una nueva regla proporcionando un rango de dirección IP.

Cuenta de prueba

Navicat proporciona las cuentas evaluadas para el

propósito de prueba. Los ajustes de conexión del

servidor MySQL remoto son:

 Nombre de host/dirección IP: Server1.Navicat.com

 Puerto: 4406
 Nombre de usuario: Navicat
 Contraseña: testnavicat

La configuración remota de la conexión del servidor PostgreSQL es:

 Nombre de host/dirección IP: Server1.Navicat.com

 Puerto: 5432
 Base de datos inicial: HR
 Nombre de usuario: Navicat
 Contraseña: testnavicat

Nube de PremiumSoft Navicat

Navicat Cloud proporciona un servicio de nube para sincronizar conexiones Navicat, consultas, modelos y grupos
virtuales de diferentes máquinas y plataformas. Después de agregar una conexión para Navicat Cloud, sus ajustes de
conexión y consultas se almacenan en Navicat Cloud. Puede sincronizar archivos de modelo a Navicat Cloud y crear
grupos virtuales en Navicat Cloud. Todos los objetos de la nube Navicat se encuentran bajo diferentes proyectos.

29
Usted puede Share el proyecto a otras cuentas de la nube de Navicat para la colaboración.

30
Crear una cuenta nueva

1. Elegir Archivo -> Navicat Cloud de la principal menú.

2. Clic Crear Navicat ID.
3. Introduzca la información requerida y haga clic en Únete botón. Un correo electrónico de verificación se enviará a su
correo electrónico Dirección.
4. Haga clic en el enlace en el correo electrónico para verificar el nuevo cuenta.

Pista: Puede iniciar sesión con el mismo identificador de Navicat que utiliza para el centro de atención al cliente de Navicat.

Regístrate en Navicat Cloud

1. Elegir Archivo -> Navicat Cloud de la principal menú.

2. Introduzca su Navicat ID y Contraseña.
3. Clic Inicia sesión botón.
4. Si ha activado la verificación de dos pasos en Navicat Cloud portal el sitio, un código será enviado a su
teléfono vía su móvil unPP. Ingrese el código recibido para firmar en.

Crear un proyecto

1. Seleccione Navicat Nube.

2. Haga clic con el botón derecho y elija Nuevo Proyecto.

Agregar miembros a un proyecto

1. Haga clic con el botón derecho en un proyecto y elija Colaborar con.

2. Clic Añadir Miembros.
3. Ingrese el Navicat de los miembros ID.

31
 4. Seleccione el miembro papel.
5. Clic Añadir.

Roles de miembro Privilegios

Propietario Leer objetos, escribir objetos, administrar miembros y eliminar proyecto
Admin Leer objetos, escribir objetos y administrar miembros
Miembro Leer objetos y escribir objetos
Comentarios Leer objetos

Nota: Cada vez puede sumar hasta 10 miembros. Utilice coma o ENTER para separar los miembros en el cuadro de edición.

Administrar miembros en un proyecto

1. Haga clic con el botón derecho en un proyecto y elija Colaborar con.

2. Clic Aplicar después cambios.

Nota: Si usted es el propietario o administrador, puede hacer clic en el botón x para quitar el miembro.

Salir de un proyecto

1. Haga clic con el botón derecho en un proyecto y elija Salir del proyecto.

Mover/copiar una conexión a Navicat Cloud

1. Haga clic con el botón derecho en una conexión Mis conexiones y elija Mover Connección a o Copiar conexión
Para.
2. Seleccione un proyecto existente o cree un nuevo proyecto.
3. La conexión se moverá o copiará a Navicat Cloud. Y, todos sus archivos de consulta se almacenarán en Navicat
Nube.

Mover/copiar una conexión a mis conexiones

1. Haga clic con el botón derecho en una conexión Navicat Cloud y elija Mover conexión a o Copiar conexión a ->
Mis conexiones.
2. La conexión se moverá o copiará a mi Conexiones.

Mover un modelo a Navicat Cloud

1. Seleccione un archivo de modelo en Mi Conexiones.

2. Arrastrar y soltar el archivo de modelo a un proyecto en Navicat Nube.

Mover un modelo a mis conexiones

1. Seleccione un archivo de modelo en un proyecto bajo Navicat Nube.

2. Arrastre y suelte el archivo de modelo para Mi Conexiones.

Ver el uso de la nube

32
 1. Elija Archivo -> Navicat Cloud del menú principal.

Nota: Una conexión, una consulta, un modelo o un grupo virtual cuentan para una unidad.

Cambia tu avatar

1. Elegir Archivo -> Navicat Cloud de la principal menú.

2. Haga clic en el imagen.
3. Elija un archivo de imagen.

Administre su cuenta de Navicat Cloud

1. Elegir Archivo -> Navicat Cloud de la principal menú.

2. Haga clic en su correo electrónico y elija Administrar Cuenta.
3. Se abrirá un navegador con Navicat Cloud portal sitio.

Actualizar/administrar el plan de nube de Navicat

1. Elegir Archivo -> Navicat Cloud de la principal menú.

2. Clic Actualización o Administrar Plan.
3. Se abrirá un navegador con Navicat Cloud portal sitio.

Regístrate Navicat Cloud

1. Haga clic con el botón derecho Navicat Cloud y elija Cerrar todas las conexiones para cerrar todas las conexiones
bajo Navicat Nube.
2. Elegir Archivo -> Navicat Cloud de la principal menú.
3. Haga clic en su correo electrónico y elija Signo Fuera.

Configuración general

Para establecer con éxito una nueva conexión con el servidor local/remoto-sin importar a través de SSL, SSH o
http, establezca las propiedades de conexión en la ficha General. Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP) no
proporciona acceso directo a su servidor, asegure el túnel Protocol (SSH)/http es otra solución. Escriba un nombre
descriptivo para describir mejor su conexión en Nombre de la conexión cuadro de texto.

Después que sesión en Navicat Nube característica, que puede elegir Para salvar la conexión Para Mi Conexiones o la
proyectos en Navicat Cloud De Añadir Para lista desplegable. Si elige Mis conexiones, sus ajustes de conexión y
consultas se almacenan en la local máquina. Cuando edición a conexión en Navicat Nube, que puede elegir Para
sincronizar la usuario nombre a Cloud al habilitar el Sincronizar nombre de usuario con Navicat Cloud opción.

Conexiones de MySQL y MariaDB

Puede conectarse a su servidor MySQL de forma remota sin embargo por razones de seguridad las conexiones
directas remotas nativas al servidor MySQL están deshabilitadas. Por, no puede utilizar Navicat Premium u otras

33
aplicaciones administrativas MySQL similares que se ejecutan en su equipo para conectarse al servidor remoto
directamente a menos que el Privilegios de usuario se ha configurado.

34
De forma predeterminada, MySQL da "root" como nombre de usuario y deja el campo de contraseña en blanco.

Nombre de host/dirección IP
Nombre de host en el que se sitúa la base de datos o la dirección IP del servidor.

Puerto
Un puerto TCP/IP para conectarse al servidor de base de datos.

Nombre de usuario
Nombre de usuario para conectarse al servidor de base de datos.

Contraseña
Contraseña para conectarse al servidor.

Conexión de Oracle

Navicat soporta 2 tipos de conexión de servidor Oracle. En Básica Mode, Navicat se conecta a Oracle a través de la
interfaz de llamada de Oracle (OCI). OCI es una interfaz de programación de aplicaciones que permite a un
desarrollador de aplicaciones utilizar un
llamadas de funciones o procedimientos nativos del lenguaje de tercera generación para acceder a la base de datos
Oracle servidor y controlar todas las fases de ejecución de la sentencia SQL. OCI es una biblioteca de funciones de
acceso y recuperación de bases de datos estándar en forma de una biblioteca de vínculos dinámicos.

En TNS Mode, Navicat se conecta a Oracle Server mediante una entrada de alias de un tnsnames. ora archivo a
través de la interfaz de llamada de Oracle (OCI). OCI es una interfaz de programación de aplicaciones que permite a
un desarrollador de aplicaciones utilizar un
las llamadas de funciones o procedimientos nativos del lenguaje de tercera generación para acceder al servidor de
bases de datos Oracle y controlar todas las faseses de la ejecución de la sentencia SQL. OCI es una biblioteca de
funciones de acceso y recuperación de bases de datos estándar en forma de una biblioteca de vínculos dinámicos.

De forma predeterminada, Oracle creó una serie de cuentas de usuario en la instalación. Cuentas
administrativas: sys, System, SYSMAN, y DBSNMP. Cuentas de esquema de ejemplo: Scott, HR, OE, OC, PM,
IX y SH.

Tipo de conexión

Básica Nombre de host/dirección IP

Nombre de host en el que se sitúa la base de datos o la dirección IP del servidor.

Puerto
Un puerto TCP/IP para conectarse al servidor de base de datos.

Nombre de servicio/SID
Defina el nombre de servicio/SID que el usuario conecta al realizar la conexión. Seleccione el botón de
radio correspondiente.

35
TNS El usuario debe proporcionar la Nombre del servicio net.

36
Nombre de usuario
Nombre de usuario para conectarse al servidor de base de datos.

Contraseña
Contraseña para conectarse al servidor.

Ver
también:
Opciones
de ocio

Conexión PostgreSQL

Por razones de seguridad, las conexiones directas remotas nativas al servidor PostgreSQL están deshabilitadas. Por
lo tanto, es posible que no pueda utilizar Navicat Premium u otras aplicaciones similares de administración de
PostgreSQL que se ejecuten en el equipo para conectarse al servidor remoto. Por default, PostgreSQL sólo permite
conexiones desde el equipo local mediante conexiones TCP/IP. Otras máquinas no podrán conectarse a menos que
modifique listen_addresses En PostgreSQL. conf archivo, habilite la autenticación basada en host modificando la
$PGDATA/pg_hba.conf archivo, y reiniciar el servidor. Para más información: Autenticación de cliente

Por defecto, PostgreSQL da "Postgres" como nombre de usuario y deja la contraseña campo en blanco.

Nombre de host/dirección IP
Nombre de host en el que se sitúa la base de datos o la dirección IP del servidor.

Puerto
Un puerto TCP/IP para conectarse al servidor de base de datos.

Base de datos inicial

La base de datos inicial a la que se conecta el usuario al realizar la conexión.

Nombre de usuario
Nombre de usuario para conectarse al servidor de base de datos.

Contraseña
Contraseña para conectarse al servidor.

Conexión SQLite

Puede elegir el Tipo de la base de datos SQLite y especifique la ruta del archivo.

Archivo de base de datos existente

Conectar una base de datos existente En Archivo de base de datos.

Nuevo SQLite 3
Crear una nueva base de datos SQLite 3 en el Archivo de base de datos.

37
Nuevo SQLite 2
Crear una nueva base de datos SQLite 2 en el Archivo de base de datos.

Archivo de base de datos

Especifique el archivo de base de datos inicial. Si el túnel http está habilitado, deberá introducir una ruta de archivo
absoluta del archivo de base de datos en el servidor Web.

Nombre de usuario
Nombre de usuario para conectarse a una base de datos existente.

Contraseña
Contraseña para conectarse a un base.

Conexión de SQL

Server Nombre de

host/dirección IP
Nombre de host en el que se sitúa la base de datos o la dirección IP del servidor.

Autenticación
SQL Server utiliza dos formas de validar las conexiones a las bases de datos de SQL Server: Autenticación de SQL Server
y
Ventanas autenticación.

SQL Server La autenticación de SQL Server utiliza registros de inicio de sesión para validar la
conexión. Los usuarios deben
Autenticación
proporcione su login del servidor: Nombre de usuario y Contraseña.
Autenticación de Cuando un usuario se conecta a través de una cuenta de usuario de Windows, SQL
Windows
Server valida el nombre de cuenta y la contraseña mediante el token principal de
Windows en el sistema operativo. Esto significa que Windows confirma la identidad del
usuario. SQL Server no
no pedir la PAc0ntr, y no realiza la validación de identidad.

Configuración avanzada

Ubicación de configuración
Cuando se establece una nueva conexión, Navicat creará una subcarpeta en la ubicación de configuración. La
mayoría de los archivos se almacenan en esta subcarpeta:

Objetos Navicat Tipos de servidor Extensiones de archivo

Consulta Todos . SQL
Exportar Perfil de resultados MySQL . npeq
de consulta
Oracle . nopeq
PostgreSQL . nppeq
38
SQLite . nlpeq
SQL Server . nspeq
MariaDB . nmpeq

39
Exportar Ver perfil de MySQL . npev
resultados
Oracle . nopev
PostgreSQL . nppev
SQLite . nlpev
SQL Server . nspev
MariaDB . nmpev
Backup MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite comprimido (. PSC), sin comprimir (. PSB)
y MariaDB
Perfil de copia de seguridad MySQL . NPB
PostgreSQL . nppb
SQLite . nlpb
SQL Server . NSPB
MariaDB . nmpb
Informe Todos . RTM
Importar perfil del asistente MySQL . NPI
Oracle . nopi
PostgreSQL . NPPI
SQLite . nlpi
SQL Server . NSPI
MariaDB . nmpi
Exportar perfil del asistente MySQL .
Oracle . NOP
PostgreSQL . NPPE
SQLite . nlpe
SQL Server . sentirme
MariaDB . nmpe
Exportar vista materializada Oracle . nopem
Perfil PostgreSQL . nppem
Archivo de diagrama er Todos . Descargar
Perfil de exportación de Oracle . exp
bombeo de datos

Otros archivos se encuentran en el perfiles directorio. Para buscar la ruta, elija Herramientas -> Opciones -> Varios ->
Ubicación de perfiles.

Otros archivos Tipos de servidor Extensiones de archivo

Transferencia de datos MySQL . NPT
Oracle . Nopt
PostgreSQL . nppt
SQLite . NLPt
SQL Server . nspt
MariaDB . nmpt
Premium (servidor cruzado) . NAPT
40
Sincronización de datos MySQL . NPD
Oracle . Orleáns
PostgreSQL . nppd
SQLite . nlpd
SQL Server . nspd
MariaDB . DPNM
Sincronización de la MySQL . NPS
estructura
Oracle . Nops
PostgreSQL . CCNN
SQL Server . NSPs
MariaDB . nmps
Trabajo por lotes MySQL . NPJ
Oracle . nopj
PostgreSQL . nppj
SQLite . nlpj
SQL Server . Sed
MariaDB . nmpj
Premium (servidor cruzado) . napj
Archivo de modelo Todos . NDM
Agrupación virtual Todos VGroup. JSON-almacena cómo son los objetos
Categorizado.

Ver
también:
Archivos
de
registro

Conexión automática
Con esta opción, Navicat abrirá automáticamente la conexión con la base de datos registrada en el inicio de la aplicación.

Conexiones de MySQL y MariaDB

Codificación
Elige un CodePage para comunicarte con MySQL Server mientras que el conjunto de caracteres MySQL no es EMPloyed.

Intervalo de KeepAlive (SEC)

Esta opción le permite mantener viva la conexión con el servidor mediante un ping. Puede establecer el período entre
pings en el campo editar.

Usar compresión
Esta opción le permite utilizar el protocolo de compresión. Se utiliza si bel cliente y el servidor soportan la compresión
zlib y el cliente solicita compresión.

Utilice la pipa nombrada, zócalo

41
Con esta opción, Navicat utiliza el archivo socket para la conexión localhost.

42
Conexión de Oracle

Papel
Indicar que el usuario de la base de datos se está conectando ya sea con el Defecto, SYSOPER o Sysdba privilegio del
sistema.

Intervalo de KeepAlive (SEC)

Esta opción le permite mantener viva la conexión con el servidor mediante un ping. Puede establecer el período entre
pings en el campo editar.

Autenticación del SO
Con esta opción, la base de datos Oracle utiliza credenciales de inicio de sesión de usuario de Windows para autenticar
usuarios de bases de datos.

Conexión PostgreSQL Intervalo

de KeepAlive (SEC)
Esta opción le permite mantener la conexión con el servidor activo by ping. Puede establecer el período entre pings en
el campo editar

Conexión SQLite

Cifrado
Habilite esta opción y proporcione Contraseña al conectarse a una base de datos SQLite encriptada.

Base de datos adjunta

Para adjuntar o separar bases de datos en la conexión.

Conexión de SQL

Server Base de datos

inicial
La base de datos inicial a la que se conecta el usuario al realizar la conexión.

Intervalo de KeepAlive (SEC)

Esta opción le permite mantener viva la conexión con el servidor mediante un ping. Puede establecer el período entre
pings en el campo editar.

Usar encriptación
Esta opción le permite utilizar el cifrado.

Propiedades de bases de datos avanzadas para MySQL, PostgreSQL y MariaDB

Defina las propiedades de base de datos avanzadas, que no son obligatorias. Para empezar a trabajar con la
configuración de base de datos avanzada, CheCK el Utilizar conexiones avanzadas. La descripción detallada se da
abajo:
43
Para mostrar las bases de datos seleccionadas en el cerca Estado en el panel conexión, haga clic en las
bases de datos preferibles del cuadro de lista bases de datos. La casilla de verificación mostrará como

44
Para Mostrar la seleccionado bases en la abierto Estado en la Conexión panel, Haga doble clic en la preferible bases en el
cuadro de lista bases de datos. La casilla de verificación mostrará como

Para agregar una base de datos oculta

1. Clic Agregar dB a la lista botón.

2. Ingrese a la base de datos nombre.
3. Seleccione la base de datos recién agregada en la lista de base de datos caja.

Para quitar una base de datos, seleccione la base de datos en el cuadro de la lista bases y haga clic en

Quitar dB de la lista botón. Nota: La base de datos se acaba de quitar del cuadro de lista de bases, y

seguirá existiendo en el servidor.

Propiedades de base de datos avanzadas para SQLite

Puede hacer clic en Adjuntar base de datos para adjuntar un archivo de base de datos.

Opción Descripción
Archivo de base Defina la ruta de acceso del archivo para una base de datos.
de datos
Nombre de base Introduzca el nombre de la base de datos que aparece en Navicat.
de datos
Cifrado Habilite esta opción y proporcione Contraseña al conectarse a una base de datos SQLite
encriptada.

Para separar una base de datos, selecciónela de la lista y haga clic en Separar base de datos botón.

Configuración de SSL

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) es un protocolo para la transmisión de documentos privados a través de Internet. Para
obtener una conexión segura, lo primero que debe hacer esdetiene la librería openssl y descarga la base de datos.

Nota: Disponible sólo para MySQL, PostgreSQL y MariaDB.

Soporte de PostgreSQL 8.4 o posterior.

Conexiones de MySQL y MariaDB

Para proporcionar datos de autenticación, habilite Usar autenticación y rellene la información requerida:

Clave de cliente
El archivo de clave SSL en formato PEM que se usará para establecer una conexión segura.

Certificado de cliente
El archivo de certificado SSL en formato PEM que se usará para establecer una conexión segura.

45
Certificado de CA
La ruta de acceso a un archivo en formato PEM que contiene una lista de autoridades de certificados SSL de confianza.

46
Verificar nombre de certificado de CA
Compruebe el valor del nombre común del servidor en el certificado que el servidor envía al cliente.

Cifrado especificado
Una lista de cifrados permisibles para usar para encriptación SSL.

Conexión PostgreSQL

Elija el Modo SSL:

requieren Sólo pruebe una conexión SSL.

Verify-CA Sólo pruebe una conexión SSL y compruebe que el certificado de servidor es emitido por una
CA de confianza.
Comprobación Sólo pruebe una conexión SSL, compruebe que el certificado de servidor es emitido por una
completa CA de confianza y que
el nombre de host del servidor coincide con el del certificado.

Para proporcionar datos de autenticación, habilite Usar autenticación y rellene la información requerida:

Clave de cliente
La ruta de acceso de la clave privada del cliente.

Certificado de cliente
La ruta del certificado de cliente.

Certificado de CA
La ruta de acceso de las autoridades de certificados de confianza.

Lista de revocación de certificados

La ruta del archivo de la lista de revocación de certificados SSL (CRL).

Configuración de SSH

Secure Shell (SSH) es un programa para iniciar sesión en otro equipo a través de una red, ejecutar comandos
en un servidor remoto y mover archivos de una máquina a otra. Proporciona autenticación sólida y asegura
comunicaciones encriptadas entre dos hosts, conocidos como Puerto ssh ForwardIng (túneles), sobre una red
insegura.
Típicamente, se emplea como una versión encriptada de Telnet.

En una sesión telnet, todas las comunicaciones, incluido el nombre de usuario y la contraseña, se transmiten en texto
sin formato, lo que permite a cualquier persona escuchar en su sesión unND robar contraseñas y otra información.
Estas sesiones también son susceptibles a sesiones secuestro, donde a malicioso usuario toma sobre su sesión vez
que han autenticado. SSH sirve Para evitar tales vulnerabilidades y le permite acceder a un serv remotoShell de ER
sin comprometer seguridad.

Nota: Disponible sólo para MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQL Server y MariaDB.
47
Favor hacer seguro que la parámetro - "AllowTcpForwarding" en la Linux servidor debe ser conjunto Para valor "sí", de
lo contrario, el SSH Puerto expedición se ser discapacitados. Para Mira para la camino: /etc/ssh/sshd_config. Por
defecto, la SSH Puerto el reenvío debe estar activado. Por favor, comprueba la configuración del valor.

** Incluso el servidor compatible con el túnel SSH, sin embargo, si el reenvío del puerto está deshabilitado, Navicat no
puede conectarse a través del puerto ssh 22.

Nombre de host/dirección IP
Un host donde se activa el servidor SSH.

Puerto
Un puerto donde se activa el servidor SSH, por defecto es 22.

Nombre de usuario
Un usuario en SSH Server Machine. (no es un usuario del servidor de base de datos.)

Método de autenticación

Contraseña Proporcionar el usuario del servidor SSH Contraseña.

Clave Clave privada
pública
Se utiliza junto con su llave pública. La clave privada sólo debe ser legible por ti.

Contraseña
A contraseña es exactamente como a contraseña, excepto que es aplica Para la llaves que son
generar y no es un cuenta.

Nota: Navicat nombre de host en la ficha General debe ser establecido relativamente al servidor SSH que proporciona
por su compañía de alojamiento de base de datos.

Configuración http
El túnel http es un método para conectarse a un servidor que utiliza el mismo protocolo (http://) y el mismo puerto
(puerto 80) que un servidor Web. Se utiliza mientras que sus ISPs no permiten conexiones directas, pero permite
establecer conexiones http.

Nota: Benefíciatesólo se puede para MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite y MariaDB.

Cargando el script de tunelización

Para utilizar este método de conexión, lo primero que debe hacer es cargar la secuencia de comandos de túnel en el
servidor web donde se encuentra su servidor.

Nota: ntunnel_mysql. php (por tanto MySQL como MariaDB), ntunnel_pgsql. php o ntunnel_sqlite. php está
disponible en la carpeta de instalación de Navicat.

48
Configuración del túnel http

La siguiente instrucción le guía a través del proceso de configuración de una conexión http.

1. Seleccione la ficha http y habilite Utilizar http Túnel.

2. Introduzca la URL de la secuencia de comandos de túnel, p. ej. http://www.Navicat.com/ntunnel_mysql.php .
3. Si el servidor instaló un cortafuegos de aplicación Web, puede comprobar el Codificar la consulta saliente con
Base64
opción.
4. Si el script de tunelización está alojado en un servidor protegido por contraseña o tiene que acceder a
Internet en un servidor proxy, usted puede proporcionar el requerirdetalles de autenticación de Ed en
Autenticación o Proxy ficha.
5. Navicat nombre de host en la página Configuración general debe establecerse relativamente al servidor
HTTP que proporcionó por su Hosting de base de datos empresa.

Nota: Túnel http y túnel SSH no pueden funcionar simultáneamente. El túnel SSH se desactiva al seleccionar el túnel
http y viceversa.

49
Objetos de servidor
Navicat proporciona potentes herramientas para administrar objetos de servidor, como bases de datos,

tablas, vers, funciones, etc. Nota: Antes de trabajar con los objetos del servidor en Navicat, debe establecer

primero la conexión.

Objetos MySQL/MariaDB

Para empezar a trabajar con los objetos del servidor, debe crear y abrir una conexión. Si el servidor está vacío, usted
Need para hacer clic con el botón derecho en la conexión en el panel de conexión y seleccione Nueva base de
datos para crear una nueva base de datos.

Para editar una propiedad de base de datos existente, haga clic con el botón derecho en la base de datos en el
panel de conexión y elija Editar base de datos. Por favor note que MySQL no soporta renombrar la base de datos a
través de su interfaz en este momento. Acceda al directorio en el que se almacenan las bases de datos. De forma
predeterminada, todas las bases de datos se almacenan en un directorio llamado datos en la carpeta de instalación
de MySQL. Para examplio: C:\mysql5\data.

Nota: Debe detener MySQL antes de poder cambiar el nombre de la base de datos.

Nombre de base de datos

Defina el nombre de una nueva base de datos.

Juego de caracteres
Especifique el conjunto de caracteres de base de datos predeterminado.

Colación
Especifique la colación de la base de datos predeterminada.

MySQL/Maritablas aDB

Las bases de datos relacionales utilizan tablas para almacenar información. Todas las operaciones en los datos se
realizan en las propias tablas o producen otra tabla como resultado. Una tabla es un conjunto de filas y columnas, y
sus intersecciones son campos. Desde una perspectiva general, columnas dentro a mesa describir la nombre y tipo de
datos que se ser encontrado por fila para que de la columna campos. Las filas dentro de una tabla representan
registros compuestos por campos que se describen de izquierda a derecha por el nombre y tipo de la columna

correspondiente. Cada campo de una fila está implícitamente correlacionado con el otro campo de esa fila. Clic
Para abierto
un objeclista t para Mesa.

Cuando abra una tabla con campos gráficos, haga clic con el botón derecho en una tabla y seleccione Tabla

50
abierta (rápida) en el menú emergente. Más rendimiento para apertura la gráfica mesa, como BLOB campos
imágenes) se no ser cargado hasta que clic en la célula. Si desea Navicat carga todas sus imágenes al abrir la tabla,
utilice Abierto Mesa.

Puede crear un acceso directo de tabla haciendo clic con el botón derecho en una tabla del panel de lista de objetos
y seleccione Crear acceso directo a la tabla abierta en el menú emergente. Esta opción se utiliza para
proporcionar una manera conveniente para que usted abra su tabla para introducir datos directamente sin activar el
Navicat principal.

51
Para vaciar una tabla, haga clic con el botón derecho en la tabla seleccionada y seleccione Tabla vacía en el
menú emergente. Esta opción sólo es aplicableEd cuando desee borrar todos los registros existentes sin reajustar
el valor de incremento automático. Para restablecer el valor de incremento automático mientras se vacía la tabla,
utilice Truncar tabla.

Campos de tabla MySQL/MariaDB

En Campos Tab, simplemente haga clic en un campo para editar. Un clic con el botón derecho del ratón muestra el
menú emergente o la barra de herramientas de campo, puede crear nuevos, insertar, mover y soltar el campo
seleccionado. Para buscar un nombre de campo, elija Editar -> Encontrar o presione Ctrl + F.

Botón Descripción

Añadir Campo Añada un campo a la tabla.

Inserte Campo Inserte un campo sobre un campo existente.
Nota: Soporte de MySQL 3,22 o posterior.
Eliminar Campo Elimine el campo seleccionado.
Primaria Clave Defina el campo como una clave principal.
Mover Mover Abajo Mueva el campo seleccionado arriba/abajo.
Nota: Soporte de MySQL 4.0.1 o posterior.

Para Añadir a Nuevo campo con modificación como uno de la existentes campos, que puede Haga clic con el botón
derecho y Seleccione la Duplicado Campo desde el pop-up menú.

Utilice el Nombre cuadro de edición para establecer el nombre del campo. Tenga en cuenta que el nombre del
campo debe ser único entre todos los nombres de campo de la tabla.

La Tipo la lista desplegable define el tipo de los datos de campo. Ver Tipos de datos de MySQL/Tipos de datos MariaDB para
más detalles.

Utilice el Longitud cuadro de edición para definir la longitud del campo y utilizar Decimales cuadro de edición para
definir el número de dígitos después del punto decimal (la escala) para el tipo de datos de punto flotante.

Nota: Tenga cuidado al acortar la longitud del campo, ya que podría causar pérdida de datos.

No nulo
Marque esta casilla para no permitir los valores NULL para el campo.

Virtual
Marque esta casilla para habilitar la configuración de columna

virtual del campo. Nota: Soporte de MariaDB 5.2 o posterior.

Primaria Clave
Una clave principal es un único campo o combinación de campos que define de forma única un registro. Ninguno de
los campos que forman parte de la clave principal puede contener un valor nulo.

52
Propiedades del campo

53
Nota: Las opciones siguientes dependen del Typ del campoe usted es elegido.

Defecto
Defina el valor predeterminado para el campo.

Comentario
Defina cualquier texto opcional que describa el campo actual.

Juego de caracteres
Un conjunto de caracteres es un conjunto de símbolos y codificaciones.

Colación
Una colación es un conjunto de reglas para comparar caracteres en un conjunto de caracteres.

Nota: MySQL elige el conjunto de caracteres de columna y la colación de la siguiente manera:

 Si el conjunto de caracteres X y COLLATE Y se especificaron, entonces el conjunto de caracteres X y la colación y

son utilizado.
 Si Carácter Conjunto X fue especificado sin COLLATE, entonces carácter conjunto X y su defecto colación son
utilizado.
 De lo contrario, el conjunto de caracteres de mesa y la colación utilizado.

Longitud de la llave
El cuadro de edición se activará cuando se establezca la clave principal.

Binario
A partir de MySQL 4.1, los valores en campos Char y VARCHAR se ordenan y comparan según la colación del
conjunto de caracteres asignado al campo.

Antes de MySQL 4.1, la ordenación y la comparación se basan en la colación del conjunto de caracteres del servidor;
Puedes declson el campo con el binario atributo Para causa clasificación y comparación Para ser basado en la numérico
valores de la bytes en valores de campo. Binario no afecta cómo se almacenan los valores de campo o Obtenido.

Incremento automático
El atributo auto Increment puede utilizarse para generar una identidad única para nuevas filas. Para empezar con
el valor de incremento automático distinto de 1, puede establecer ese valor en la ficha Opciones.

Sin
Los valores sin firmar se pueden utilizar cuando se desea permitir sólo los números en un campo y se necesita un
mayor rango numérico superior para el campo.

A partir de MySQL 4.0.2, los tipos de punto flotante y de punto fijo también pueden ser no firmados. A diferencia de los
tipos enteros, el rango superior de los valores de columna sigue siendo el mismo.

ZEROFILL
El relleno predeterminado de los espacios se sustituye por ceros. Por ejemplo, para un campo declarado como int (5)
ZEROFILL, un valor de
54
4 se recupera como 00004; para un campo declarado como Float (20, 10) ZEROFILL, un valor de 0.1 se recupera como
000000000,1000000015.

Nota: Si se especifica ZEROFILL para un tipo numérico, MySQL agrega automáticamente el atributo no firmada al campo.

En la actualización Current_Timestamp
A partir de 4.1.2, tiene más flexibilidad para decidir qué campo timestamp se inicializa automáticamente y
hastafechada en la marca horaria actual.

Valores
Utilice este cuadro de edición para definir los miembros de set/enum.

Tipo virtual
Elija el tipo de columna virtual. Virtual significa que la columna se calcula sobre la marcha cuando un comando lo nombra.
Persistente significa que el valor es físicamente almacenados en la

mesa. Nota: Soporte de MariaDB 5.2 o posterior.

Expresión
Especifique una expresión o función para evaluar en el

momento de la inserción. Nota: Soporte de MariaDB 5.2 o

posterior.

Índices de tabla de MySQL/MariaDB

Los índices son versiones organizadas de columnas específicas en las tablas. MySQL utiliza índices para facilitar la
recuperación rápida de los registros. Con los índices, MySQL puede saltar directamente a los registros que desee. Sin
ningún índice, MySQL tiene que leer todo el archivo de datos para fiND el (los) registro (es) correcto (s).

En Índices Tab, simplemente haga clic en un campo de índice para editar. Al utilizar la barra de herramientas índice,
puede crear nuevos, editar y eliminar el campo Índice seleccionado.

Botón Descripción
Añadir Índice Añada un índice a la tabla.
Eliminar Índice Elimine el índice seleccionado.

Utilice el Nombre cuadro de edición para establecer el nombre del índice.

Para incluir el (los) campo (s) en el índice, simplemente haga doble clic en el Campos campo o haga clic en para
abrir el editor para editarlo. Seleccione el campo (s) de la lista. Para quitar los campos del índice, desmarquelos de la
misma forma. También puede utilizar la
botones de flecha para cambiar el orden del campo (s) del índice. La Parte secundaria el cuadro (s) de

edición se utiliza para establecer la clave de índice LEngth. Nota: Algunos de los tipos de datos no permiten
55
indización por varios campos. Por ejemplo: BLOB

56
Tipo de índice
Defina el tipo del índice de tabla.

Normal Los índices normales son los índices más básicos, y no tienen restricciones tales
como
singularidad.
Único Los índices únicos son los mismos que los índices normales con una diferencia-
todo
los valores de las columnas indizadas sólo deben producirse una vez.
Texto completo Los índices de texto completo son utilizados por MySQL en búsquedas de texto
completo.

Index (método)
Especifique un tipo de índice al crear un índice, BTREE o hash.

Comentario
Defina cualquier texto opcional que describa el

índice actual. Nota: Soporte de MySQL 5.5.3 o

posterior.

MySQL/MariaDB Table llaves extranjeras

Una clave externa es un campo de una tabla relacional que coincide con la columna de clave principal de otra tabla.
La clave externa se puede utilizar para hacer referencias cruzadas de tablas.

En Claves extranjeras Tab, simplemente haga clic en un campo de clave externa para editar. Mediante la barra de
herramientas de la clave externa, puede crear nuevos, editar y eliminar el campo de clave externa seleccionado.

Nota: Soporte de clave externa de MySQL 3.23.44 o posterior.

La edición de la clave externa es compatible con MySQL 4.0.13 o posterior.

Botón Descripción
Agregar extranjero Añada una clave externa a la tabla.
Clave
Nota: Ambos Mesas debe ser InnoDB tipo (o solidDB tipo Si usted han solidDB para
MySQL). En la referencia mesa, hay debe ser un Índice donde la extranjeros clave
columnas son enumerados como la primera columnas en la mismo para. Partir con
MySQL 4.1.2, como un Índice se ser
creado en la tabla de referencia automáticamente si no existe.
Eliminar Foreign Elimine la clave externa seleccionada.
Clave
Nota: Soporte de MySQL 4.0.13 o posterior.

Utilice el Nombre cuadro de edición para introducir un nombre para la nueva clave.

Utilice el Base de datos referenciada y Tabla referenciada listas desplegables para seleccionar una base

57
de datos y una tabla extranjeras respectivamente.

Para incluyen campo (s)/referenced campo (s) Para la clave, sólo simplemente Haga doble clic en la
Campos/Referencia Campos campo o clic para abrir el (los) editor (es) para edición.

58
La Al eliminar y En la actualización lista desplegable defina el tipo de las acciones que se deben tomar.

CASCADE Delete the corresponding foreign key, or update the corresponding foreign key to the new value of the
primary key.
SET NULL Set all the columns of the corresponding foreign key to NULL.
No ACTION Does not change the foreign key.
Restringir Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update would create a foreign key constraint violation.

Related topic:
Foreign Keys Data Selection

MySQL/MariaDB Table Triggers

A trigger is a named database object that is associated with a table and that is activated when a particular event occurs
for the table.

In the Triggers tab, just simply click a trigger field for editing. By using the trigger toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected trigger field.

Note: Trigger is supported from MySQL 5.0.2 or later.

Button Description
Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table.
Delete Trigger Elimine el desencadenador
seleccionado.

Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name.

Use the Fires drop-down list to define the trigger action time. It can be Before or After to indicate that the trigger
activates before or after the statement that activated it.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table. For example, INSERT, LOAD DATA, and
REPLACE statements.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified. For example, UPDATE statement.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table. For example, DELETE and REPLACE statement.
However, DROP TABLE and TRUNCATE statements on the table do not activate the trigger.

The Definition tab defines the statement to execute when the trigger activates. To include your statement, just simply
click to write. If you want to execute multiple statements, use the BEGIN ... END compound statement construct.
Example:

59
BEGIN
set new.capacity = new.capacity + 100;
set new.amount = new.amount + 100;
END

MySQL/MariaDB Table Options

Engine
Define the engine of the table.

Character set
Define the type of the character set for table.

Collation
Choose the collation for the table.

Auto Increment
Set/Reset the Auto Increment value in the edit field. The auto increment value indicates the value for next record.

Checksum/Table Checksum (only for MyISAM and Aria tables)

Check this option if you want MySQL to maintain a live checksum for all rows.

Note: Aria table is supported from MariaDB 5.1 or later.

Page Checksum (only for Aria table)

Check this option if you want index and data use page checksums for extra safety.

Note: Support from MariaDB 5.1 or later.

Transactional (only for Aria table)

Check this option if you want crash-safe.

Note: Support from MariaDB 5.1 or later.

Row Format
Defines how the rows should be stored.

Avg. Row Length

An approximation of the average row length for your table. You need to set this only for large tables with variable-size
rows.

Max Rows
The maximum number of rows you plan to store in the table. This is not a hard limit, but rather a hint to the storage
engine that the table must be able to store at least this many rows.

60
Min Rows
The minimum number of rows you plan to store in the table.

Key Block Size

This option provides a hint to the storage engine about the size in bytes to use for index key blocks. The engine is
allowed to change the value if necessary. A value of 0 indicates that the default value should be used.

Pack Keys (take effect only with MyISAM table)

Set this option to 1 if you want to have smaller indexes. This usually makes updates slower and reads faster. Setting
the option to 0 disables all packing of keys. Setting it to DEFAULT tells the storage engine to pack only long CHAR,
VARCHAR, BINARY, or VARBINARY columns.

Delay Key Write (only for MyISAM table)

Check this option if you want to delay key updates for the table until the table is closed.

Data Directory
To specify where the MyISAM storage engine should put a table's data file.

Index Directory
To specify where the MyISAM storage engine should put a table's index file.

Union (only for MRG_MYISAM table)

UNION is used when you want to access a collection of identical MyISAM tables as one. This works only with MERGE
tables. You must have SELECT, UPDATE, and DELETE privileges for the tables you map to a MERGE table.

Insert Method (only for MRG_MYISAM table)

If you want to insert data into a MERGE table, you must specify with INSERT_METHOD the table into which the row
should be inserted. INSERT_METHOD is an option useful for MERGE tables only. Use a value of FIRST or LAST to
have inserts go to the first or last table, or a value of NO to prevent inserts.

Connection (only for FEDERATED table)

To create the local table that will be federated to the remote table. You can create the local table and specify the
connection string (containing the server name, login, password) to be used to connect to the remote table using the
Connection edit box.

The CONNECTION string contains the information required to connect to the remote server containing the table that
will be used to physically store the data. The connection string specifies the server name, login credentials, port
number and database/table information.

The format the connection string is as follows:

scheme://user_name[:password]@host_name[:port_num]/db_name/tbl_name

Sample of connection strings:

CONNECTION='mysql://username:password@hostname:port/database/tablename'

61
CONNECTION='mysql://username@hostname/database/tablename'
CONNECTION='mysql://username:password@hostname/database/tablename'

Tablespace (only for ndbcluster table)

To specify the tablespace for the storage.

Note: Support from MySQL 5.1.6 or later.

Storage (only for ndbcluster table)

To specify type of storage used (disk or memory), and can be one of DISK, MEMORY, or DEFAULT.

Note: Support from MySQL 5.1.6 or later.

Stats Auto Recalc

Indicate whether to automatically recalculate persistent statistics for an InnoDB table.

Note: Support from MariaDB 10.0 or later.

Stats Persistent
Indicate whether the InnoDB statistics created by ANALYZE TABLE will remain on disk or not.

Note: Support from MariaDB 10.0 or later.

Partition
Set the Partition options.

Note: Support from MySQL 5.1 or later.

Option Description
Partition By Select the function that is used to determine the partition: HASH, KEY, LINEAR HASH, LINEAR
KEY, RANGE and LIST.
Partitions Set the partition number.
Subpartition By Select the function that is used to determine the subpartition: Hash and Key.
Subpartitions Set the subpartition number.
Partition Use or Partition to add or delete the partition. Use or Subpartition to add
Definition or delete the subpartition.
Values For range partitioning, each partition must include a VALUES LESS THAN clause; for list
partitioning, you must specify a VALUES IN clause for each partition. This is used to determine
which rows are to be stored in this partition.
Engine Select the storage engine for both partition and subpartition.
Data Directory The directory where the data for this partition are to be stored.
Index Directory The directory where the indexes for this partition are to be stored.
Max Rows El número máximo de filas que se almacenarán en la partición.
Min Rows The minimum number of rows to be stored in the partition.

62
 Tablespace Designate a tablespace for the partition. Used for Falcon only.
Node Group Set the Node Group.
Comment Enter the comment for the partition.

MySQL/MariaDB Views

Views (including updatable views) are implemented in MySQL Server 5.0 and available in binary releases from 5.0.1
and up. Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of relations (tables) as if it were a single table, and limiting
their access to just that. Views can also be used to restrict access to rows (a subset of a particular table). For access

control to columns, you can also use the sophisticated privilege system in MySQL Server. Click to open an object
list for View.

You can create a view shortcut by right-click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without
activating the main Navicat.

Button Description
Preview Preview the result of the view.
Explain Show the Query Plan of the view.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.

Note: You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View -> Show Result ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

View Builder (Available only in Full Version)

View Builder allows you to build views visually. It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL. See
Query Builder for details.

Definition

You can edit the view definition as SQL statement (SELECT statement it implements).

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Advanced Properties

Algorithm

Undefined MySQL chooses which algorithm to use. It prefers Merge over Temptable if possible, because Merge is
usually more efficient and because a view cannot be updatable if a temporary table is used.
Merge The text of a statement that refers to the view and the view definition are merged such that parts of the
view definition replace corresponding parts of the statement.
Temptable The results from the view are retrieved into a temporary table, which then is used to execute the

63
 statement.

Definer
The default Definer value is the user who executes the CREATE VIEW statement. (This is the same as DEFINER =
CURRENT_USER.) If a user value is given, it should be a MySQL account in 'user_name'@'host_name' format (the
same format used in the GRANT statement). The user_name and host_name values both are required.

Security
The SQL SECURITY characteristic determines which MySQL account to use when checking access privileges for the
view when the view is executed. The legal characteristic values are Definer and Invoker. These indicate that the view
must be executable by the user who defined it or invoked it, respectively. The default Security value is Definer.

Check option

Local Restrict the Check option only to the view being defined.
Cascaded Cause the checks for underlying views to be evaluated as well.

View Viewer

View Viewer displays the view data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View. See
Table Viewer for details.

Note: Transaction is only available for updatable views.

MySQL/MariaDB Functions/Procedures

Stored routines (procedures and functions) are supported in MySQL 5.0. A stored routine is a set of SQL statements
that can be stored in the server. Once this has been done, clients do not need to keep reissuing the individual

statements but can refer to the stored routine instead. Click to open an object list for Function.

Function Wizard

Click the New Function from the object list toolbar. The Function Wizard will pop up and it allows you to create a
procedure/function easily. You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new procedure/function.

1. Select the type of the routine: Procedure or Function.

2. Define the parameter(s). Set the parameter Mode, Name and/or Type under corresponding columns.
3. If you create a function, select the Return Type from the list and enter the corresponding information: Length,
Decimals, Character set and/or Enum.

Hint: Once uncheck the Show wizard next time, you can go to Options to enable it.

Definition

64
Definition consists of a valid SQL procedure statement. This can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT,
or it can be a compound statement written using BEGIN and END. Compound statements can contain declarations,
loops, and other control structure statements.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Parameter
Define function/procedure parameter.

Return Type
This text box will be enabled only for creating a function. It indicates the return type of the function.

Type
Select the stored routines you wish to create from the drop-down list, i.e. PROCEDURE and FUNCTION.

Advanced Properties

Security
Specify whether the routine should be executed using the permissions of the user who creates the routine or the user
who invokes it.

Definer
The default Definer value is the user who executes the CREATE PROCEDURE or CREATE FUNCTION statement.
(This is the same as DEFINER = CURRENT_USER.) If a user value is given, it should be a MySQL account in
'user_name'@'host_name' format (the same format used in the GRANT statement). The user_name and host_name
values both are required.

Acceso a datos
Several characteristics provide information about the nature of data use by the routine.

Contains SQL Indicate that the routine does not contain statements that read or write
data. It is the default if none of these characteristics is given explicitly.
No SQL Indicate that the routine contains no SQL statements.
Reads SQL Data Indicate that the routine contains statements that read data, but not
statements that write data.
Modifies SQL Data Indicate that the routine contains statements that may write data.

Deterministic
A procedure or function is considered deterministic if it always produces the same result for the same input parameters,
and not deterministic otherwise.

Result

To run the procedure/function, click Run on the toolbar. If the SQL statement is correct, the statement will be
executed and, if the statement is supposed to return data, the Result tab opens with the data returned by the

65
procedure/function. If an error occurs while executing the procedure/function, execution stops, the appropriate error
message is displayed. If the function/procedure requires input parameter, the Input Parameters box will pop up. Use ','
to separate the parameters.

Hint: Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets.

MySQL/MariaDB Events

MySQL Event Scheduler was added in MySQL 5.1.6. MySQL Events are tasks that run according to a schedule.
Therefore, we sometimes refer to them as scheduled events. When you create an event, you are creating a named
database object containing one or more SQL statements to be executed at one or more regular intervals, beginning
and ending at a specific date and time. Conceptually, this is similar to the idea of the Windows Task Scheduler. Click

to open an object list for Event.

Definition

Definition consists of a valid SQL statement. This can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT, or it can be
a compound statement written using BEGIN and END. Compound statements can contain declarations, loops, and
other control structure statements.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Definer
Specify the user account to be used when checking access privileges at event execution time. The default DEFINER
value is the user who executes the CREATE EVENT statement. (This is the same as DEFINER = CURRENT_USER.)
If a user value is given, it should be a MySQL account in 'user_name'@'host_name' format (the same format used in
the GRANT statement). The user_name and host_name values both are required.

STATUS
You can create an event but keep it from being active using the DISABLE keyword. Alternatively, you may use
ENABLE to make explicit the default status, which is active.

ON COMPLETION
Normally, once an event has expired, it is immediately dropped. You can override this behavior by specifying ON
COMPLETION PRESERVE. Using ON COMPLETION NOT PRESERVE merely makes the default non-persistent
behavior explicit.

Schedule

AT
AT timestamp is used for a one-time event. It specifies that the event executes one time only at the date and time,
given as the timestamp, which must include both the date and time, or must be an expression that resolves to a
datetime value. Use +INTERVAL to create an event which occurs at some point in the future relative to the current date
and time.

66
EVERY
For actions which are to be repeated at a regular interval, you can use an EVERY clause which followed by an interval.
(+INTERVAL is not used with EVERY.)

STARTS
An EVERY clause may also contain an optional STARTS clause. STARTS is followed by a timestamp value which
indicates when the action should begin repeating, and may also use +INTERVAL interval in order to specify an amount
of time "from now".

For example: EVERY 3 MONTH STARTS CURRENT_TIMESTAMP + 1 WEEK means "every three months, beginning
one week from now".

ENDS
An EVERY clause may also contain an optional ENDS clause. The ENDS keyword is followed by a timestamp value
which tells MySQL when the event should stop repeating. You may also use +INTERVAL interval with ENDS.

For example: EVERY 12 HOUR STARTS CURRENT_TIMESTAMP + INTERVAL 30 MINUTE ENDS

CURRENT_TIMESTAMP + INTERVAL 4 WEEK is equivalent to "every twelve hours, beginning thirty minutes from
now, and ending four weeks from now".

P.S. The timestamp must be in the future - you cannot schedule an event to take place in the past.
The interval portion consists of two parts, a quantity and a *unit of time.
*YEAR | QUARTER | MONTH | DAY | HOUR | MINUTE |
WEEK | SECOND | YEAR_MONTH | DAY_HOUR | DAY_MINUTE |
DAY_SECOND | HOUR_MINUTE | HOUR_SECOND | MINUTE_SECOND

Oracle Objects

To start working with the server objects, you should create and open a connection. When you create a user account,
you are also implicitly creating a schema for that user. A schema is a logical container for the database objects (such
as tables, views, triggers, and so on) that the user creates. The schema name is the same as the user name, and can

be used to unambiguously refer to objects owned by the user. Other user schemas are showed under Schemas.

Hint: Oracle interprets non-quoted object identifiers as uppercase. In Navicat, all objects identifier will be quoted. That
is, Navicat saves exactly what you have inputted.

Oracle Data Pump (Available only in Full Version)

Oracle Data Pump technology enables very high-speed movement of data and metadata from one database to another.
It includes two utilities: Data Pump Export and Data Pump Import.

67
Data Pump Export is a utility for unloading data and metadata into a set of operating system files called a dump file set.
The dump file set can be imported only by the Data Pump Import utility. The dump file set can be imported on the same
system or it can be moved to another system and loaded there.

Data Pump Import is a utility for loading an export dump file set into a target system. The dump file set is made up of
one or more disk files that contain table data, database object metadata, and control information. The files are written in
a proprietary, binary format. During an import operation, the Data Pump Import utility uses these files to locate each
database object in the dump file set.

Click to open an object list for Data Pump.

You can change the Directory of the dump file set by right-click anywhere in the Object List pane and select Change
Directory from the pop-up menu.

Note: Support from Oracle 10g or later.

Data Pump requires SYSDBA Role and the dump file set is stored in the server.

Oracle Data Pump Export

Before execute the Data Pump Export, click Generate SQL button to review the SQL. Then, you can click Execute
button to run it.

You can save the Data Pump Export settings to a profile. Simply click the Save button.

Hint: The profiles(.exp) are saved under the Settings Location.

To show the hidden tabs (advanced options), check the Show Advanced Options box.

General Properties

Job Name
The name of the job.

Mode

FULL In a full database export, the entire database is unloaded. This mode requires that you
have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role.
TABLESPACE In tablespace mode, only the tables contained in a specified set of tablespaces are
unloaded. If a table is unloaded, its dependent objects are also unloaded. Both object
metadata and data are unloaded.
SCHEMAS If you have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role, then you can specify a list of schemas
and optionally include the schema definitions themselves, as well as system privilege
grants to those schemas. If you do not have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role, you can
export only your own schema.

68
 TABLE In table mode, only a specified set of tables, partitions, and their dependent objects are
unloaded. You must have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role to specify tables that are
not in your own schema. All specified tables must reside in a single schema.

Content

ALL Unload both data and metadata.

DATA_ONLY Unload only table row data; no database object definitions are unloaded.
METADATA_ONLY Unload only database object definitions; no table row data is unloaded.

Export Data
Select the objects to export. If you select TABLE mode, choose the schema in the Export Schema(Table Mode)
drop-down list.

Dump Files
Add dump files to the dump file set for the export.

Metadata Filter

Include or Exclude a set of objects from the Export operation. Choose the Object Type and specify the Name
Clause.
Data Filter

Query
Specify a subquery that is added to the end of the SELECT statement for the table.

Sample
Specify a percentage for sampling the data blocks to be moved.

Remap Data

Table schema
The schema containing the column to be remapped.

Table name
The table containing the column to be remapped.

Column Name
The name of the column to be remapped.

Package Schema
The schema of the package.

Package Name
The name of the package.

69
Package Function
A PL/SQL package function which is called to modify the data for the specified column.

Encryption

Encryption Content
Specify what to encrypt in the dump file set.

ALL Enable encryption for all data and metadata in the export operation.
DATA_ONLY Only data is written to the dump file set in encrypted format.
ENCRYPTED_COLUMNS_ONLY Only encrypted columns are written to the dump file set in
encrypted format.
METADATA_ONLY Only metadata is written to the dump file set in encrypted format.
NONE No data is written to the dump file set in encrypted format.

Encryption Algorithm
Identify which cryptographic algorithm should be used to perform encryption.

Encryption Mode

Option Description
Transparent Allow an encrypted dump file set to be created without any intervention from a database
administrator (DBA), provided the required Oracle Encryption Wallet is available.
Encryption Password Provide a password when creating encrypted dump file sets.
Dual Create a dump file set that can later be imported using either the Oracle Encryption Wallet
or the password that was specified with the ENCRYPTION_PASSWORD parameter.

Encryption Password
Specify a key for re-encrypting encrypted table columns, metadata, or table data so that they are not written as clear
text in the dump file set.

Confirm Password
Re-type your password.

Advanced Properties

Thread Number
The maximum number of worker processes that can be used for the job.

Reuse File
A preexisting file will be overwritten.

Enable XMLCLOBS
Check this box to enable data options for XMLCLOBS.

70
Version
The version of database objects to be extracted.

COMPATIBLE The version of the metadata corresponds to the database compatibility level and
the compatibility release level for feature.
LATEST The version of the metadata corresponds to the database version.

Compression Type

ALL Compress both user data and metadata.

DATA_ONLY Compress only user data in the dump file set.
METADATA_ONLY Compress only metadata in the dump file set.
NONE Store the dump file set in an uncompressed format.

Transportable
Operate on metadata for tables (and their dependent objects) within a set of selected tablespaces to perform a
transportable tablespace export.

Database Link
The name of a database link to the remote database that will be the source of data and metadata for the current job.

Estimate
Specify that the estimate method for the size of the tables should be performed before starting the job.

Log File Directory

Choose the log file directory.

Log File Name

Enter the name of the log file.

Flashback SCN
System change number (SCN) to serve as transactionally consistent point for reading user data.

Flashback Time
Either the date and time used to determine a consistent point for reading user data or a string of the form
TO_TIMESTAMP(...).

Oracle Data Pump Import

Before execute the Data Pump Import, click Generate SQL button to review the SQL. Then, you can click Execute
button to run it.

To show the hidden tabs (advanced options), check the Show Advanced Options box.

General Properties

71
Job Name
The name of the job.

Mode

FULL In a full database export, the entire database is unloaded. This mode requires that you have
the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role.
TABLESPACE In tablespace mode, only the tables contained in a specified set of tablespaces are unloaded.
If a table is unloaded, its dependent objects are also unloaded. Both object metadata and
data are unloaded.
SCHEMAS If you have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role, then you can specify a list of schemas and
optionally include the schema definitions themselves, as well as system privilege grants to
those schemas. If you do not have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role, you can export only your
own schema.
TABLE In table mode, only a specified set of tables, partitions, and their dependent objects are
unloaded. You must have the EXP_FULL_DATABASE role to specify tables that are not in
your own schema. All specified tables must reside in a single schema.

Content

ALL Unload both data and metadata.

DATA_ONLY Unload only table row data; no database object definitions are unloaded.
METADATA_ONLY Unload only database object definitions; no table row data is unloaded.

Table Exists Action

Specify the action to be performed when data is loaded into a preexisting table.

SKIP The preexisting table is left unchanged.

APPEND New rows are added to the existing rows in the table.
TRUNCATE Rows are removed from a preexisting table before inserting rows from the Import.
REPLACE Preexisting tables are replaced with new definitions. Before creating the new table, the old table is
dropped.

Import Data
Select the objects to import. If you select TABLE mode, specify the schema in the Schema text box.

Dump Files
Add dump files to the dump file set for the import.

Network

Database Link
The name of a database link to the remote database that will be the source of data and metadata for the current job.

72
Estimate
Specify that the estimate method for the size of the tables should be performed before starting the job.

Flashback SCN
System change number (SCN) to serve as transactionally consistent point for reading user data.

Flashback Time
Either the date and time used to determine a consistent point for reading user data or a string of the form
TO_TIMESTAMP(...).

Transportable
Operate on metadata for tables (and their dependent objects) within a set of selected tablespaces to perform a
transportable tablespace export.

DataFile Path
Specify the full file specification for a datafile in the transportable tablespace set.

Filter

Include/Exclude
Include or Exclude a set of objects from the Import operation. Choose the Object Type and specify the Name Clause.

Query
Specify a subquery that is added to the end of the SELECT statement for the table. If you specify a WHERE clause in
the subquery, you can restrict the rows that are selected.

Remap Data

Remap Data

Fields Description
Table Schema The schema containing the column to be remapped.
Table name The table containing the column to be remapped.
Column Name The name of the column to be remapped.
Package Schema The schema of the package.
Package Name The name of the package.
Package Function A PL/SQL package function which is called to modify the data for the specified column.

Remap DataFiles
Specify a remapping to be applied to objects as they are processed in the specified job. Enter the Source DataFile and
Target DataFile.

Remap Objects

73
Remap Schemas
Specify a remapping to be applied to schemas as they are processed in the specified job. Enter the Source schema
and choose the Target schema.

Remap TableSpaces
Specify a remapping to be applied to tablespaces as they are processed in the specified job. Enter the Source
TableSpace and choose the Target TableSpace.

Remap Tables
Specify a remapping to be applied to tables as they are processed in the specified job. Enter the Source Table and
choose the Target Table.

Advanced Properties

Thread Number
The maximum number of worker processes that can be used for the job.

Reuse DataFiles
Check this box to reuse existing datafiles for tablespace creation.

Skip Unusable Indexes

Check this box to skip loading tables that have indexes that were set to the Index Unusable state (by either the system
or the user).

Streams Configuration
Check this box to import any general Streams metadata that may be present in the export dump file.

Data Options
A bitmask to supply special options for processing the job.

Partition Options
Specify how partitioned tables should be handled during an import operation.

NONE Partitioning is reproduced on the target database as it existed in the source database.
DEPARTITION Each partition or subpartition that contains storage in the job is reproduced as a separate
unpartitioned table.
MERGE Each partitioned table is re-created in the target database as an unpartitioned table.

Version
The version of database objects to be extracted.

COMPATIBLE The version of the metadata corresponds to the database compatibility level and
the compatibility release level for feature.
LATEST The version of the metadata corresponds to the database version.

74
Encryption Password
Specify a key for re-encrypting encrypted table columns, metadata, or table data so that they are not written as clear
text in the dump file set.

Segment Attributes
Designate the segment attribute to which the transform applies.

Storage
Designate the storage to which the transform applies.

OID
Designate the OID to which the transform applies.

PCTSpace
Specify a percentage multiplier used to alter extent allocations and datafile sizes. Used to shrink large tablespaces for
testing purposes.

Log File Directory

Choose the log file directory.

Log File Name

Enter the name of the log file.

Oracle Debugger (Available only in Full Version)

Navicat provides Oracle PL/SQL debugger for debugging Oracle functions, procedures, packages and queries.

To re-arrange the workspace items, click on any pane in the workspace, then hold down your cursor and drag the pane
to the desired area, and release the cursor. The selected pane will appear in its new position.

Hint: As you drag a pane to its new position, a Pane Sticker will appear and a bright blue indicator will mark the
insertion point.

75
You can perform the most commonly used actions for debugging on the toolbar or menu:

Button Description
Run Start running code in debug mode. The debugger executes your code until the end of the code
or the next breakpoint is reached. Keyboard shortcut: F9

Step Over Resume the execution. The current line will be executed. If the line is a procedure or function
call, it will bypass the procedure or function. The counter will then move to the next line of
code. Keyboard shortcut: F8
Step In Resume the execution. The current line will be executed. If the line is a procedure or function
call, the counter goes to the first statement in the procedure or function. Otherwise, the
counter will move to the next line of code. Keyboard shortcut: F7
Step Out Resume the execution. The remaining part of the code within the current procedure or function
will be executed. Keyboard shortcut: SHIFT+F7
Step End Resume the execution. The counter will jump to the last line of the procedure or function.
Stop Stop stepping the code. The execution will stop and cannot resume it.

The Code pane shows the code of the procedure/function. You can add/remove breakpoints for debugging by clicking
in the grey area beside each statement. To add a variable to the watch list, right-click the highlighted code and
choose Add to watch list. To show the debug tips, mouse-over the code.

The Breakpoints pane displays all the breakpoints which allowing you to delete, enable or disable breakpoints. To
enable/disable a breakpoint, check/uncheck the check box. Also, you can delete a breakpoint or all breakpoints,
right-click a breakpoint and choose Remove Breakpoint or Remove All Breakpoints. To jump to the line of a
breakpoint, right-click it and choose Goto Function.

76
The Call Stack pane displays the procedure or function calls of the current line. To jump to a procedure or function,
right-click it and choose Goto Function.

The DBMS Output pane displays the results after the function or procedure has completed the execution.

The Log pane shows the message log when debugging the code.

The Smart Data pane displays information about the variables associated with breakpoints. To add a variable to the
watch list, right-click a variable and choose Add to watch list. You can adjust the value of a watch variable by
right-click the variable and choose Adjust Value.

The Watch List pane displays information about the variables being watched, allowing you to add, delete or edit watch
variables. To add a watch variable, right-click anywhere of Watch List view and choose Add Variable. Then, enter the
Variable Name. Also, you can right-click the highlighted code in the Code Window or the variable in the Smart Data
view and choose Add to watch list. You can adjust the value of a watch variable by right-click the variable and choose
Adjust Value. To delete a watch variable or all watch variables, right-click a variable and choose Remove Variable or
Remove All Variable.

Oracle Physical Attributes/Default Storage Characteristics

% Free
Specify a whole number representing the percentage of space in each data block of the database object reserved for
future updates to rows of the object.

% Used
Specify a whole number representing the minimum percentage of used space that Oracle maintains for each data block
of the database object. A block becomes a candidate for row insertion when its used space falls below this value.

Initial Transactions
Specify the initial number of concurrent transaction entries allocated within each data block allocated to the database
object.

Maximum Transactions
Specify the maximum number of concurrent update transactions allowed for each data block in the segment.

Initial
Specify the size of the first extent of the object. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the size in kilobytes,
megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes.

Next
Specify the size of the next extent to be allocated to the object. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the
size in kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes.

Min Extents
Specify the total number of extents to allocate when the object is created.
77
Max Extents
Specify the total number of extents, including the first, that Oracle can allocate for the object. Check Unlimited if you
want extents to be allocated automatically as needed.

Max Size
Specify the maximum size of the storage element. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the size in
kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes. Check Unlimited if you do not want to limit the disk
space of the storage element.

% Increase
Specify the percent by which the third and subsequent extents grow over the preceding extent.

Freelists
For objects other than tablespaces and rollback segments, specify the number of free lists for each of the free list
groups for the table, partition, cluster, or index.

Freelist Groups
Specify the number of groups of free lists for the database object you are creating.

Optimal
Specify an optimal size for a rollback segment. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the size in kilobytes,
megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes. Check Null for no optimal size for the rollback segment.

Buffer Pool

DEFAULT Choose this to indicate the default buffer pool. This is the default for objects not assigned to KEEP
or RECYCLE.
KEEP Choose this to put blocks from the segment into the KEEP buffer pool. Maintaining an appropriately
sized KEEP buffer pool lets Oracle retain the schema object in memory to avoid I/O operations.
KEEP takes precedence over any NOCACHE clause you specify for a table, cluster, materialized
view, or materialized view log.
RECYCLE Choose this to put blocks from the segment into the RECYCLE pool. An appropriately sized
RECYCLE pool reduces the number of objects whose default pool is the RECYCLE pool from taking
up unnecessary cache space.

Oracle Tables

Relational databases use tables to store data. All operations on data are done on the tables themselves or produce
another table as the result. A table is a set of rows and columns, and their intersections are fields. From a general
perspective, columns within a table describe the name and type of data that will be found by row for that column's fields.
Rows within a table represent records composed of fields that are described from left to right by their corresponding

column's name and type. Each field in a row is implicitly correlated with each other field in that row. Click to open
an object list for Table.

78
To create a new table, click the New Table from the object list toolbar together with the down arrow to choose
the type Normal / External / Index Organized.

When open a table with graphical fields, right-click a table and select Open Table (Quick) from the pop-up menu.
Faster performance for opening the graphical table, as BLOB fields (images) will not be loaded until you click on the cell.
If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table, use Open Table.

You can create a table shortcut by right-click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data
directly without activating the main Navicat.

To empty a table, right-click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop-up menu. This option is only
applied when you wish to clear all the existing records without resetting the auto-increment value. To reset the
auto-increment value while emptying your table, use Truncate Table.

Oracle Normal Tables

Tables are the basic unit of data storage in an Oracle database. Data is stored in rows and columns. You define a table
with a table name and set of columns.

In a normal (heap-organized) table, data is stored as an unordered collection (heap).

Oracle Table Fields

In the Fields tab, just simply click a field for editing. A right-click displays the pop-up menu or by using the field toolbar,
you can create new and drop the selected field. To search a field name, choose Edit -> Find or press CTRL+F.

Button Description
Add Field Add a field to the table.
Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field.
Note: Only available when creating a new table.
Delete Field Delete the selected field.
Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key.
Move Move Down Move the selected field up/down.
Note: Only available when creating a new table.

Use the Name edit box to set the field name. Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names
in the table.

The Type drop-down list defines the type of the field data. See Oracle Built-in Datatypes for details.

Use the Length edit box to define the precision (total number of digits) of the field and use Scale edit box to define the
scale (number of digits to the right of the decimal point) for numeric column.

79
Note: Be careful when shortening the field length as it might result in data loss.

Not null
Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field.

Primary Key
A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record. None of the fields that are part of
the primary key can contain a null value.

Field's Pop-up Options

Duplicate Field Add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields.
Primary Key Name Enter the primary key constraint name.

Field's Properties

Note: The following options depend on the field type you are chosen.

Default
Set the default value for the field.

Comment
Set any optional text describing the current field.

Leading Field Precision

Set the number of digits in the leading field.

Fractional Seconds Precision

Set the number of digits in the fractional part of the SECOND datetime field.

Year Precision
Set the number of digits in the year.

Unit
Set the unit either in BYTE or CHAR.

Object Schema
Set the object schema for the field type.

Object Type
Set the object type for the field.

80
Oracle Table Indexes

Indexes are optional structures associated with tables and clusters. You can create indexes on one or more columns of
a table to speed SQL statement execution on that table. An Oracle Database index provides a faster access path to
table data. Indexes are the primary means of reducing disk I/O when properly used.

You can create many indexes for a table as long as the combination of columns differs for each index. You can create
more than one index using the same columns if you specify distinctly different combinations of the columns.

In the Indexes tab, just simply click an index field for editing. By using the index toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected index field.

Button Description
Add Index Add an index to the table.
Delete Index Delete the selected index.

Use the Name edit box to set the index name.

To include field(s) in the index, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor for editing.

Index Type
Define the type of the table index.

Non-unique Non-unique indexes do not impose the restriction of unique indexes on the column values.
Unique Unique indexes guarantee that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the key column (or
columns).
Bitmap In a bitmap index, a bitmap for each key value is used instead of a list of rowids.

Parallel With Degree

Parallel indexing can improve index performance when you have a large amount of data, and have multiple CPUs.
Enter the degree that determines the number of separate indexing processes.

Tablespace
The tablespace in which to create the index. An index can be created in the same or different tablespace as the table it
indexes.

Schema
The schema in which to create the index.

Note: To create an index in your own schema, at least one of the following conditions must be true:

 The table or cluster to be indexed is in your own schema.

 You have INDEX privilege on the table to be indexed.
 You have CREATE ANY INDEX system privilege.

81
 To create an index in another schema, all of the following conditions must be true:

 You have CREATE ANY INDEX system privilege.

 The owner of the other schema has a quota for the tablespaces to contain the index or index partitions, or
UNLIMITED TABLESPACE system privilege.

Oracle Table Foreign Keys

A foreign key specifies that the values in a column (or a group of columns) must match the values appearing in some
row of another table. We say this maintains the referential integrity between two related tables.

In the Foreign Keys tab, just simply click a foreign key field for editing. By using the foreign key toolbar, you can create
new, edit and delete the selected foreign key field.

Button Description
Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table.
Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key.

Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key.

Use the Referenced Schema, Referenced Table and Referenced Constraint drop-down lists to select a foreign
schema, table and constraint respectively.

To include field(s) to the key, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor(s) for editing.

The On Delete drop-down list defines the type of the actions to be taken.

No Action This is the default action. Referenced key values will not be updated or deleted.
CASCADE Delete any rows referencing the deleted row, or update the value of the referencing
column to the new value of the referenced column, respectively.
SET NULL Set the referencing column(s) to null.

Enable
You can choose whether to enable/disable the foreign key constraint by checking/unchecking the box.

Related topic:
Foreign Keys Data Selection

Oracle Table Uniques

Unique constraints ensure that the data contained in a column or a group of columns is unique with respect to all the
rows in the table.

In the Uniques tab, just simply click an unique field for editing. By using the toolbar below, allowing you to create new,
edit and delete the selected unique field.

82
 Button Description
Add Unique Add an unique to the table.
Delete Unique Delete the selected unique.

Use the Name edit box to set the unique name.

To set field(s) as unique, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor(s) for editing.

Enable
You can choose whether to enable/disable the unique constraint by checking/unchecking the box.

Oracle Table Checks

A check constraint is the most generic constraint type. It allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must
satisfy a Boolean (truth-value) expression.

In the Checks tab, just simply click a check field for editing. By using the check toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected check field.

Button Description
Add Check Add a check to the table.
Delete Check Delete the selected check.

Use the Name edit box to set the check name.

Check
Set the condition for checking, e.g. "field_name1 > 0 AND field_name2 > field_name1" in the Check edit box. A check
constraint specified as a column constraint should reference that column's value only, while an expression appearing in
a table constraint may reference multiple columns.

Definition
Type in the definition for the check constraint.

Enable
You can choose whether to enable/disable the check constraint by checking/unchecking the box.

Oracle Table Triggers

A trigger is a specification that the database should automatically execute a particular function whenever a certain type
of operation is performed. Triggers can be defined to execute either before or after any INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE
operation, either once per modified row, or once per SQL statement.

In the Triggers tab, just simply click a trigger field for editing. By using the trigger toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected trigger field.

83
 Button Description
Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table.
Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger.

Name
Set the trigger name.

Compound
Check to set the trigger as a compound trigger.

Note: Support from Orac1e 11g or later.

Row trigger
Check to set the trigger as a row trigger.

Fires
Specify the trigger timing whether the trigger action is to be run before or after the triggering statement.

Insert
Fire the trigger whenever an INSERT statement adds a row to a table or adds an element to a nested table.

Update
Fire the trigger whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in one of the columns specified in Update Of Fields.
If no Update Of Fields are present, the trigger will be fired whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in any
column of the table or nested table.

Delete
Fire the trigger whenever a DELETE statement removes a row from the table or removes an element from a nested
table.

Update Of Fields
Specify the fields for UPDATE statement trigger upon necessary.

Enable
You can choose whether to enable / disable the trigger constraint by checking / unchecking the box.

Definition
Type in the definition for the trigger. Example:

BEGIN
add_job_history(:old.employee_id, :old.hire_date, sysdate,
:old.job_id, :old.department_id);
END;

84
When Clause
Specify the trigger condition, which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger. This
condition must contain correlation names and cannot contain a query.

Referencing Old
Specify correlation names. The default correlation name is OLD.

Hacer referencia a nuevos

Especifique nombres de correlación. El nombre de correlación predeterminado es nuevo.

Follows
Specify the relative firing order of triggers of the same type.

Note: Support from Orac1e 11g or later.

Schema
Define the trigger on the current schema.

Oracle Table Options

Tablespace
Define a tablespace different from the default tablespace to create a table.

Logging
Specify whether creation of a database object will be logged in the redo log file (LOGGING) or not (NOLOGGING).

Compression
Specify whether to compress data segments to reduce disk use. It is valid only for heap-organized tables.

COMPRESS Enable table compression.

Comprimir para todos Attempt to compress data during all DML operations on the table.
Operaciones
COMPRESS FOR DIRECT_LOAD Attempt to compress data during direct-path INSERT operations
OPERATIONS when it is productive to do so.
NOCOMPRESS Disable table compression.

Cache
Indicate how blocks are stored in the buffer cache.

CACHE Indicate that the blocks retrieved for this table are placed at the most recently used end of
the least recently used (LRU) list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed.
NOCACHE Indicate that the blocks retrieved for this table are placed at the least recently used end of
the LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed.

85
Parallel With Degree
Specify the degree of parallelism, which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation.

Row Movement
With the option on, it allows the database to move a table row. It is possible for a row to move, for example, during table
compression or an update operation on partitioned data.

Physical Attributes
Refer to Physical Attributes/Default Storage Characteristics.

Oracle External Tables

External tables access data in external sources as if it were in a table in the database. While creating external tables,
you are actually creating metadata in the data dictionary that enables you to access external data.

Tenga en cuenta que las tablas externas son de sólo lectura. No es posible realizar operaciones DML y no se puede crear
ningún índice.

Fields for Oracle External Tables

In the Fields tab, just simply click a field for editing. A right-click displays the pop-up menu or by using the field toolbar,
you can create new and drop the selected field. To search a field name, choose Edit -> Find or press CTRL+F.

Button Description
Add Field Add a field to the table.
Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field.
Note: Only available when creating a new table.
Delete Field Elimine el campo seleccionado.
Move Move Move the selected field up/down.
Down Note: Only available when creating a new table.

To add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields, you can right-click and select the Duplicate Field from
the pop-up menu.

Use the Name edit box to set the field name. Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names
in the table.

The Type drop-down list defines the type of the field data. See Oracle Built-in Datatypes for details.

Use the Length edit box to define the precision (total number of digits) of the field and use Scale edit box to define the
scale (number of digits to the right of the decimal point) for numeric column.

Note: Be careful when shortening the field length as it might result in data loss.

Field's Properties

86
Note: The following options depend on the field type you are chosen.

Leading Field Precision

Set the number of digits in the leading field.

Fractional Seconds Precision

Set the number of digits in the fractional part of the SECOND datetime field.

Year Precision
Set the number of digits in the year.

Unit
Set the unit either in BYTE or CHAR.

Object Schema
Set the object schema for the field type.

Object Type
Set the object type for the field.

External Properties for Oracle External Tables

Default Directory
Specify the default directory for the external table.

Directory
Set the external directory.

Location
Set the external source location.

Access Driver
Specify the access driver for the external table. The default type for external tables is ORACLE_LOADER.

Reject Limit
Specify the limit on the number of errors that can occur during a query of the external data.

Parallel With Degree

Check to enable parallel query on the data sources and specify the degree of parallel access.

Access Parameters for Oracle External Tables

Describe the mapping of the external data to the Oracle Database data columns.

87
Using CLOB
Check this option to get a CLOB data value of the returned query.

Oracle Index Organized Tables

An index-organized table has a storage organization that is a variant of a primary B-tree. Data for an index-organized
table is stored in a B-tree index structure in a primary key sorted manner. Each leaf block in the index structure stores
both the key and nonkey columns.

Index-organized tables have full table functionality. They support features such as constraints, triggers etc with
additional features such as key compression.

Note: The Table Designer for Index Organized Tables differs from Normal Tables only on the Options tab. Therefore,
you can refer to the Normal Table on the similar tabs.

Options for Oracle Index Organized Tables

Tablespace
Define a tablespace different from the default tablespace to create a table.

Logging
Specify whether creation of a database object will be logged in the redo log file (LOGGING) or not (NOLOGGING).

Parallel With Degree

Specify the degree of parallelism, which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation.

Row Movement
With the option on, it allows the database to move a table row. It is possible for a row to move, for example, during table
compression or an update operation on partitioned data.

Physical Attributes
Refer to Physical Attributes/Default Storage Characteristics.

Key Compress
Check this option to enable key compression. Upon necessary, you can also specify the prefix length (as the number of
key columns), which identifies how the key columns are broken into a prefix and suffix entry.

Mapping Table
Specify if there is a mapping table for the index-organized table. Note that a mapping table is required for creating
bitmap indexes on an index-organized table.

% Threshold
When an overflow segment is being used, it defines the maximum size of the portion of the row that is stored in the
index block, as a percentage of block size.

88
Overflow Properties
Check to enable an overflow storage area.

Note: After saving the table, this option cannot be unchecked.

Overflow Column
Specify the column to be put in a separate overflow data segment.

Overflow Tablespace
Specify the tablespace in which the overflow segment to be stored.

Overflow Logging
Specify whether creation of a database object will be logged in the redo log file (LOGGING) or not (NOLOGGING).

Overflow Physical Attributes

Refer to Physical Attributes/Default Storage Characteristics.

Oracle Views

Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of relations (tables) as if it were a single table, and limiting their
access to just that. Views can also be used to restrict access to rows (a subset of a particular table). Click to open
an object list for View.

You can create a view shortcut by right-click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without
activating the main Navicat.

Button Description
Preview Preview the result of the view.
Explain Show the Query Plan of the view.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.

Note: You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View -> Show Result ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

View Builder (Available only in Full Version)

View Builder allows you to build views visually. It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL. See
Query Builder for details.

Definition

You can edit the view definition as SQL statement (SELECT statement it implements).

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

89
Advanced Properties

Restrict Query
Specify the name. If you omit this identifier, then Oracle automatically assigns a name of the form SYS_Cn, where n is
an integer that makes the constraint name unique within the database.

Read Only
Indicate that the table or view cannot be updated.

Check option
Indicate that Oracle Database prohibits any changes to the table or view that would produce rows that are not included
in the subquery.

Force On Create
Check this option if you want to create the view regardless of whether the base tables of the view or the referenced
object types exist or the owner of the schema containing the view has privileges on them.

View Viewer

View Viewer displays the view data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View. See
Table Viewer for details.

Oracle Functions/Procedures

A procedure or function is a schema object that consists of a set of SQL statements and other PL/SQL constructs,
grouped together, stored in the database, and run as a unit to solve a specific problem or perform a set of related tasks.
Procedures and functions are identical except that functions always return a single value to the caller, while procedures

do not. Click to open an object list for Function.

Function Wizard

Click the New Function from the object list toolbar. The Function Wizard will pop up and it allows you to create a
procedure/function easily. You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new procedure/function.

1. Specify the Name of the routine and select the type of the routine: Procedure or Function.
2. Define the parameter(s) of the procedure/function. Set the parameter Name, Type, Mode and Default Value
under corresponding columns.
3. If you create a function, select the Return Type from the list.

Hint: Once uncheck the Show wizard next time, you can go to Options to enable it.

Definition

The Code Outline window displays information about the function/procedure including parameter, code body, etc. To
show the Code Outline window, simply choose View -> Code Outline.

90
Note: Available only in Full Version.

Button Description
Refresh the code outline.
Show the detail view of the code outline.
Turn mouse over highlight on or off.
Expand the selected item.
Collapse the selected item.
Toggle sorting by position.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Result

To run the procedure/function, click Run on the toolbar. If the SQL statement is correct, the statement will be
executed and, if the statement is supposed to return data, the DBMS Output tab opens with the data returned by the
procedure/function. If an error occurs while executing the procedure/function, execution stops, the appropriate error
message is displayed. If the function/procedure requires input parameter, the Input Parameters box will pop up.

Hint: Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets.

Debug (Available only in Full Version)

To debug the function/procedure, click Debug on the toolbar to launch the Oracle Debugger. Enter the Input
Parameters if necessary.

You can add/remove breakpoints for debugging by clicking in the grey area beside each statement.

Oracle Database Links

Database link is a named schema object that describes a path from one database to another and are implicitly used
when a reference is made to a global object name in a distributed database. After you have created a database link,

you can use it to refer to tables and views on the other database. Click -> Database Link to open an object list for
Database Link.

General Properties

Service Name
Specify the service name of a remote database.

User Name
The user name used to connect to the remote database using a fixed user database link.

Password
The password for connecting to the remote database.

91
Current user
With this option checked, a current user database link is created. The current user must be a global user with a valid
account on the remote database.

Shared
Fill in Authentication username and Authentication password when Shared option is enabled.

Oracle Indexes

Index provides a faster access path to table data. It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL
statement execution on that table. Click -> Index to open an object list for Index.

You can choose the index Type:

Normal A normal index does not impose restrictions on the column values.
Unique A unique index indicates that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the key columns.
Bitmap A bitmap index created with a bitmap for each distinct key, rather than indexing each row
separately. Bitmap indexes store the rowids associated with a key value as a bitmap. Each bit in
the bitmap corresponds to a possible rowid.
Domain A domain index is an index designed for a specialized domain, such as spatial or image
processing. Users can build a domain index of a given type after the designer creates the
indextype.
Cluster A cluster index is an index designed for a cluster.

General Properties for Normal and Unique Indexes

Table schema
The schema that contains the index.

Table name
The table name.

Columns
Use the Name drop-down list to select the field name and Order drop-down list to define the order of the index (ASC or
DESC).

General Properties for Bitmap Index

Table schema
The schema that contains the index.

Table name
The table name.

92
Bitmap Join Index
In addition to a bitmap index on a single table, you can create a bitmap join index, which is a bitmap index for the join of
two or more tables. A bitmap join index is a space efficient way of reducing the volume of data that must be joined by
performing restrictions in advance.

Columns
Use the Schema, Table and/or Name drop-down lists to select the schema, table and/or field name and Order
drop-down list to define the order of the index (ASC or DESC).

Bitmap Join
Use the InnerSchema, InnerTable, InnerField, OuterSchema, OuterTable and OuterField drop-down lists to select
joined schemas, tables and fields respectively.

General Properties for Domain Index

Table schema
The schema that contains the index.

Table name
The table name.

Column
The column which the index is based.

Schema
The schema of the indextype.

Type
Select the created or built-in indextypes.

Parameters
Information about the path table and about the secondary indexes corresponding to the components of XMLIndex.

General Properties for Cluster Index

Table schema
The schema that contains the index.

Cluster name
The name of the cluster.

Advanced Properties

Unusable
An unusable index must be rebuilt, or dropped and re-created, before it can be used.

93
Tablespace
The name of the tablespace to hold the index.

Compress
To enable key compression, which eliminates repeated occurrence of key column values and may substantially reduce
storage.

Note: No compression for Bitmap Indexes.

Parallel
The creation of the index will be parallelized.

Reverse
To store the bytes of the index block in reverse order, excluding the rowid.

Logging
Choose Logging to log the creation of the index in the redo log file. Or, choose No Logging for no log.

Visibility
Specify the index is Visible or Invisible to the optimizer.

Online
To indicate that DML operations on the table will be allowed during creation of the index.

No Sort
To indicate to the database that the rows are already stored in the database in ascending order, so that Oracle
Database does not have to sort the rows when creating the index.

Physical Attributes
Set the physical attributes of an index.

Oracle Java

Java is an object-oriented programming language efficient for application-level programs. You can write and load
applications within the database. Click -> Java to open an object list for Java.

You can choose the Type: Java Source, Java Class or Java Resource.

General Properties for Java Source

BFile
Seleccione el Directorio y escriba el Nombre del servidor.

Load from file

Browse the File Path of Java source file.

94
Plain source
Type the source code in the Source box.

General Properties for Java Class and Java Resource

BFile
Select the Directory and type the Server Filename.

Load from file

Browse the File Path of Java class or Java resource file.

Propiedades

avanzadas Derechos

de invocador
Select CURRENT_USER to indicate that the methods of the class execute with the privileges of CURRENT_USER or
DEFINER to indicate that the methods of the class execute with the privileges of the owner of the schema in which the
class resides, and that external names resolve in the schema where the class resides.

Resolver
Specify a mapping of the fully qualified Java name to a Java schema object.

Compile or Resolve
Check this to specify that Oracle Database should attempt to resolve the Java schema object that is created if this
statement succeeds.

No Force
Marque esta casilla para hacer retroceder los resultados del comando CREATE de Java si ha habilitado compile o
Resolve y falla la resolución o compilación. Si no especifica esta opción, la base de datos de Oracle no toma ninguna
acción si la resolución o la compilación fallan y el objeto de esquema creado permanece.

Oracle Materialized Views

Materialized view is a schema object that can be used to summarize, compute, replicate, and distribute data. Click
-> Materialized View to open an object list for Materialized View.

You can create a view shortcut by right-click a materialized view in the Object List pane and select Create Open
Materialized View Shortcut from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open
your materialized view directly without activating the main Navicat.

Button Description
Vista previa Preview the result of the materialized view.
Explain Show the Query Plan of the materialized view.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.

95
Note: You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View -> Show Result ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

View Builder (Available only in Full Version)

View Builder allows you to build views visually. It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL. See
Query Builder for details.

Definition

You can edit the view definition as SQL statement (SELECT statement it implements).

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Advanced Properties

When

Demand The materialized view will be refreshed on demand by calling one of the three DBMS_MVIEW refresh
procedures.
Commit A fast refresh is to occur whenever the database commits a transaction that operates on a master
table of the materialized view.
Automatic The database automatically refresh the materialized view with the automatic refresh time.
Never The materialized view will not be refreshed with any Oracle Database refresh mechanism or
packaged procedure.

Method

Fuerza When a refresh occurs, Oracle Database will perform a fast refresh if one is possible or a
complete refresh if fast refresh is not possible.
FAST A incremental refresh method, which performs the refresh according to the changes that have
occurred to the master tables.
COMPLETE A complete refresh method, which is implemented by executing the defining query of the
materialized view.

Start On
A datetime expression for the first automatic refresh time.

Next
A datetime expression for calculating the interval between automatic refreshes.

Note: To edit the datetime, just simply click ... and choose / enter the desired data.

Type
Primary Key A primary key materialized view.

96
 Row ID A rowid materialized view.

Master
The remote rollback segment is used at the remote master site for the individual materialized view.

Local
The remote rollback segment is used for the local refresh group that contains the materialized view.

Constraints

Enforced Oracle Database use enforced constraints during the refresh operation.
Trusted Oracle Database use dimension and constraint information that has been declared
trustworthy by the database administrator but that has not been validated by the database.

No Index
Check this to suppress the creation of the default index.

Build Type

Immediate The materialized view is to be populated immediately.

Deferred The materialized view is to be populated by the next refresh operation.
Prebuilt To register an existing table as a preinitialized materialized view.

Reduced Precision

With To authorize the loss of precision that will result if the precision of the table or
materialized view columns do not exactly match the precision returned by subquery.
Without To require that the precision of the table or materialized view columns match exactly the
precision returned by subquery, or the create operation will fail.

Compress
Data segments are compressed to reduce disk and memory use.

Parallel
Choose NOPARALLEL for serial execution or PARALLEL if you want Oracle to select a degree of parallelism equal to
the number of CPUs available on all participating instances times the value of the PARALLEL_THREADS_PER_CPU
initialization parameter.

With Degree
Set the default degree of parallelism for queries and DML on the materialized view after creation.

Logging
Choose LOGGING for logging the creation of Materialized view in the redo log file. Choose NOLOGGING for no
logging.

97
Tablespace
Choose the tablespace in which the materialized view is to be created.

Physical Attributes
Set the Physical Attributes of the materialized view.

Enable Cache
The blocks retrieved for the table are placed at the most recently used end of the least recently used (LRU) list in the
buffer cache when a full table scan is performed.

For Update
Check this to allow a subquery, primary key, object, or rowid materialized view to be updated. When used in
conjunction with Advanced Replication, these updates will be propagated to the master.

Enable Query Rewrite

The materialized view is used for query rewrite.

Using Index Clause

Option Description
Tablespace Choose the tablespace of the index.
Physical Attributes Set the Physical Attributes for the default index Oracle Database uses to maintain
the materialized view data.

View Viewer

View Viewer displays the view data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View. See
Table Viewer for details.

Oracle Materialized View Logs

Materialized view log is a schema object that records changes to a master table's data so that a Materialized View
defined on the master table can be refreshed incrementally. Click -> Materialized View Log to open an object list
for Materialized View Log.

General Properties

Table
The table of the materialized view log.

Tablespace
The tablespace of the materialized view log.

Logging
To specify either LOGGING or NOLOGGING to establish the logging characteristics for the materialized view log.

98
Cache

CACHE The blocks retrieved for this log are placed at the most recently used end of the least
recently used (LRU) list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed.
NOCACHE The blocks are placed at the least recently used end of the LRU list.

New Values

INCLUDING To save both new and old values in the log.

EXCLUDING To disable the recording of new values in the log.

Parallel With Degree

To determine the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation.

Physical Attributes
Set the Physical Attributes of a materialized view log.

Object ID
The system-generated or user-defined object identifier of every modified row should be recorded in the materialized
view log.

Primary Key
The primary key of all rows changed should be recorded in the materialized view log.

Row ID
The rowid of all rows changed should be recorded in the materialized view log.

Sequence
A sequence value providing additional ordering information should be recorded in the materialized view log.

Fields
Choose the fields whose values you want to be recorded in the materialized view log for all rows that are changed.

Oracle Packages

Packages are encapsulated collections of related procedures, stored functions, and other program objects stored
together in the database. Package bodies, specified subsequently, defines these objects. An package consists of two
parts: a specification and a body. Click -> Package to open an object list for Package.

The Code Outline window displays information about the package/package body including function, procedure,
parameter, code body, etc. To show the Code Outline window, simply choose View -> Code Outline.

Note: Available only in Full Version.

Button Description

99
 Refresh the code outline.
Show the detail view of the code outline.
Turn mouse over highlight on or off.
Expand the selected item.
Collapse the selected item.
Toggle sorting by position.

Package's Definition

Enter the package's definition. After saving the package, you can edit the Package Body. Just click New Package
Body or Design Package Body to open the Package Body Designer.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Package Body's Definition

Enter the package body's definition. To edit the Package Specification, click Design Package Specification to
open the Package Designer.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Result

To run the package click Run on the toolbar. If the SQL statement is correct, the statement will be executed and, if
the statement is supposed to return data, the DBMS Output tab opens with data returned by the package. If an error
occurs while executing the package, execution stops, the appropriate error message is displayed. Select the
function/procedure and enter the parameter(s) if the function/procedure has input parameter(s).

Debug (Available only in Full Version)

To debug the package click Debug on the toolbar to launch the Oracle Debugger. Select the function/procedure
and enter the parameter(s) if the function/procedure has input parameter(s).

You can add/remove breakpoints for debugging by clicking in the grey area beside each statement.

Oracle Sequences

Sequence involves creating and initializing a new special single-row table. It is usually used to generate unique
identifiers for rows of a table. Click -> Sequence to open an object list for Sequence.

General Properties

Increment
To specify which value is added to the current sequence value to create a new value. A positive value will make an
ascending sequence, a negative one a descending sequence. The default value is 1.

100
Start with
To specify the first sequence number to be generated.

Minimum
The minimum value a sequence can generate.

Maximum
The maximum value for the sequence.

Cache
To specify how many values of the sequence the database preallocates and keeps in memory for faster access. The
minimum value for this parameter is 2.

No Cache
This option indicates that values of the sequence are not preallocated.

Cycled
This option allows the sequence continues to generate values after reaching either its maximum or minimum value.
After an ascending sequence reaches its maximum value, it generates its minimum value. After a descending
sequence reaches its minimum, it generates its maximum value.

Order
This option guarantees that sequence numbers are generated in order of request.

Oracle Synonyms

Synonym is an alias for any table, view, materialized view, synonym, procedure, function, package, type, Java class
schema object, user-defined object type, or another synonym. Because a synonym is simply an alias, it requires no
storage other than its definition in the data dictionary. Click -> Synonym to open an object list for Synonym.

General Properties

Object Database Link

A complete or partial database link to create a synonym for a schema object on a remote database where the object is
located.

Object Schema
The schema in which the object resides.

Object Type
The object type.

Object
The object for which the synonym is created.

101
Oracle Triggers

Triggers are similar to procedures. A trigger stored in the database can include SQL and PL/SQL or Java statements to
run as a unit and can invoke procedures. Click -> Trigger to open an object list for Trigger.

See Triggers for details.

You can choose the Trigger Type: TABLE, VIEW, SCHEMA or DATABASE.

General Properties for Table Trigger

Enable
An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction (if any) evaluates
to true.

Table schema
The table schema of the trigger.

Table name
The table you wish to create the trigger.

Compound
A compound trigger is a single trigger on a table that allows you to specify actions for each of four timing points:

Timing Point Section

Before the triggering statement executes BEFORE STATEMENT
After the triggering statement executes AFTER STATEMENT
Before each row that the triggering statement affects BEFORE EACH ROW
After each row that the triggering statement affects AFTER EACH ROW

Note: Support from Oracle 11g or later and you can edit the SQL in Trigger Definition.

Fire
When defining a trigger, you can specify the trigger timing - whether the trigger action is to be run BEFORE or AFTER
the triggering statement.

For Each
Oracle Database fires a ROW trigger once for each row that is affected by the triggering statement and fires a
STATEMENT trigger only once when the triggering statement is issued if the optional trigger constraint is met.

When
Para especificar la condición de desencadenador, que es una condición SQL que debe satisfacerse para que la base de
datos dispare el desencadenador.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever adding a row to a table or adds an element to a nested table.
102
Delete
The trigger is activated whenever removing a row from the table or removes an element from a nested table.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever changing a value in one of the fields selected in Update Of Fields.

General Properties for View Trigger

Enable
An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction (if any) evaluates
to true.

Table schema
The view schema of the trigger.

Table name
The view you wish to create the trigger.

Nested Table Field

To select the nested table field.

Compound
To specify the Instead Of Trigger.

Note: Support from Oracle 11g or later and you can edit the SQL in Trigger Definition.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever adding a row to a table or adds an element to a nested table.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever removing a row from the table or removes an element from a nested table.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever changing a value in a row.

General Properties for Schema Trigger

Enable
An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction (if any) evaluates
to true.

Table schema
The table schema of the trigger.

103
Fire
When defining a trigger, you can specify the trigger timing - whether the trigger action is to be run BEFORE or AFTER
the triggering statement.

When
To specify the trigger condition, which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger.

Events
The kind of statement that activates the trigger.

General Properties for Database Trigger

Enable
An enabled trigger runs its trigger action if a triggering statement is issued and the trigger restriction (if any) evaluates
to true.

Fire
When defining a trigger, you can specify the trigger timing - whether the trigger action is to be run BEFORE or AFTER
the triggering statement.

When
To specify the trigger condition, which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger.

Events
The kind of statement that activates the trigger.

Advanced Properties for Table and View Trigger

Referencing Old
Correlation names of the old nested table.

Referencing New
Correlation names of the new nested table.

Referencing Parent
Correlation names of the parent table.

Follows
To indicate that the trigger should fire after the specified triggers. Use the Schema drop-down list to select the schema
name and Trigger drop-down list to select the trigger.

Note: Support from Oracle 11g or later.

Definition

You can edit valid SQL or procedure statements in the trigger definition inside BEGIN and END.

104
Oracle Types

Type is an user-defined datatype that model the structure and behavior of the data in an application. An object type
consists of two parts: a specification and a body. The type body always depends on its type specification. A collection

type is a named varying array (varray) or a nested table type. Click -> Type to open an object list for Type.

The Code Outline window displays information about the object type/object type body including declaration, etc. To
show the Code Outline window, simply choose View -> Code Outline.

Note: Available only in Full Version.

Button Description
Refresh the code outline.
Show the detail view of the code outline.
Turn mouse over highlight on or off.
Expand the selected item.
Collapse the selected item.
Toggle sorting by position.

Object Type's Definition

Enter the object type's definition. After saving the object type, you can edit the Object Type Body. Just click New
Object Type Body or Design Object Type Body to open the Type Body Designer.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Object Type Body's Definition

Enter the object type body's definition. To edit the Object Type Specification, click Design Object Type
Specification to open the Object Type Designer.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Collection Type

Nested table
Create a nested table type.

VArray
Create a varray type.

Array Size
Determine the array size of the varray type.

105
Data Type
Select the Oracle Database built-in datatype or user-defined type of the attribute.

Data Type Parameter

Determine the corresponding data type parameters.

Oracle XML Schemas

XML Schema is a schema definition language written in XML. It can be used to describe the structure and various other
semantics of conforming instance documents. Click -> XML Schema to open an object list for XML Schema.

Schema Doc

Enter a valid XML schema document under the Schema Doc tab.

Advanced Properties

Local
Check this to register as local schemas.

Force on schema registration

Check this to ignore errors generated during schema evolution.

Object Types
Check this to enable the schema compiler to generate object types.

Java Beans
Check this to enable the schema compiler to generate Java beans.

Default Tables
Check this to enable the schema compiler to generate default tables.

REGISTER_NODOCID
Check this to prevent the creation of this column if the user wishes to optimize on storage.

REGISTER_BINARYXML
Check this to register the schema for Binary XML.

REGISTER_NT_AS_IOT
Check this to store nested tables created during schema registration as index organized tables.

REGISTER_AUTO_OOL
Check this to automatically move large types out of line.

Enable Hierarchy

106
 ENABLE_HIERARCHY_NONE Enable hierarchy will not be called on any tables created while
registering that schema.
ENABLE_HIERARCHY_CONTENTS Enable hierarchy will be called for all tables created during schema
registration with hierarchy_type as
DBMS_XDBZ.ENABLE_CONTENTS.
ENABLE_HIERARCHY_RESMETADATA Enable hierarchy will be called on all tables created during schema
registration with hierarchy_type as
DBMS_XDBZ.ENABLE_RESMETADATA.

Oracle Recycle Bin

Recycle bin is actually a data dictionary table containing information about dropped objects. Dropped tables and any
associated objects such as indexes, constraints, nested tables, and the likes are not removed and still occupy space.
They continue to count against user space quotas, until specifically purged from the recycle bin or the unlikely situation

where they must be purged by the database because of tablespace space constraints. Click -> Recycle Bin to
open an object list for Recycle Bin.

To restore a table

1. Choose a table in recycle bin.

2. Click Flashback Table from the object list toolbar.

To remove an object

1. Select an object for purging in the Object List pane.

2. Click Purge Object from the object list toolbar.
3. Confirm deleting in the dialog window.

To remove all objects

1. Right-click and select the Purge Recycle Bin from the pop-up menu.
2. Confirm deleting in the dialog window.

To remove all objects of any users

1. Log in a user has the SYSDBA privilege.

2. Right-click and select Purge DBA Recycle Bin from the pop-up menu.
3. Confirm deleting in the dialog window.

Oracle Directories

A directory object specifies an alias for a directory on the server file system where external binary file LOBs (BFILEs)
and external table data are located. All directories are created in a single namespace and are not owned by an
individual schema. Click -> Directory to open an object list for Directory.

107
General Properties

Directory Path
Specify the full path name of the operating system directory of the server where the files are located. The path name is
case sensitive.

Oracle Tablespaces

Tablespaces are the allocation of space in the database that can contain schema objects. Click -> Tablespace to
open an object list for Tablespace.

General Properties

Tablespace Type

PERMANENT A permanent tablespace contains persistent schema objects. Objects in permanent

tablespaces are stored in datafiles.
TEMPORARY A temporary tablespace contains schema objects only for the duration of a session. Objects in
temporary tablespaces are stored in tempfiles.
UNDO An undo tablespace is a type of permanent tablespace used by Oracle Database to manage
undo data if you are running your database in automatic undo management mode.

Name
Set the name of the datafile/tempfile.

Size
Set the size of the datafile/tempfile.

Unit
Define the size unit of the datafile/tempfile. Specify the maximum disk space allowed for automatic extension of the
datafile. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the size in kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes,
petabytes, or exabytes.

Reuse
To allow Oracle to reuse an existing file.

Path
Specify the path of the datafile/tempfile.

Auto Extend
To ON (enable) or OFF (disable) the automatic extension of a new or existing datafile or tempfile.

Next Size
Specify the size in bytes of the next increment of disk space to be allocated automatically when more extents are

108
required. The default is the size of one data block. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the size in
kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes.

Unlimited Max
Unlimited disk space that Oracle can allocate to the datafile or tempfile.

Max Size
Specify the maximum disk space allowed for automatic extension of the datafile. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or
E to specify the size in kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes.

Storage

File Type

BIGFILE A bigfile tablespace contains only one datafile or tempfile, which can contain up to
approximately 4 billion (232) blocks. The maximum size of the single datafile or tempfile is 128
terabytes (TB) for a tablespace with 32K blocks and 32TB for a tablespace with 8K blocks.
SMALLFILE A smallfile tablespace is a traditional Oracle tablespace, which can contain 1022 datafiles or
tempfiles, each of which can contain up to approximately 4 million (2 22) blocks.

Min Extent Size

The minimum size of an extent in the tablespace. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the size in
kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes.

Block Size
The block size for the tablespace.

Default Storage Options

Set the default storage characteristics for objects created in the tablespace.

Table Compression
Use the drop-down list to select the type of compressing data segments to reduce disk use.

Manual Segment Management

To manage the free space of segments in the tablespace using free lists.

Extent Management

DICTIONARY Extent management by the data dictionary.

LOCAL Extent management by the bitmaps.

Local Extent

AUTOALLOCATE The tablespace is system managed.

UNIFORM The tablespace is managed with uniform extents of size.

109
Uniform Size
The size of uniform extent. The default size is 1 megabyte. Use the drop-down list K, M, G, T, P or E to specify the size
in kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes.

Advanced Properties

Logging

LOGGING Log all objects within the tablspace in the redo log file.
NOLOGGING No operations are logged.

Force Logging
Oracle Database will log all changes to all objects in the tablespace except changes to temporary segments, overriding
any NOLOGGING setting for individual objects.

Offline
The tablespace is unavailable immediately (offline) after creation.

Retention Guarantee
Oracle Database should preserve unexpired undo data in all undo segments of tablespace even if doing so forces the
failure of ongoing operations that need undo space in those segments.

Tablespace Group
To determine whether tablespace is a member of a tablespace group.

Flashback

ON Oracle Database will save Flashback log data for this tablespace and the tablespace
can participate in a FLASHBACK DATABASE operation.
OFF Oracle Database will not save any Flashback log data for this tablespace.

Use Encryption
Enable the encryption properties of the tablespace.

Algorithm
To select the encryption algorithm.

Oracle Public Database Links

Public database Link is a database link created by a DBA on a local database that is accessible to all users on that
database. Click -> Public Database Link to open an object list for Public Database Link.

See Database Link for details.

110
Oracle Public Synonyms

Public synonym is a synonym owned by the special user group named PUBLIC and every user in a database can
access it. Click -> Public Synonyms to open an object list for Public Synonyms.

See Synonyms for details.

PostgreSQL Objects

To start working with the server objects, you should create and open a connection. If the server is empty, you need to
right-click the connection in the Connection pane and choose New Database to create a new database.

General Properties

To create a database, you must have the Can create database (usecreatedb) right. Refer to Role Designer or User
Designer on how to set user properties.

Database Name
Define the name of the database.

Encoding
Define the encoding for the database. If omitted, the default is the encoding of the template database.

Owner
Define the owner for the database. If omitted, defaults to the user executing the command. Only superusers may create
database owned by users other than themselves.

Template
Create the database from a template database.

Note: It is essential that the source database be idle (no data-altering transactions in progress) for the duration of the
copying operation. CREATE DATABASE will check that no session (other than itself) is connected to the source
database at the start of the operation, but this does not guarantee that changes cannot be made while the copy
proceeds, which would result in an inconsistent copied database. Therefore, it is recommended that databases used as
templates be treated as read-only.

Tablespace
Define the tablespace for the database. If omitted, defaults to pg_default.

PostgreSQL Debugger (Available only in Full Version)

Navicat provides PostgreSQL debugger for debugging PostgreSQL PL/pgSQL functions.

111
You can perform the most commonly used actions for debugging on the toolbar or menu:

Button Description
Run Start running code in debug mode. Enter the Input Parameters if
necessary. The debugger executes your code until the end of the code or
the next breakpoint is reached. Keyboard shortcut: F9
Step Over Resume the execution. The current line will be executed. If the line is a
function call, it will bypass the function. The counter will then move to the
next line of code. Keyboard shortcut: F8
Step In Resume the execution. The current line will be executed. If the line is a
function call, the counter goes to the first statement in the function.
Otherwise, the counter will move to the next line of code. Keyboard
shortcut: F7
Step Out Resume the execution. The remaining part of the code within the current
function will be executed. Keyboard shortcut: SHIFT+F7
Stop Stop stepping the code. The execution will stop and cannot resume it.

The Code pane shows the code of the function. You can add/remove breakpoints for debugging by clicking in the
grey area beside each statement.

The Breakpoints tab displays all the breakpoints. You can delete a breakpoint or all breakpoints, right-click a
breakpoint and choose Remove Breakpoint or Remove All Breakpoints. To jump to the line of a breakpoint,
right-click it and choose Goto Function.

The Call Stack tab displays the function calls of the current line.

The Results tab displays the results after the function has completed the execution.
112
The Log tab shows the message log when debugging the code.

The Local Variables tab displays the varaibles in function.

The Parameters tab displays the inputted parameters.

PostgreSQL Schemas

A schema is essentially a namespace: it contains named objects (tables, data types, functions, and operators) whose
names may duplicate those of other objects existing in other schemas. The schema name must be distinct from any
existing schema name in the current database.

General Properties

Schema Name
The name of a schema to be created. The name cannot begin with pg_, as such names are reserved for system
schemas.

Owner
The name of the user who will own the schema. If omitted, defaults to the user executing the command.

PostgreSQL Tables

Relational databases use tables to store data. All operations on data are done on the tables themselves or produce
another table as the result. A table is a set of rows and columns, and their intersections are fields. From a general
perspective, columns within a table describe the name and type of data that will be found by row for that column's fields.
Rows within a table represent records composed of fields that are described from left to right by their corresponding

column's name and type. Each field in a row is implicitly correlated with each other field in that row. Click to open
an object list for Table.

To create a new table, click the New Table from the object list toolbar together with the down arrow to choose
the type Normal / Foreign.

When open a table with graphical fields, right-click a table and select the Open Table (Quick) from the pop-up
menu. Faster performance for opening the graphical table, as BLOB fields (images) will not be loaded until you click on
the cell. If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table, use Open Table.

You can create a table shortcut by right-click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data
directly without activating the main Navicat.

To empty a table, right-click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop-up menu. This option is only
applied when you wish to clear all the existing records without resetting the auto-increment value. To reset the
auto-increment value while emptying your table, use Truncate Table.

113
PostgreSQL Normal Tables

Tables are the basic unit of data storage in a PostgreSQL database. Data is stored in rows and columns. You define a
table with a table name and set of columns.

PostgreSQL Table Fields

In the Fields tab, just simply click a field for editing. A right-click displays the pop-up menu or using the field toolbar,
you can create new and drop the selected field. To search a field name, choose Edit -> Find or press CTRL+F.

Button Description
Add Field Add a field to the table.

Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field.

Note: Only available when creating a new table.
Delete Field Delete the selected field.
Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key and set the Primary Key
Properties.

Move Move Move the selected field up/down.

Down Note: Only available when creating a new table.

Use the Name edit box to set the field name. Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names
in the table.

The Type drop-down list defines the type of the field data. See PostgreSQL Data Types for details.

Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Decimals edit box to define the number of digits after
the decimal point (the scale) for Floating Point data type.

Note: Be careful when shortening the field length as losing data might be caused.

Not null
Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field.

Primary Key
A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record. None of the fields that are part of
the primary key can contain a null value.

Field's Pop-up Options

Duplicate Field Add a new field with modification as one of the existing
fields.
Primary Key Name
Properties The primary key constraint name.

114
 Tablespace
The tablespace of the primary key constraint's index.

Fill Factor
The fillfactor storage parameter of the primary key
constraint's index.

Deferrable
The primary key constraint can be deferred.
Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.0 or later.

Deferred
The primary key constraint is checked only at the end of
the transaction.
Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.0 or later.

Field's Properties

Note: The following options depend on the field type you are chosen.

Default
Set the default value for the field.

Comment
Set any optional text describing the current field.

Collation
Set the collation of the column (which must be of a collatable data type). If not specified, the column data type's default
collation is used.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Dimensions
Set the dimensions of array specifiers.

Object Schema
Set the object schema for the field.

Object Type
Set the object type for the field.

115
PostgreSQL Table Indexes

Indexes are primarily used to enhance database performance (though inappropriate use can result in slower
performance). An index field can be an expression computed from the values of one or more columns of the table row.
This feature can be used to obtain fast access to data based on some transformation of the basic data.

In the Indexes tab, just simply click an index field for editing. By using the index toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected index field.

Button Description
Add Index Add an index to the table.
Delete Index Delete the selected index.

Use the Name edit box to set the index name. No schema name can be included here; the index is always created in
the same schema as its parent table.

To include field(s) in the index, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor for editing.

Note: Some of field types do not allow indexing by several fields.

The Index method drop-down list defines the type of the table index.

Unique
Makes index unique, causes the system to check for duplicate values in the table when the index is created (if data
already exist) and each time data is added.

Clustered
CLUSTER instructs PostgreSQL to cluster the table specified by tablename based on the index specified by
indexname. The index must already have been defined on tablename.

When a table is clustered, PostgreSQL remembers on which index it was clustered. The form CLUSTER tablename
reclusters the table on the same index that it was clustered before.

Concurrently
When this option is used, PostgreSQL will build the index without taking any locks that prevent concurrent inserts,
updates, or deletes on the table; whereas a standard index build locks out writes (but not reads) on the table until it's
done.

Tablespace
The tablespace in which to create the index.

Fill Factor
The fillfactor for an index.

116
Buffering
Use the buffering build technique to build the index.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.2 or later.

Fast Update
The usage of the fast update technique.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.4 or later.

Constraints
If you wish to create partial index, enter constraint condition in this edit box. A partial index is an index that contains
entries for only a portion of a table, usually a portion that is more useful for indexing than the rest of the table.

Comment
Define the comment for the index.

Fields Editor

Select the field(s) from the Name list. You can also use the arrow buttons to change the index field(s) order.

Collation
Choose the collation for the index.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Sort Order
Specify the sort order: ASC or DESC.

Nulls Order
Specify that nulls sort before(NULLS FIRST)/after(NULLS LAST) non-nulls.

PostgreSQL Table Foreign Keys

A foreign key specifies that the values in a column (or a group of columns) must match the values appearing in some
row of another table. We say this maintains the referential integrity between two related tables.

In the Foreign Keys tab, just simply click a foreign key field for editing. By using the foreign key toolbar, you can create
new, edit and delete the selected foreign key field.

Button Description
Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table.
Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key.

Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key.

117
Use the Referenced Schema and Referenced Table drop-down lists to select a foreign schema and table
respectively.

To include field(s)/referenced field(s) to the key, just simply double-click the Fields/Referenced Fields field or click
to open the editor(s) for editing.

The On Delete and On Update drop-down list define the type of the actions to be taken.

RESTRICT Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update would create a foreign key
constraint violation. This is the same as NO ACTION except that the check is not
deferrable.
NO ACTION Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update would create a foreign key
constraint violation. If the constraint is deferred, this error will be produced at constraint
check time if there still exist any referencing rows. This is the default action.
CASCADE Delete any rows referencing the deleted row, or update the value of the referencing
column to the new value of the referenced column, respectively.
SET NULL Set the referencing column(s) to null.
SET DEFAULT Set the referencing column(s) to their default values.

Match Full
Check this option to not allow one column of a multicolumn foreign key to be null unless all foreign key columns are
null.

Deferrable
The foreign key constraint can be deferred.

Deferred
The foreign key constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction.

Comment
Define the comment for the foreign key.

Related topic:
Foreign Keys Data Selection

PostgreSQL Table Uniques

Unique constraints ensure that the data contained in a column or a group of columns is unique with respect to all the
rows in the table.

In the Uniques tab, just simply click an unique field for editing. By using the unique toolbar, you can create new, edit
and delete the selected unique field.

Button Description

118
 Add Unique Add an unique to the table.
Delete Unique Delete the selected unique.

Use the Name edit box to set the unique name.

To set field(s) as unique, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor(s) for editing.

Tablespace
The tablespace of the unique constraint's index.

Fill Factor
The fillfactor storage parameter of the unique constraint's index.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

Deferrable
The unique constraint can be deferred.

Deferred
The unique constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction.

Comment
Define the comment for the unique.

PostgreSQL Table Checks

A check constraint is the most generic constraint type. It allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must
satisfy a Boolean (truth-value) expression.

In the Checks tab, just simply click a check field for editing. By using the check toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected check field.

Button Description
Add Check Add a check to the table.
Delete Check Delete the selected check.

Use the Name edit box to set the check name.

Check
Set the condition for checking, e.g. "field_name1 > 0 AND field_name2 > field_name1" in the Check edit box. A check
constraint specified as a column constraint should reference that column's value only, while an expression appearing in
a table constraint may reference multiple columns.

Definition
Enter the definition for the check.

119
No Inherit
The check constraint will not propagate to child tables.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.2 or later.

Comment
Enter the comment for the check.

PostgreSQL Table Excludes

A exclude constraint guarantees that if any two rows are compared on the specified column(s) or expression(s) using
the specified operator(s), not all of these comparisons will return TRUE.

In the Excludes tab, just simply click an exclude field for editing. By using the exclude toolbar, you can create new, edit
and delete the selected exclude field.

Note: Exclude is supported from PostgreSQL 9.0 or later.

Button Description
Add Exclude Add an exclude to the table.
Delete Exclude Delete the selected exclude.

Use the Name edit box to set the exclude name.

Index method
The name of the index access method to be used.

Element
Choose the element(s) to be excluded and specify the operator(s).

Tablespace
The tablespace of the exclude constraint's index.

Fill Factor
The fillfactor storage parameter of the exclude constraint's index.

Buffering
Use the buffering build technique to build the exclude constraint's index.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.2 or later.

Predicate
Specify an exclusion constraint on a subset of the table.

120
Deferrable
The exclude constraint can be deferred.

Deferred
The exclude constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction.

Comment
Define the comment for the exclude.

PostgreSQL Table Rules

The PostgreSQL rule system allows one to define an alternate action to be performed on insertions, updates, or
deletions in database tables. Roughly speaking, a rule causes additional commands to be executed when a given
command on a given table is executed.

Note: You must be the owner of a table to create or change rules for it.

In the Rules tab, just simply click a rule field for editing. By using the rule toolbar, you can create new, edit and delete
the selected rule field.

Button Description
Add Rule Add a rule to the table.
Delete Rule Delete the selected rule.

Use the Name edit box to set the rule name. This must be distinct from the name of any other rule for the same table.
Multiple rules on the same table and same event type are applied in alphabetical name order.

Event
The event is one of SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE.

Do instead
This indicates that the commands should be executed instead of the original command. Otherwise, the commands
should be executed in addition to the original command.

Condition
Any SQL conditional expression (returning boolean). The condition expression may not refer to any tables except NEW
and OLD, and may not contain aggregate functions.

Definition
The command or commands that make up the rule action. Valid commands are SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE,
or NOTIFY.

Within condition and command, the special table names NEW and OLD may be used to refer to values in the
referenced table. NEW is valid in ON INSERT and ON UPDATE rules to refer to the new row being inserted or updated.
OLD is valid in ON UPDATE and ON DELETE rules to refer to the existing row being updated or deleted.

121
Comment
Define the comment for the rule.

PostgreSQL Table Triggers

A trigger is a specification that the database should automatically execute a particular function whenever a certain type
of operation is performed. Triggers can be defined to execute either before or after any INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE
operation, either once per modified row, or once per SQL statement.

In the Triggers tab, just simply click a trigger field for editing. By using the trigger toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected trigger field.

Note: To create a trigger on a table, the user must have the TRIGGER privilege on the table.

Button Description
Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table.
Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger.

Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name. This must be distinct from the name of any other trigger for the same
table.

Row trigger
This specifies whether the trigger procedure should be fired once for every row affected by the trigger event, or just
once per SQL statement. If unchecks, FOR EACH STATEMENT is the default.

Fires
Define the trigger action time. It can be Before or After to indicate that the trigger activates before or after the
statement that activated it.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table.

Update Of Fields
Specify a list of columns. The trigger will only fire if at least one of the listed columns is mentioned as a target of the
UPDATE command.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

122
When Clause
Specify a Boolean WHEN condition, which will be tested to see whether the trigger should be fired.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.0 or later.

Trigger Function Schema and Trigger Function

A user-supplied function that is declared as taking no arguments and returning type trigger, which is executed when the
trigger fires.

Arguments
An optional comma-separated list of arguments to be provided to the function when the trigger is executed. The
arguments are literal string constants. Simple names and numeric constants may be written here, too, but they will all
be converted to strings. Please check the description of the implementation language of the trigger function about how
the trigger arguments are accessible within the function; it may be different from normal function arguments.

Comment
Define the comment for the trigger.

Constraint
Create a constraint trigger.

Deferrable
The trigger constraint can be deferred.

Deferred
The trigger constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction.

Referenced Table Schema and Referenced Table Name

The schema and the name of another table referenced by the constraint.

PostgreSQL Table Options

Unlogged
The table is created as an unlogged table. Data written to unlogged tables is not written to the write-ahead log, which
makes them considerably faster than ordinary tables.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Owner
Define the user to own this table.

Tablespace
Define a tablespace different from the default tablespace to create a table.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

123
Inherits from
This option specifies a list of tables from which the new table automatically inherits all columns. Use of inheritance
creates a persistent relationship between the new child table and its parent table(s). Schema modifications to the
parent(s) normally propagate to children as well, and by default the data of the child table is included in scans of the
parent(s).

To set the new table to be inherited from one or several existing tables, just simply click to open the editor(s) for
editing.

Has Oids
Check this option if you want to specify whether rows of the new table should have OIDs (object identifiers) assigned to
them.

Fill Factor
The fillfactor for a table is a percentage between 10 and 100. 100 (complete packing) is the default. When a smaller
fillfactor is specified, INSERT operations pack table pages only to the indicated percentage; the remaining space on
each page is reserved for updating rows on that page. This gives UPDATE a chance to place the updated copy of a row
on the same page as the original, which is more efficient than placing it on a different page. For a table whose entries
are never updated, complete packing is the best choice, but in heavily updated tables smaller fillfactors are appropriate.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

PostgreSQL Foreign Tables

Foreign tables define the structure of the remote data. A foreign table can be used in queries just like a normal table,
but a foreign table has no storage in the PostgreSQL server. Whenever it is used, PostgreSQL asks the foreign data
wrapper to fetch data from the external source, or transmit data to the external source in the case of update commands.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Fields for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables

In the Fields tab, just simply click a field for editing. A right-click displays the pop-up menu or using the field toolbar,
you can create new and drop the selected field. To search a field name, choose Edit -> Find or press CTRL+F.

Button Description
Add Field Add a field to the table.
Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field.
Note: Only available when creating new table.
Delete Field Delete the selected field.

Move Move Move the selected field up/down.

Down Note: Only available when creating new table.

124
To add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields, you can right-click and select the Duplicate Field from
the pop-up menu.

Use the Name edit box to set the field name. Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names
in the table.

The Type drop-down list defines the type of the field data. See PostgreSQL Data Types for details.

Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Decimals edit box to define the number of digits after
the decimal point (the scale) for Floating Point data type.

Note: Be careful when shortening the field length as losing data might be caused.

Not null
Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field.

Field's Properties

Note: The following options depend on the field type you are chosen.

Options
Options to be associated with the foreign table column. The allowed option Name and Value are specific to each
foreign data wrapper and are validated using the foreign-data wrapper's validator function.

Default
Set the default value for the field.

Comment
Set any optional text describing the current field.

Collation
Set the collation of the column (which must be of a collatable data type). If not specified, the column data type's default
collation is used.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Dimensions
Set the dimensions of array specifiers.

Object Schema
Set the object schema for the field.

Object Type
Set the object type for the field.

125
Checks for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables

A check constraint is the most generic constraint type. It allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must
satisfy a Boolean (truth-value) expression.

In the Checks tab, just simply click a check field for editing. By using the check toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected check field.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.5 or later.

Button Description
Add Check Add a check to the table.
Delete Check Delete the selected check.

Use the Name edit box to set the check name.

Check
Set the condition for checking, e.g. "field_name1 > 0 AND field_name2 > field_name1" in the Check edit box. A check
constraint specified as a column constraint should reference that column's value only, while an expression appearing in
a table constraint may reference multiple columns.

Definition
Enter the definition for the check.

No Inherit
The check constraint will not propagate to child tables.

Comment
Enter the comment for the check.

Triggers for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables

A trigger is a specification that the database should automatically execute a particular function whenever a certain type
of operation is performed. Triggers can be defined to execute either before or after any INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE
operation, either once per modified row, or once per SQL statement.

In the Triggers tab, just simply click a trigger field for editing. By using the trigger toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected trigger field.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.4 or later.

Note: To create a trigger on a table, the user must have the TRIGGER privilege on the table.

Button Description

126
 Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table.
Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger.

Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name. This must be distinct from the name of any other trigger for the same
table.

Row trigger
This specifies whether the trigger procedure should be fired once for every row affected by the trigger event, or just
once per SQL statement. If unchecks, FOR EACH STATEMENT is the default.

Fires
Define the trigger action time. It can be Before or After to indicate that the trigger activates before or after the
statement that activated it.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table.

Update Of Fields
Specify a list of columns. The trigger will only fire if at least one of the listed columns is mentioned as a target of the
UPDATE command.

When Clause
Specify a Boolean WHEN condition, which will be tested to see whether the trigger should be fired.

Trigger Function Schema and Trigger Function

A user-supplied function that is declared as taking no arguments and returning type trigger, which is executed when the
trigger fires.

Arguments
An optional comma-separated list of arguments to be provided to the function when the trigger is executed. The
arguments are literal string constants. Simple names and numeric constants may be written here, too, but they will all
be converted to strings. Please check the description of the implementation language of the trigger function about how
the trigger arguments are accessible within the function; it may be different from normal function arguments.

Comment
Define the comment for the trigger.

127
Table Options for PostgreSQL Foreign Tables

Foreign Server
The name of an existing server for the foreign table.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Options
Options to be associated with the foreign table. The allowed option Name and Value are specific to each foreign data
wrapper and are validated using the foreign-data wrapper's validator function.

Owner
Define the user to own this table.

Inherits from
This option specifies a list of tables from which the new table automatically inherits all columns. To set the new table to
be inherited from one or several existing tables, just simply click to open the editor for editing.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.5 or later.

Has Oids
Check this option if you want to specify whether rows of the new table should have OIDs (object identifiers) assigned to
them.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.5 or later.

PostgreSQL Views

Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of relations (tables) as if it were a single table, and limiting their
access to just that. Views can also be used to restrict access to rows (a subset of a particular table). Click to open
an object list for View.

You can create a view shortcut by right-click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without
activating the main Navicat.

Button Description
Preview Preview the result of the view.
Explain Show the Query Plan of the view.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.

Note: You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View -> Show Result ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

128
View Builder (Available only in Full Version)

View Builder allows you to build views visually. It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL. See
Query Builder for details.

Definition

You can edit the view definition as SQL statement (SELECT statement it implements).

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Rules

Use the Name edit box to set the rule name.

Event
The event is one of SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE.

Do instead
This indicates that the commands should be executed instead of the original command. Otherwise, the commands
should be executed in addition to the original command.

Condition
Any SQL conditional expression (returning boolean). The condition expression may not refer to any tables except NEW
and OLD, and may not contain aggregate functions.

Definition
The command or commands that make up the rule action. Valid commands are SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE,
or NOTIFY.

Within condition and command, the special table names NEW and OLD may be used to refer to values in the
referenced table. NEW is valid in ON INSERT and ON UPDATE rules to refer to the new row being inserted or updated.
OLD is valid in ON UPDATE and ON DELETE rules to refer to the existing row being updated or deleted

Comment
Define the comment for the rule.

Advanced Properties

Owner
The owner of the view.

View Viewer

View Viewer displays the view data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View. See
Table Viewer for details.

129
PostgreSQL Functions

PostgreSQL provides four kinds of functions:

 query language functions (functions written in SQL)

 procedural language functions (functions written in, for example, PL/Tcl or PL/pgSQL)
 internal functions
 C-language functions

Every kind of function can take base types, composite types, or combinations of these as arguments (parameters). In
addition, every kind of function can return a base type or a composite type. Many kinds of functions can take or return

certain pseudo-types (such as polymorphic types), but the available facilities vary. Click to open an object list for
Function.

To install the pldbgapi extension for debugging PL/pgSQL functions, you can right-click anywhere in the Object List
pane and choose Install pldbgapi Extension.

Function Wizard

Click the New Function from the object list toolbar. The Function Wizard will pop up and it allows you to create a
function easily. You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new function.

1. Define the parameter(s) of the function. Set the parameter Mode, Type Schema, Type, Name and Default
Value under corresponding columns.
2. Select the Schema and Return Type from the list.

Hint: Once uncheck the Show wizard next time, you can go to Options to enable it.

Definition

Definition consists of a valid SQL procedure statement. This can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT,
or it can be a compound statement written using BEGIN and END. Compound statements can contain declarations,
loops, and other control structure statements.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Parameter
Define function parameter.

Return type schema and Return Type

The return type of the function.

Table Columns
Enter the table columns if the return type is set to TABLE.

110
Advanced Properties

Owner
The owner of the function.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

Language
The name of the language that the function is implemented in. May be SQL, C, internal, or the name of a user-defined
procedural language. For backward compatibility, the name may be enclosed by single quotes.

Volatility
These attributes inform the query optimizer about the behavior of the function. At most one choice may be specified. If
none of these appear, VOLATILE is the default assumption.

IMMUTABLE The function cannot modify the database and always returns the same result when given the same
argument values; that is, it does not do database lookups or otherwise use information not directly
present in its argument list. If this option is given, any call of the function with all-constant arguments
can be immediately replaced with the function value.
STABLE The function cannot modify the database, and that within a single table scan it will consistently return
the same result for the same argument values, but that its result could change across SQL
statements. This is the appropriate selection for functions whose results depend on database
lookups, parameter variables (such as the current time zone), etc. Also note that the
current_timestamp family of functions qualify as stable, since their values do not change within a
transaction.
VOLATILE The function value can change even within a single table scan, so no optimizations can be made.
Relatively few database functions are volatile in this sense; some examples are random(), currval(),
timeofday(). But note that any function that has side-effects must be classified volatile, even if its
result is quite predictable, to prevent calls from being optimized away; an example is setval().

Security of definer
Specify that the function is to be executed with the privileges of the user that created it.

Returns Set
Indicate that the function will return a set of items, rather than a single item.

Strict
Indicate that the function always returns null whenever any of its arguments are null. If this parameter is specified, the
function is not executed when there are null arguments; instead a null result is assumed automatically.

Estimated cost
A positive number giving the estimated execution cost for the function, in units of cpu_operator_cost. If the function
returns a set, this is the cost per returned row. If the cost is not specified, 1 unit is assumed for C-language and internal

111
functions, and 100 units for functions in all other languages. Larger values cause the planner to try to avoid evaluating
the function more often than necessary.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.3 or later.

Estimated rows
A positive number giving the estimated number of rows that the planner should expect the function to return. This is
only allowed when the function is declared to return a set.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.3 or later.

Configuration parameter
The specified configuration parameter to be set to the specified value when the function is entered, and then restored
to its prior value when the function exits.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.3 or later.

Result

To run the function, click Run on the toolbar. If the SQL statement is correct, the statement will be executed and, if
the statement is supposed to return data, the Result tab opens with the data returned by the function. If an error occurs
while executing the function, execution stops, the appropriate error message is displayed. If the function requires input
parameter, the Input Parameters box will pop up. Use ',' to separate the parameters.

Hint: Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets.

Debug (Available only in Full Version)

To debug the PL/pgSQL function, click Debug Function on the toolbar to launch the PostgreSQL Debugger.

PostgreSQL Aggregates

Aggregate functions in PostgreSQL are expressed as state values and state transition functions. That is, an aggregate
can be defined in terms of state that is modified whenever an input item is processed. To define a new aggregate
function, one selects a data type for the state value, an initial value for the state, and a state transition function. The
state transition function is just an ordinary function that could also be used outside the context of the aggregate. A final
function can also be specified, in case the desired result of the aggregate is different from the data that needs to be
kept in the running state value. Click -> Aggregate to open an object list for Aggregate.

Properties

Owner
The owner of the aggregate function.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

112
Input type
An input data type on which this aggregate function operates.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later. For versions below 8.2, just select the Input type schema and Input type
from the drop-down lists.

State Type Schema and State type

The data type for the aggregate's state value.

State Function Schema and State function

The state transition function to be called for each input row. For an N-argument aggregate function, the state function
must take N+1 arguments, the first being of type state_data_type and the rest matching the declared input data type(s)
of the aggregate. The function must return a value of type state_data_type. This function takes the current state value
and the current input data value(s), and returns the next state value.

Final Function Schema and Final function

The final function called to compute the aggregate's result after all input rows have been traversed. The function must
take a single argument of type state_data_type. The return data type of the aggregate is defined as the return type of
this function. If final function is not specified, then the ending state value is used as the aggregate's result, and the
return type is state_data_type.

Initial condition
The initial setting for the state value. This must be a string constant in the form accepted for the data type
state_data_type. If not specified, the state value starts out null.

Sort operator schema and Sort operator

The associated sort operator for a MIN- or MAX-like aggregate. The operator is assumed to have the same input data
types as the aggregate (which must be a single-argument aggregate).

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.1 or later.

PostgreSQL Conversions

Conversion defines a new conversion between character set encodings. Conversion names may be used in the convert
function to specify a particular encoding conversion. Also, conversions that are marked DEFAULT can be used for
automatic encoding conversion between client and server. For this purpose, two conversions, from encoding A to B

and from encoding B to A, must be defined. Click -> Conversion to open an object list for Conversion.

Properties

Owner
The owner of the conversion function.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

113
Source encoding
The source encoding name.

Target encoding
The destination encoding name.

Schema of function and Function

The function used to perform the conversion. The function name may be schema-qualified. If it is not, the function will
be looked up in the path.

The function must have the following signature:

conv_proc(
integer, -- source encoding ID
integer, -- destination encoding ID
cstring, -- source string (null terminated C string)
internal, -- destination (fill with a null terminated C string)
integer -- source string length
) RETURNS void;

Default
Check this box to indicate that this conversion is the default for this particular source to destination encoding. There
should be only one default encoding in a schema for the encoding pair.

PostgreSQL Domains

A domain is essentially a data type with optional constraints (restrictions on the allowed set of values). The user who
defines a domain becomes its owner. Domains are useful for abstracting common constraints on fields into a single
location for maintenance. For example, several tables might contain email address columns, all requiring the same
CHECK constraint to verify the address syntax. Define a domain rather than setting up each table's constraint

individually. Click -> Domain to open an object list for Domain.

General Properties

Underlying Type Category

Choose the underlying data type category: Base Type, Composite Type, Enum Type and Domain.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

Underlying Type Schema

Select schema of the underlying data type.

Underlying Type
Select the underlying data type of the domain from the drop-down list.

114
Dimensions
The dimensions of array specifiers.

Length and Scale

Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Scale edit box to define the number of digits after the
decimal point. (if required for the selected data type)

Collate
The collation of the domain.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Default
The DEFAULT clause specifies a default value for columns of the domain data type. The value is any variable-free
expression (but subqueries are not allowed). The data type of the default expression must match the data type of the
domain. If no default value is specified, then the default value is the null value.

The default expression will be used in any insert operation that does not specify a value for the column. If a default
value is defined for a particular column, it overrides any default associated with the domain. In turn, the domain default
overrides any default value associated with the underlying data type.

Not null
Values of this domain are not allowed to be null.

Owner
The owner of the domain function. The user who defines a domain becomes its owner.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 7.4 or later.

Checks

The Checks tab is provided for managing domain checks. It allows you to create new, edit, or delete the selected
check.

CHECK clauses specify integrity constraints or tests which values of the domain must satisfy. Each constraint must be
an expression producing a Boolean result. It should use the key word VALUE to refer to the value being tested.

PostgreSQL Indexes

Index provides a faster access path to table data. It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL
statement execution on that table. Click -> Index to open an object list for Index.

General Properties

115
Unique
Makes index unique, causes the system to check for duplicate values in the table when the index is created (if data
already exist) and each time data is added.

Table name
The name (possibly schema-qualified) of the table to be indexed.

Method
Define the type of the index.

Name/Expression
The name of a column of the table. Or, an expression based on one or more columns of the table.

Collate
Choose the collation for the index.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.1 or later.

Operator Class Schema and Operator Class

The schema and name of an operator class.

Sort Order (only for B-Tree index)

Specify the sort order: ASC or DESC.

Nulls Order (only for B-Tree index)

Specify that nulls sort before(NULLS FIRST)/after(NULLS LAST) non-nulls.

Advanced Properties

Clustered
CLUSTER instructs PostgreSQL to cluster the table specified by tablename based on the index specified by
indexname. The index must already have been defined on tablename.

When a table is clustered, PostgreSQL remembers on which index it was clustered. The form CLUSTER tablename
reclusters the table on the same index that it was clustered before.

Concurrently
When this option is used, PostgreSQL will build the index without taking any locks that prevent concurrent inserts,
updates, or deletes on the table; whereas a standard index build locks out writes (but not reads) on the table until it's
done.

Tablespace
The tablespace in which to create the index.

Fill Factor (%)

The fillfactor for an index is a percentage that determines how full the index method will try to pack index pages.
116
Buffering
Use the buffering build technique to build the index.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.2 or later.

Fast Update
This setting controls usage of the fast update technique.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.4 or later.

Constraint
If you wish to create partial index, enter constraint condition in this edit box. A partial index is an index that contains
entries for only a portion of a table, usually a portion that is more useful for indexing than the rest of the table.

PostgreSQL Materialized Views

Materialized view is a view of a query that is physically materialized. The query is executed and used to populate the
view at the time the command is issued and may be refreshed later. Click -> Materialized View to open an object
list for Materialized View.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.3 or later.

You can create a view shortcut by right-click a materialized view in the Object List pane and select Create Open
Materialized View Shortcut from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open
your materialized view directly without activating the main Navicat.

To refresh and completely replace the contents of a materialized view, right-click it in the Object List pane and select
Refresh Materialized View With -> Data or No Data from the pop-up menu.

Button Description
Preview Preview the result of the materialized view.
Explain Show the Query Plan of the materialized view.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.

Note: You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View -> Show Result ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

View Builder (Available only in Full Version)

View Builder allows you to build views visually. It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL. See
Query Builder for details.

Definition

You can edit the view definition as SQL statement (SELECT statement it implements).

117
Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Advanced Properties

Owner
The owner of the materialized view.

Tablespace
The name of the tablespace in which the new materialized view is to be created.

Fill Factor
The fillfactor for a view is a percentage between 10 and 100. 100 (complete packing) is the default.

With Data
The materialized view should be populated at creation time.

View Viewer

View Viewer displays the view data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View. See
Table Viewer for details.

PostgreSQL Operators

PostgreSQL supports left unary, right unary, and binary operators. Operators can be overloaded. At least one of
LEFTARG and RIGHTARG must be defined. For binary operators, both must be defined. For right unary operators,

only LEFTARG should be defined, while for left unary operators only RIGHTARG should be defined. Click ->
Operator to open an object list for Operator.

Note: LEFTARG = Left type; RIGHTARG = Right type.

General Properties

Owner
The owner of the operator function.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

Schema of left type and Left type

The data type of the operator's left operand, if any. This option would be omitted for a left-unary operator.

Schema of right type and Right type

The data type of the operator's right operand, if any. This option would be omitted for a right-unary operator.

Schema of operator function and Operator function

The function used to implement this operator.

118
Advanced Properties

Schema of restrict function and Restrict function

The restriction selectivity estimator function for this operator.

Schema of join function and Join function

The join selectivity estimator function for this operator.

Schema of commutator and Commutator

The commutator of this operator.

Schema of negator and Negator

The negator of this operator.

Hash
The operator can support a hash join if this option on.

Merge
The operator can support a merge join if this option on.

Additional Advanced Properties for PostgreSQL Version below 8.3

Schema of left sort operator and Left sort operator

If this operator can support a merge join, the left sort operator that sorts the left-hand data type of this operator.

Schema of right sort operator and Right sort operator

If this operator can support a merge join, the right sort operator that sorts the right-hand data type of this operator.

Schema of less than operator and Less than operator

If this operator can support a merge join, the less-than operator that compares the input data types of this operator.

Schema of greater than operator and Greater than operator

If this operator can support a merge join, the greater-than operator that compares the input data types of this operator.

PostgreSQL Operator Classes

An operator class defines how a particular data type can be used with an index. The operator class specifies that
certain operators will fill particular roles or "strategies" for this data type and this index method. The operator class also
specifies the support procedures to be used by the index method when the operator class is selected for an index
column. All the operators and functions used by an operator class must be defined before the operator class is created.

Click -> Operator Class to open an object list for Operator Class.

Note: Two operator classes in the same schema can have the same name only if they are for different index methods.
The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

119
General Properties

Owner
The owner of the operator class function.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

Schema of Data Type and Data Type

The column data type that this operator class is for.

Index method
The name of the index method this operator class is for.

Schema of Storage Type and Storage type

The data type actually stored in the index. Normally this is the same as the column data type, but some index methods
(GIN and GiST for now) allow it to be different. The STORAGE clause must be omitted unless the index method allows
a different type to be used.

Operator family
The name of the existing operator family to add this operator class to. If not specified, a family named the same as the
operator class is used (creating it, if it doesn't already exist).

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.3 or later.

Default operator class

With this option selected, the operator class will become the default operator class for its data type. At most one
operator class can be the default for a specific data type and index method.

Operators

Strategy number
The index method's strategy number for an operator associated with the operator class.

Schema of operator and Operator name

The operator associated with the operator class.

Recheck
With this option selected, the index is "lossy" for this operator, and so the rows retrieved using the index must be
rechecked to verify that they actually satisfy the qualification clause involving this operator.

Note: Before PostgreSQL 8.4, the OPERATOR clause could include a RECHECK option. This is no longer supported
because whether an index operator is "lossy" is now determined on-the-fly at runtime. This allows efficient handling of
cases where an operator might or might not be lossy.

Functions

120
Support number
The index method's support procedure number for a function associated with the operator class.

Schema of function and Function name

The function that is an index method support procedure for the operator class.

PostgreSQL Sequences

Sequence involves creating and initializing a new special single-row table. It is usually used to generate unique
identifiers for rows of a table. Click -> Sequence to open an object list for Sequence.

General Properties

Owner
The owner of the sequence function.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

Increment
Specify which value is added to the current sequence value to create a new value. A positive value will make an
ascending sequence, a negative one a descending sequence. The default value is 1.

Current value
The starting value of the sequence.

Minimum
Determine the minimum value a sequence can generate.

Maximum
Determine the maximum value for the sequence.

Cache
Specify how many sequence numbers are to be preallocated and stored in memory for faster access.

Cycled
This option allows the sequence to wrap around when the maxvalue or minvalue has been reached by an ascending or
descending sequence respectively. If the limit is reached, the next number generated will be the minvalue maxvalue,
respectively. Otherwise, any calls to nextval after the sequence has reached its maximum value will return an error.

Add owned by
Choose the Owned by table and Owned by column so that the sequence is associated with a specific table column,
such that if that column (or its whole table) is dropped, the sequence will be automatically dropped as well. The
specified table must have the same owner and be in the same schema as the sequence.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

121
PostgreSQL Triggers

Triggers are database operations that are automatically performed when a specified database event occurs. Click
-> Trigger to open an object list for Trigger.

See Triggers for details.

General Properties

Constraint
Check this box to create a constraint trigger.

Trigger Type
Choose the type of the trigger: Table or View.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.0 or later.

Table name or View name

Choose a table or view.

BEFORE
The trigger can be specified to fire before the operation is attempted on a row.

AFTER
The trigger can be specified to fire after the operation is attempted on a row.

INSTEAD OF
The trigger can be specified to fire instead of the operation is attempted on a row.

INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE
Choose the events that activate the trigger.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted.

TRUNCATE
Trigger defined to fire for TRUNCATE.

122
Update Of Fields
Specify a list of columns. The trigger will only fire if at least one of the listed columns is mentioned as a target of the
UPDATE command.

STATEMENT
Specify the trigger procedure should be fired once per SQL statement.

ROW
Specify the trigger procedure should be fired once for every row affected by the trigger event.

When
Specify a Boolean WHEN condition, which will be tested to see whether the trigger should be fired.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 9.0 or later.

Function Schema and Function name

A user-supplied function that is declared as taking no arguments and returning type trigger, which is executed when the
trigger fires.

Function Arguments
An optional comma-separated list of arguments to be provided to the function when the trigger is executed. The
arguments are literal string constants. Simple names and numeric constants may be written here, too, but they will all
be converted to strings. Please check the description of the implementation language of the trigger function about how
the trigger arguments are accessible within the function; it may be different from normal function arguments.

Constraint

Deferrable
The constraint can be deferred.

INITIALLY IMMEDIATE
The constraint is checked after each statement.

INITIALLY DEFERRED
The constraint is checked only at the end of the transaction.

Referenced Table Schema and Referenced Table Name

The schema and the name of another table referenced by the constraint.

PostgreSQL Trigger Functions

Trigger Function can be created with PL/pgSQL and referenced within a PostgreSQL trigger definition. The term
"trigger function" is a simply a way of referring to a function that is intended to be invoked by a trigger. Triggers define
operations that are performed when a specific event occurs within the database. A PL/pgSQL trigger function can be
referenced by a trigger as the operation to be performed when the trigger's event occurs.

123
The definition of a trigger and the definition of its associated trigger function are two different things. A trigger is defined
with the SQL CREATE TRIGGER command, whereas trigger functions are defined using the SQL CREATE

FUNCTION command. Click -> Trigger Function to open an object list for Trigger Function.

See Triggers for details.

Definition

Definition consists of a valid SQL procedure statement. This can be a simple statement such as SELECT or INSERT,
or it can be a compound statement written using BEGIN and END. Compound statements can contain declarations,
loops, and other control structure statements.

Parameter
Define trigger function parameter.

Return type schema and Return Type

The return type of the trigger function.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Advanced Properties

Owner
The owner of the trigger function.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

Language
The name of the language that the function is implemented in. May be C, internal, or the name of a user-defined
procedural language. For backward compatibility, the name may be enclosed by single quotes.

Volatility
These attributes inform the query optimizer about the behavior of the function. At most one choice may be specified. If
none of these appear, VOLATILE is the default assumption.

IMMUTABLE The function cannot modify the database and always returns the same result when given the same
argument values; that is, it does not do database lookups or otherwise use information not directly
present in its argument list. If this option is given, any call of the function with all-constant arguments
can be immediately replaced with the function value.
STABLE The function cannot modify the database, and that within a single table scan it will consistently return
the same result for the same argument values, but that its result could change across SQL
statements. This is the appropriate selection for functions whose results depend on database
lookups, parameter variables (such as the current time zone), etc. Also note that the
current_timestamp family of functions qualify as stable, since their values do not change within a
transaction.

124
 VOLATILE The function value can change even within a single table scan, so no optimizations can be made.
Relatively few database functions are volatile in this sense; some examples are random(), currval(),
timeofday(). But note that any function that has side-effects must be classified volatile, even if its
result is quite predictable, to prevent calls from being optimized away; an example is setval().

Security of definer
Specify that the function is to be executed with the privileges of the user that created it.

Returns Set
Indicate that the function will return a set of items, rather than a single item.

Strict
Indicate that the function always returns null whenever any of its arguments are null. If this parameter is specified, the
function is not executed when there are null arguments; instead a null result is assumed automatically.

Estimated cost
A positive number giving the estimated execution cost for the function, in units of cpu_operator_cost. If the function
returns a set, this is the cost per returned row. If the cost is not specified, 1 unit is assumed for C-language and internal
functions, and 100 units for functions in all other languages. Larger values cause the planner to try to avoid evaluating
the function more often than necessary.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

Estimated rows
A positive number giving the estimated number of rows that the planner should expect the function to return. This is
only allowed when the function is declared to return a set.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

Configuration parameter
The specified configuration parameter to be set to the specified value when the function is entered, and then restored
to its prior value when the function exits.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

Debug (Available only in Full Version)

To debug the PL/pgSQL function, click Debug Function on the toolbar to launch the PostgreSQL Debugger.

PostgreSQL Types

Type registers a new data type for use in the current database. If a schema name is given then the type is created in
the specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema. The type name must be distinct from the name of
any existing type or domain in the same schema. (Because tables have associated data types, the type name must

125
also be distinct from the name of any existing table in the same schema.) Click -> Type to open an object list for
Type.

Base types are those, like int4, that are implemented below the level of the SQL language (typically in a low-level
language such as C). They generally correspond to what are often known as abstract data types. PostgreSQL can only
operate on such types through functions provided by the user and only understands the behavior of such types to the
extent that the user describes them. Base types are further subdivided into scalar and array types. For each scalar type,
a corresponding array type is automatically created that can hold variable-size arrays of that scalar type.

Composite types, or row types, are created whenever the user creates a table; it's also possible to define a
"stand-alone" composite type with no associated table. A composite type is simply a list of base types with associated
field names. A value of a composite type is a row or record of field values. The user can access the component fields
from SQL queries.

Enumerated (Enum) types are data types that are comprised of a static, predefined set of values with a specific order.
They are equivalent to the enum types in a number of programming languages. An example of an enum type might be
the days of the week, or a set of status values for a piece of data.

Range types are data types representing a range of values of some element type (called the range's subtype).

Note: Enum Type was added in PostgreSQL 8.3. Range Type was added in PostgrerSQL 9.2.

General Properties for Base Type

Input Schema and Input

The function that converts data from the type's external textual form to its internal form.

Output Schema and Output

The function that converts data from the type's internal form to its external textual form.

Length
A numeric constant that specifies the length in bytes of the new type's internal representation. The default assumption
is that it is variable-length.

Variable
Check this option if the type length is unknown.

Default
The default value for the data type. If this is omitted, the default is null.

Element
The type being created is an array; this specifies the type of the array elements.

Delimiter
The delimiter character to be used between values in arrays made of this type.

126
Alignment
The storage alignment requirement of the data type. If specified, it must be char, int2, int4, or double; the default is int4.

Storage
The storage strategy for the data type. If specified, must be plain, external, extended, or main; the default is plain.

Pass by value
Indicate that values of this data type are passed by value rather than by reference.

Owner
The owner of the type.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

Advanced Properties for Base Type

The Advanced tab is supported from PostgreSQL 7.4 or later.

Receive Schema and Receive

The function that converts data from the type's external binary form to its internal form.

Send Schema and Send

The function that converts data from the type's internal form to its external binary form.

Analyze Schema and Analyze

The function that performs statistical analysis for the data type.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

Type Modifier Input Schema and Type Modifier Input

The function that converts an array of modifier(s) for the type into internal form.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.3 or later.

Type Modifier Output Schema and Type Modifier Output

The function that converts the internal form of the type's modifier(s) to external textual form.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.3 or later.

General Properties for Composite Type

Name
The name of an attribute (column) for the composite type.

Type
The name of an existing data type to become a column of the composite type.

127
Length and Scale
Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Scale edit box to define the number of digits after the
decimal point. (if required for the selected data type)

Dimensions
The dimensions of array specifiers.

Collate
The name of an existing collation to be associated with a column of a composite type.

Owner
The owner of the type.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

General Properties for Enum Type

Label
A string literal representing the textual label associated with one value of an enum type.

Owner
The owner of the type.

General Properties for Range Type

Subtype Schema and Subtype

The schema and the name of the element type that the range type will represent ranges of.

Operator Class Schema and Operator Class

The schema and the name of a b-tree operator class for the subtype.

Collate
The name of an existing collation to be associated with a column with a range type.

Canonical Schema and Canonical

The schema and the name of the canonicalization function for the range type.

Subtype Diff Schema and Subtype Diff

The schema and the name of a difference function for the subtype.

Owner
The owner of the type.

128
PostgreSQL Tablespaces

A tablespace allows superusers to define an alternative location on the file system where the data files containing
database objects (such as tables and indexes) may reside. Click -> Tablespace to open an object list for
Tablespace.

Note: Tablespace was added in PostgreSQL 8.0.

The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8.2 or later.

General Properties

Location
The directory that will be used for the tablespace. The directory must be empty and must be owned by the PostgreSQL
system user. The directory must be specified by an absolute path name.

Owner
The name of the user who will own the tablespace. If omitted, defaults to the user executing the command. Only
superusers may create tablespaces, but they can assign ownership of tablespaces to non-superusers.

PostgreSQL Casts

A cast specifies how to perform a conversion between two data types. Click -> Cast to open an object list for Cast.

Note: The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

General Properties

Schema of source type and Source type

The schema and name of the source data type of the cast.

Schema of target type and Target type

The schema and name of the target data type of the cast.

Schema of function and Function

The function used to perform the cast. The function name may be schema-qualified. If it is not, the function will be
looked up in the schema search path. The function's result data type must match the target type of the cast.

If no function is specify, indicates that the source type and the target type are binary compatible, so no function is
required to perform the cast.

Implicit
Indicate that the cast may be invoked implicitly in any context.

Assignment
Indicate that the cast can be invoked implicitly in assignment contexts.

129
PostgreSQL Foreign Servers

A foreign server typically encapsulates connection information that a foreign-data wrapper uses to access an external
data resource. Additional user-specific connection information may be specified by means of user mappings. Click
-> Foreign Server to open an object list for Foreign Server.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.4 or later.

To install the postgres_fdw extension for accessing data stored in external PostgreSQL servers, you can right-click
anywhere the Object List pane and select Install postgres_fdw Extension.

General Properties

FDW Name
The name of the foreign-data wrapper that manages the server.

Options
Define the connection details of the server, but the actual names and values are dependent on the server's foreign-data
wrapper.

Server Type
Specify the server type.

Server Version
Specify the server version.

Owner
The owner of the foreign server.

User Mappings

Name
The name of an existing user that is mapped to foreign server.

Options
Specify the options of the user mapping. The options typically define the actual user name and password of the
mapping.

PostgreSQL Languages

Language can register a new procedural language with a PostgreSQL database. Subsequently, functions and trigger
procedures can be defined in this new language. The user must have the PostgreSQL superuser privilege to register a
new language. Click -> Language to open an object list for Language.

Note: The Comment tab is supported from PostgreSQL 8.0 or later.

130
General Properties

Owner
The owner of the language.

Note: Support from PostgreSQL 8.3 or later.

Schema of handler and Handler

Call Handler is the name of a previously registered function that will be called to execute the procedural language
functions. The call handler for a procedural language must be written in a compiled language such as C with version 1
call convention and registered with PostgreSQL as a function taking no arguments and returning the language_handler
type, a placeholder type that is simply used to identify the function as a call handler.

Schema of validator and Validator

Validator function is the name of a previously registered function that will be called when a new function in the language
is created, to validate the new function. If no validator function is specified, then a new function will not be checked
when it is created. The validator function must take one argument of type oid, which will be the OID of the to-be-created
function, and will typically return void.

A validator function would typically inspect the function body for syntactical correctness, but it can also look at other
properties of the function, for example if the language cannot handle certain argument types. To signal an error, the
validator function should use the ereport() function. The return value of the function is ignored.

Trusted
Specify that the call handler for the language is safe, that is, it does not offer an unprivileged user any functionality to
bypass access restrictions. If this key word is omitted when registering the language, only users with the PostgreSQL
superuser privilege can use this language to create new functions.

SQLite Objects

To start working with the server objects, you should create and open a connection.

You can attach a database, right-click the opened connection and choose Attach Database and enter the following
information.

Option Description
Database File Set the file path for a database.
Database Name Enter the database name which displays in Navicat.
Encrypted Enable this option and provide Password when connecting to an encrypted SQLite
database.

To detach a database, right-click it in the Connection pane and choose Detach Database.

131
If you want to encrypt or decrypt a database, simply right-click it in the Connection pane and choose Encrypt
Database or Decrypt Database.

A special table named sqlite_master stores the complete database schema. To view the sqlite_master table, right-click
the database and select View Master Table from the pop-up menu.

SQLite Tables

Relational databases use tables to store data. All operations on data are done on the tables themselves or produce
another table as the result. A table is a set of rows and columns, and their intersections are fields. From a general
perspective, columns within a table describe the name and type of data that will be found by row for that column's fields.
Rows within a table represent records composed of fields that are described from left to right by their corresponding

column's name and type. Each field in a row is implicitly correlated with each other field in that row. Click to open
an object list for Table.

When open a table with graphical fields, right-click a table and select the Open Table (Quick) from the pop-up
menu. Faster performance for opening the graphical table, as BLOB fields (images) will not be loaded until you click on
the cell. If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table, use Open Table.

You can create a table shortcut by right-click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data
directly without activating the main Navicat.

To empty a table, right-click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop-up menu.

SQLite Table Fields

In the Fields tab, just simply click a field for editing. A right-click displays the pop-up menu or using field toolbar, you
can create new, insert, move and drop the selected field. To search a field name, choose Edit -> Find or press
CTRL+F.

Button Description
Add Field Add a field to the table.
Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field.
Delete Field Delete the selected field.
Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key.
Move Move Down Move the selected field up/down.

Use the Name edit box to set the field name. Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names
in the table.

The Type drop-down list defines the type (storage class) of the field data. See SQLite 2 Data Types and SQLite 3 Data
Types for details.

132
Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Decimals edit box to define the number of digits after
the decimal point (the scale).

Not null
Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field.

Primary Key
A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record. None of the fields that are part of
the primary key can contain a null value.

Field's Properties

Note: The following options depend on the field type you are chosen.

Default
To set the default value for the field.

Collation
To specify the text collating function to use when comparing text entries for the column.

BINARY Compare string data using memcmp(), regardless of text encoding.

NOCASE The same as binary, except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower case
equivalents before the comparison is performed. Note that only ASCII characters are case folded.
SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the size of the tables required.
RTRIM The same as binary, except that trailing space characters are ignored.

Note: Support in SQLite 3.

Not null ON CONFLICT

To specify an algorithm used to resolve constraint conflicts if Not null option is checked.

ROLLBACK When a constraint violation occurs, an immediate ROLLBACK occurs, thus ending the current
transaction, and the command aborts with a return code of SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. If no
transaction is active (other than the implied transaction that is created on every command) then
this algorithm works the same as ABORT.
ABORT When a constraint violation occurs, the command backs out any prior changes it might have made
and aborts with a return code of SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. But no ROLLBACK is executed so
changes from prior commands within the same transaction are preserved. This is the default
behavior.
FAIL When a constraint violation occurs, the command aborts with a return code
SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. But any changes to the database that the command made prior to
encountering the constraint violation are preserved and are not backed out. For example, if an
UPDATE statement encountered a constraint violation on the 100th row that it attempts to update,
then the first 99 row changes are preserved but changes to rows 100 and beyond never occur.

133
 IGNORE When a constraint violation occurs, the one row that contains the constraint violation is not
inserted or changed. But the command continues executing normally. Other rows before and after
the row that contained the constraint violation continue to be inserted or updated normally. No
error is returned when the IGNORE conflict resolution algorithm is used.
REPLACE When a UNIQUE constraint violation occurs, the pre-existing rows that are causing the constraint
violation are removed prior to inserting or updating the current row. Thus the insert or update
always occurs. The command continues executing normally following REPLACE. No error is
returned by the REPLACE conflict resolution. If a NOT NULL constraint violation occurs, the NULL
value is replaced by the default value for that column. If the column has no default value, then the
ABORT algorithm is used. If a CHECK constraint violation occurs then the IGNORE algorithm is
used.

Auto Increment
The AUTO INCREMENT attribute can be used to generate a unique identity for new rows. To start with the AUTO
INCREMENT value other than 1, you can set that value in Options tab.

SQLite Table Indexes

Index provides a faster access path to table data. It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL
statement execution on that table.

In the Indexes tab, just simply click an index field for editing. By using the index toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected index field.

Button Description
Add Index Add an index to the table.
Delete Index Delete the selected index.

Use the Name edit box to set the index name.

To include field(s) in the index, just simply double-click the Fields or click to open the editor for editing.

Unique
All values of the indexed column(s) must only occur once.

Fields Editor

Select the field(s) from the Name list. You can also use the arrow buttons to change the index field(s) order.

Collation
To define a collating sequence used for text entries in that column. The default collating sequence is the collating
sequence defined for that column.

BINARY Compares string data using memcmp(), regardless of text encoding.

134
 NOCASE The same as binary, except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower case
equivalents before the comparison is performed. Note that only ASCII characters are case folded.
SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the size of the tables required.
RTRIM The same as binary, except that trailing space characters are ignored.

Note: Support in SQLite 3.

Sort Order
To indicate sort order - ascending "ASC" or descending "DESC".

SQLite Table Foreign Keys

A foreign key is a field in a relational table that matches the primary key column of another table.

In the Foreign Keys tab, just simply click a foreign key field for editing. By using the foreign key toolbar, you can create
new, edit and delete the selected foreign key field.

Button Description
Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table.
Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key.

Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key.

Use the Referenced Table drop-down list to select a foreign table.

To include field(s)/referenced field(s) to the key, just simply double-click the Fields/Referenced Fields field or click
to open the editor(s) for editing.

The On Delete and On Update drop-down list define the type of the actions to be taken.

RESTRICT The "RESTRICT" action means that the application is prohibited from deleting (for ON DELETE
RESTRICT) or modifying (for ON UPDATE RESTRICT) a parent key when there exists one or
more child keys mapped to it.
NO ACTION Configuring "NO ACTION" means just that: when a parent key is modified or deleted from the
database, no special action is taken.
CASCADE A "CASCADE" action propagates the delete or update operation on the parent key to each
dependent child key. For an "ON DELETE CASCADE" action, this means that each row in the
child table that was associated with the deleted parent row is also deleted. For an "ON
UPDATE CASCADE" action, it means that the values stored in each dependent child key are
modified to match the new parent key values.
SET NULL If the configured action is "SET NULL", then when a parent key is deleted (for ON DELETE
SET NULL) or modified (for ON UPDATE SET NULL), the child key columns of all rows in the
child table that mapped to the parent key are set to contain SQL NULL values.
SET The "SET DEFAULT" actions are similar to "SET NULL", except that each of the child key

135
 DEFAULT columns is set to contain the columns default value instead of NULL.

Deferred
Deferred foreign key constraints are not checked until the transaction tries to COMMIT.

Related topic:
Foreign Keys Data Selection

SQLite Table Uniques

Unique constraints ensure that the data contained in a column or a group of columns is unique with respect to all the
rows in the table.

In the Uniques tab, just simply click an unique field for editing. By using the unique toolbar, you can create new, edit
and delete the selected unique field.

Button Description
Add Unique Add an unique to the table.
Delete Unique Delete the selected unique.

Use the Name edit box to set the unique name.

To set field(s) as unique, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor(s) for editing.

ON CONFLICT
To specify an algorithm used to resolve constraint conflicts.

ROLLBACK When a constraint violation occurs, an immediate ROLLBACK occurs, thus ending the current
transaction, and the command aborts with a return code of SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. If no
transaction is active (other than the implied transaction that is created on every command) then this
algorithm works the same as ABORT.
ABORT When a constraint violation occurs, the command backs out any prior changes it might have made
and aborts with a return code of SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. But no ROLLBACK is executed so
changes from prior commands within the same transaction are preserved. This is the default
behavior.
FAIL When a constraint violation occurs, the command aborts with a return code
SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. But any changes to the database that the command made prior to
encountering the constraint violation are preserved and are not backed out. For example, if an
UPDATE statement encountered a constraint violation on the 100th row that it attempts to update,
then the first 99 row changes are preserved but changes to rows 100 and beyond never occur.
IGNORE When a constraint violation occurs, the one row that contains the constraint violation is not inserted
or changed. But the command continues executing normally. Other rows before and after the row
that contained the constraint violation continue to be inserted or updated normally. No error is
returned when the IGNORE conflict resolution algorithm is used.

136
 REPLACE When a UNIQUE constraint violation occurs, the pre-existing rows that are causing the constraint
violation are removed prior to inserting or updating the current row. Thus the insert or update
always occurs. The command continues executing normally following REPLACE. No error is
returned by the REPLACE conflict resolution. If a NOT NULL constraint violation occurs, the NULL
value is replaced by the default value for that column. If the column has no default value, then the
ABORT algorithm is used. If a CHECK constraint violation occurs then the IGNORE algorithm is
used.

Fields Editor

Select the field(s) from the Name list. To remove the fields from the unique, uncheck them in the same way. You can
also use the arrow buttons to change the unique field(s) order.

Collation
To define a collating sequence used for text entries in that column. The default collating sequence is the collating
sequence defined for that column.

BINARY Compares string data using memcmp(), regardless of text encoding.

NOCASE The same as binary, except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower
case equivalents before the comparison is performed. Note that only ASCII characters are
case folded. SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the size of the tables
required.
RTRIM The same as binary, except that trailing space characters are ignored.

Note: Support in SQLite 3.

Sort Order
To indicate sort order - ascending "ASC" or descending "DESC".

SQLite Table Checks

A check constraint allows you to specify that the value in a certain column must satisfy a Boolean (truth-value)
expression.

In the Checks tab, just simply click a check field for editing. By using the check toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected check field.

Note: Checks are supported from SQLite version 3.3.0 or later.

Button Description
Add Check Add a check to the table.
Delete Check Delete the selected check.

Use the Name edit box to set the check name.

137
Check
Set the condition for checking, e.g. "field_name1 > 0 AND field_name2 > field_name1" in the Check edit box.

Definition
Type in the definition for the check constraint.

SQLite Table Triggers

A trigger is a database operation that is automatically performed when a specified database event occurs.

In the Triggers tab, just simply click a trigger field for editing. By using the trigger toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected trigger field.

Button Description
Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table.
Delete Trigger Delete the selected trigger.

Name
Set the trigger name.

Fires
Determine when the trigger actions will be executed relative to the insertion, modification or removal of the associated
row.

Insert
Fire the trigger whenever an INSERT statement adds a row to a table.

Update
Fire the trigger whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in one of the columns specified in Update Of Fields.
If no Update Of Fields are present, the trigger will be fired whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in any
column of the table.

Delete
Fire the trigger whenever a DELETE statement removes a row from the table.

Update Of Fields
Specify the fields for UPDATE statement trigger upon necessary.

Definition
Type in the definition for the trigger.

When Clause
Specify the trigger condition, which is a SQL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger.

138
SQLite Table Options

Primary Key ON CONFLICT

To specify an algorithm used to resolve primary key constraint conflicts.

ROLLBACK When a constraint violation occurs, an immediate ROLLBACK occurs, thus ending the current
transaction, and the command aborts with a return code of SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. If no
transaction is active (other than the implied transaction that is created on every command) then
this algorithm works the same as ABORT.
ABORT When a constraint violation occurs, the command backs out any prior changes it might have made
and aborts with a return code of SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. But no ROLLBACK is executed so
changes from prior commands within the same transaction are preserved. This is the default
behavior.
FAIL When a constraint violation occurs, the command aborts with a return code
SQLITE_CONSTRAINT. But any changes to the database that the command made prior to
encountering the constraint violation are preserved and are not backed out. For example, if an
UPDATE statement encountered a constraint violation on the 100th row that it attempts to update,
then the first 99 row changes are preserved but changes to rows 100 and beyond never occur.
IGNORE When a constraint violation occurs, the one row that contains the constraint violation is not
inserted or changed. But the command continues executing normally. Other rows before and after
the row that contained the constraint violation continue to be inserted or updated normally. No
error is returned when the IGNORE conflict resolution algorithm is used.
REPLACE When a UNIQUE constraint violation occurs, the pre-existing rows that are causing the constraint
violation are removed prior to inserting or updating the current row. Thus the insert or update
always occurs. The command continues executing normally following REPLACE. No error is
returned by the REPLACE conflict resolution. If a NOT NULL constraint violation occurs, the NULL
value is replaced by the default value for that column. If the column has no default value, then the
ABORT algorithm is used. If a CHECK constraint violation occurs then the IGNORE algorithm is
used.

Auto Increment
Set/Reset the Auto Increment value in the edit field. The auto increment value indicates the value for next record.

WITHOUT ROWID
Omit the rowid (and "oid" and "_rowid_").

Note: Support from SQLite 3.8.2 or later.

SQLite Views

Views are useful for allowing users to access a set of tables as if it were a single table, and limiting their access to just
that. Views can also be used to restrict access to rows (a subset of a particular table). Click to open an object list
for View.

139
You can create a view shortcut by right-click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without
activating the main Navicat.

Button Description
Preview Preview the result of the view.
Explain Show the Query Plan of the view.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.

Note: You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View -> Show Result ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

View Builder (Available only in Full Version)

View Builder allows you to build views visually. It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL. See
Query Builder for details.

Definition

You can edit the view definition as SQL statement (SELECT statement it implements).

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

View Viewer

View Viewer displays the view data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View. See
Table Viewer for details.

SQLite Indexes

Index provides a faster access path to table data. It is created using one or more columns of a table to speed SQL
statement execution on that table. Click to open an object list for Index.

General Properties

Type
The types of the index.

Normal A normal index does not impose restrictions on the column values.
Unique An unique index indicates that no two rows of a table have duplicate values in the key columns.

Table name
The table that contains the index.

140
Name
To define the field.

Collate
To define a collating sequence used for text entries in that column. The default collating sequence is the collating
sequence defined for that column.

BINARY Compare string data using memcmp(), regardless of text encoding.

NOCASE The same as binary, except the 26 upper case characters of ASCII are folded to their lower
case equivalents before the comparison is performed. Note that only ASCII characters are
case folded. SQLite does not attempt to do full UTF case folding due to the size of the tables
required.
RTRIM The same as binary, except that trailing space characters are ignored.

Note: Support in SQLite 3.

Sort Order
To indicate sort order - ascending "ASC" or descending "DESC".

SQLite Triggers

Triggers are database operations that are automatically performed when a specified database event occurs. Click
to open an object list for Trigger.

See Triggers for details.

General Properties

Trigger Type
Define the trigger type: TABLE or VIEW.

Table name or View name

Choose a table or view.

BEFORE
The trigger can be specified to fire before the operation is attempted on a row.

AFTER
The trigger can be specified to fire after the operation is attempted on a row.

INSTEAD OF
The trigger can be specified to fire instead of the operation is attempted on a row.

When
Specify the trigger condition for the database to fire the trigger.

141
Insert
The trigger is activated whenever adding a row to a table.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever removing a row from the table.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever changing a value in one of the fields selected in Update Of Fields.

Update Of Fields
Specify the fields for UPDATE statement trigger upon necessary.

Definition

You can edit valid SQL statements in the trigger definition inside BEGIN and END.

SQL Server Objects

To start working with the server objects, you should create and open a connection. If the server is empty, you need to
right-click the connection in the Connection pane and choose New Database to create a new database.

Note: SQL Azure does not support Comment tab.

General Properties for SQL Azure

Database Name
Define the name of the database.

Edition
Choose the edition of the database: web or business.

Max Size
Choose the maximum size of the database.

General Properties for SQL Server

Database Name
Define the name of the database.

Owner
Choose the owner of the database.

Collation
Choose the default collation for the database. Collation name can be either a Windows collation name or a SQL

142
collation name. If not specified, the database is assigned the default collation of the instance of SQL Server. A collation
name cannot be specified on a database snapshot.

Recovery Model
Control database recovery options and disk I/O error checking.

FULL Provide full recovery after media failure by using transaction log backups. If a data file
is damaged, media recovery can restore all committed transactions.
BULK_LOGGED Provide recovery after media failure by combining the best performance and least
amount of log-space use for certain large-scale or bulk operations.
SIMPLE A simple backup strategy that uses minimal log space is provided. Log space can be
automatically reused when it is no longer required for server failure recovery.

Compatibility Level
Choose the version of SQL Server with which the database is to be made compatible.

Filegroups Properties for SQL Server

Filegroups
Add or delete a filegroup. PRIMARY filegroup cannot be deleted.

FILESTREAM Filegroups
Add or delete a FILESTREAM filegroup.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Files Properties for SQL Server

Name
Specify the logical name for the file.

Type
Choose the file type.

Filegroup
Choose the filegroup.

File Directory
The path used by the operating system when you create the file.

File Name
The file name used by the operating system when you create the file.

Size
Specify the size of the file.

143
Allow Auto Growth
Check this option if you want to allow automatic growth.

Growth
Specify the automatic growth increment of the file.

Max Size
Specify the maximum size to which the file can grow.

Unlimited
Specify that the file grows until the disk is full. In SQL Server, a log file specified with unlimited growth has a maximum
size of 2 TB, and a data file has a maximum size of 16 TB.

Advanced Properties (State) for SQL Server

Database Read-Only
If this option is on, users can read data from the database but not modify it.

Database State
Choose the state of the database.

OFFLINE The database is closed, shut down cleanly, and marked offline. The database cannot be
modified while it is offline.
ONLINE The database is open and available for use.
EMERGENCY The database is marked READ_ONLY, logging is disabled, and access is limited to members
of the sysadmin fixed server role. EMERGENCY is primarily used for troubleshooting purposes.

Restrict Access
Control user access to the database.

SINGLE_USER Specifies that only one user at a time can access the database.
RESTRICTED_USER RESTRICTED_USER allows for only members of the db_owner fixed database role and
dbcreator and sysadmin fixed server roles to connect to the database, but does not limit
their number.
MULTI_USER All users that have the appropriate permissions to connect to the database are allowed.

Encryption Enabled
Check this option if you want to encrypt the database.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Advanced Properties (SQL) for SQL Server

ANSI Null Default

Check this option if you want to determines the default value as NULL.

144
ANSI Nulls Enabled
If this option is on, all comparisons to a null value evaluate to UNKNOWN.

ANSI Padding Enabled

If this option is on, strings are padded to the same length before conversion or inserting to a varchar or nvarchar data
type.

ANSI Warnings Enabled

If this option is on, errors or warnings are issued when conditions such as divide-by-zero occur or null values appear in
aggregate functions.

Arithmetic Abort Enabled

If this option is on, a query is ended when an overflow or divide-by-zero error occurs during query execution.

Concatenate Null Yields Null

If this option is on, the result of a concatenation operation is NULL when either operand is NULL.

Numeric Round Abort

If this option is on, an error is generated when loss of precision occurs in an expression.

Quoted Identifiers Enabled

If this option is on, double quotation marks can be used to enclose delimited identifiers.

Recursive Triggers Enabled

If this option is on, Recursive firing of AFTER triggers is allowed.

Advanced Properties (Cursor) for SQL Server

Close Cursor On Commit Enabled

If this option is on, any cursors open when a transaction is committed or rolled back are closed.

Default Cursor

LOCAL When LOCAL is specified and a cursor is not defined as GLOBAL when created, the scope of the
cursor is local to the batch, stored procedure, or trigger in which the cursor was created. The cursor
name is valid only within this scope. The cursor can be referenced by local cursor variables in the batch,
stored procedure, or trigger, or a stored procedure OUTPUT parameter. The cursor is implicitly
deallocated when the batch, stored procedure, or trigger ends, unless it was passed back in an
OUTPUT parameter. If the cursor is passed back in an OUTPUT parameter, the cursor is deallocated
when the last variable that references it is deallocated or goes out of scope.
GLOBAL When GLOBAL is specified, and a cursor is not defined as LOCAL when created, the scope of the
cursor is global to the connection. The cursor name can be referenced in any stored procedure or batch
executed by the connection.

Advanced Properties (Automatic) for SQL Server

145
Auto Close
If this option is on, the database is shut down cleanly and its resources are freed after the last user exits.

Auto Create Statistics

If this option is on, the query optimizer creates statistics on single columns in query predicates, as necessary, to
improve query plans and query performance.

Auto Shrink
If this option is on, the database files are candidates for periodic shrinking.

Auto Update Statistics

Specify that the query optimizer updates statistics when they are used by a query and when they might be out-of-date.

Auto Update Statistics Asynchronously

Specify that statistics updates for the AUTO_UPDATE_STATISTICS option are asynchronous. The query optimizer
does not wait for statistics updates to complete before it compiles queries.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Advanced Properties (Recovery) for SQL Server

Page Verify
Discover damaged database pages caused by disk I/O path errors. Disk I/O path errors can be the cause of database
corruption problems and are generally caused by power failures or disk hardware failures that occur at the time the
page is being written to disk.

NONE Database page writes will not generate a CHECKSUM or

TORN_PAGE_DETECTION value. SQL Server will not verify a checksum or torn
page during a read even if a CHECKSUM or TORN_PAGE_DETECTION value
is present in the page header.
TORN_PAGE_DETECTION Save a specific 2-bit pattern for each 512-byte sector in the 8-kilobyte (KB)
Página de base de datos y almacenada en el encabezado de la página de base
de datos cuando la página se escribe en disco.
CHECKSUM Calculate a checksum over the contents of the whole page and stores the value
in the page header when a page is written to disk.

Advanced Properties (Service Broker) for SQL Server

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Broker Enabled
Specify that Service Broker is enabled for the specified database. Message delivery is started, and the
is_broker_enabled flag is set to true in the sys.databases catalog view. The database retains the existing Service
Broker identifier.

146
Honor Broker Priority
Send operations take into consideration the priority levels that are assigned to conversations. Messages from
conversations that have high priority levels are sent before messages from conversations that are assigned low priority
levels.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Advanced Properties (Change Tracking) for SQL Server

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Change Tracking Enabled

Enable change tracking for the database.

Retention Period
Specify the minimum period for keeping change tracking information in the database. Data is removed only when Auto
Clean Up is checked.

Auto Clean Up
Change tracking information is automatically removed after the specified retention period.

Advanced Properties (Miscellaneous) for SQL Server

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Cross Database Ownership Chaining Enabled

If this option is on, database can be the source or target of a cross-database ownership chain.

Trustworthy
If this option is on, database modules (for example, user-defined functions or stored procedures) that use an
impersonation context can access resources outside the database.

Date Correlation Optimization Enabled

SQL Server maintains correlation statistics between any two tables in the database that are linked by a FOREIGN KEY
constraint and have datetime columns.

Parameterization

SIMPLE Queries are parameterized based on the default behavior of the database.
FORCED SQL Server parameterizes all queries in the database.

VarDecimal Storage Enabled

Indicate that decimal and numeric data types are stored by using the vardecimal storage format.

147
SQL Server Backup/Restore (Available only in Full Version)

You can backup and restore your SQL Server databases. The SQL Server backup and restore component provides an
important safeguard for protecting critical data. Click to open an object list for SQL Server Backup.

Nota: El archivo de copia de seguridad se almacena en el servidor.

SQL Server Backup

Before starting the backup process, click Generate SQL button to review the SQL. Then, you can click the Backup
button to run it. If you want to backup with the setting of an existing backup file, you can right-click a backup file in the
Object List pane and choose Backup From This Setting.

You can save the backup settings to a profile. Simply click the Save button.

Hint: The profiles(.nspb) are saved under the Settings Location.

To show the hidden tabs (advanced options), check the Show Advanced Options box.

General Properties

Backup Set Name

Specify the name of the backup set.

Description
Specify the free-form text describing the backup set.

Backup Type

Full Backup Perform a full backup.

Differential Backup Specify that the database or file backup should consist only of the portions of the
database or file changed since the last full backup.
Transaction-Log Backup Specify a backup of the transaction log only.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2012 or later and SQL Azure.

Copy-only
Specify that the backup is a copy-only backup, which does not affect the normal sequence of backups.

New Media Set

Create a new media set for the backup. To add a Backup Device or file to the list, click the Add device button.

Existing Media Set

Choose an existing media set for the backup.

File and Filegroups Properties for Full and Differential Backups

148
Choose the Backup Components: Full Database Backup, Partial Backup or Specify files and filegroups.

Advanced Properties

Expire After Days

Specify the number of days that must elapse before this backup media set can be overwritten.

Expire On
Specify when the backup set expires and can be overwritten.

Password
Set the password for the backup set.

Format media set

Specify that a new media set be created.

New Name
The name of the new media set.

Description
Specify the free-form text description of the media set.

Overwrite all backups

Specify that all backup sets should be overwritten, but preserves the media header.

Check media name and backup set expiration

Control whether a backup operation checks the expiration date and time of the backup sets on the media before
overwriting them.

Media Set Name

Specify the media name for the entire backup media set.

Password
Set the password for the media set.

Truncate the transaction log

Choose this option to truncate the transaction log.

Backup the tail log and set database to recovery state

Choose this option to back up the tail of the log and leaves the database in the RESTORING state.

Verify backup
Check this options to verify the backup.

Perform checksum
Enable the backup checksums.

149
Continue on error
Instruct backup to continue despite encountering errors such as invalid checksums or torn pages.

Compression
Specify whether backup compression is performed on this backup.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure.

SQL Server Restore

Before starting the restore process, click Generate SQL button to review the SQL. Then, you can click the Restore
button to run it. If you want to restore from a file that is not listed in the Object List pane, you can right-click anywhere in
the Object List pane and choose Restore From File.

General Properties for Restore Backup

Restore to database
Select the database to restore.

Latest possible (only for Transaction Log backup)

Choose this option if do not have the restore point.

Specific time (only for Transaction Log backup)

Specify that the database be restored to the state it was in as of the date and time.

Marked transaction (only for Transaction Log backup)

Specify recovery to a specified recovery point.

Include marked transaction (only for Transaction Log backup)

The specified transaction is included in the recovery, but it is committed only if it was originally committed when the
transaction was actually generated.

General Properties for Restore from File

Restore to database
Select the database to restore.

Source of backup set

To add a Backup Device or file to the list, click the Add device button.

Latest possible
Choose this option if do not have the restore point.

Specific time
Specify that the database be restored to the state it was in as of the date and time.

150
Marked transaction
Specify recovery to a specified recovery point.

Include marked transaction

The specified transaction is included in the recovery, but it is committed only if it was originally committed when the
transaction was actually generated.

Restore plan
Select the database backup files in the list.

Advanced Properties

Restore database files to

Specify that the data or log file should be moved by restoring it to the location specified in Restore To.

WITH REPLACE
Specify that SQL Server should create the specified database and its related files even if another database already
exists with the same name.

WITH RESTRICTED_USER
Restrict access for the newly restored database to members of the db_owner, dbcreator, or sysadmin roles.

WITH KEEP_REPLICATION
KEEP_REPLICATION should used when setting up replication to work with log shipping.

RECOVERY
Roll back all uncommitted transactions. After the recovery process, the database is ready for use.

NORECOVERY
Do not roll back the uncommitted transactions.

STANDBY
Specify a Standby file that allows the recovery effects to be undone.

SQL Server Schemas

A schema contains named objects (tables, views, functions, etc) whose names may duplicate those of other objects
existing in other schemas. The schema name must be distinct from any existing schema name in the current database.

Note: SQL Server 2000 or below does not support edit, create and delete schema.
SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab.

General Properties

151
Schema Name
The name of a schema which is identified within the database.

Owner
The name of the database-level principal that will own the schema. This principal may own other schemas, and may
not use the current schema as its default schema.

SQL Server Tables

Tables are database objects that contain all the data in a database. A table definition is a collection of columns. In
tables, data is organized in a row-and-column format similar to a spreadsheet. Each row represents a unique record,

and each column represents a field within the record. Click to open an object list for Table.

When open a table with graphical fields, right-click a table and select the Open Table (Quick) from the pop-up
menu. Faster performance for opening the graphical table, as BLOB fields (images) will not be loaded until you click on
the cell. If you do wish Navicat loads all your images while opening the table, use Open Table.

You can create a table shortcut by right-click a table in the Object List pane and select Create Open Table Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your table for entering data
directly without activating the main Navicat.

To empty a table, right-click the selected table and choose Empty Table from the pop-up menu.

Note: SQL Azure does not support the Storage and Comment tab.

SQL Server Table Fields

In the Fields tab, just simply click a field for editing. A right-click displays the pop-up menu or using the field toolbar,
you can create new and drop the selected field. To search a field name, choose Edit -> Find or press CTRL+F.

Button Description
Add Field Add a field to the table.
Insert Field Insert a field above an existing field.
Note: Only available when creating a new table.

Delete Field Delete the selected field.

Primary Key Set the field as a Primary Key.
Move Move Move the selected field up/down.
Down Note: Only available when creating a new table.

Use the Name edit box to set the field name. Note that the name of the field must be unique among all the field names
in the table.

The Type drop-down list defines the type of the field data. See SQL Server Data Type and SQL Azure Support Data
Type for details.

152
Use the Length edit box to define the length of the field and use Scale edit box to define the number of digits after the
decimal point (the scale) for Floating Point data type.

Note: Be careful when shortening the field length as losing data might be caused.

Not null
Check this box to not allow the NULL values for the field.

Primary Key
A Primary Key is a single field or combination of fields that uniquely defines a record. None of the fields that are part of
the primary key can contain a null value.

Field's Pop-up Options

Duplicate Field Add a new field with modification as one of the existing fields.
Primary Key Name Enter the primary key constraint name.
Design Primary Key Index Design the primary key index.

Field's Properties

Note: The following options depend on the field type you are chosen.

Identity
Indicate that the new column is an identity column.

Row GUID
Indicate that the new column is a row GUID column. Only one uniqueidentifier column per table can be designated as
the ROWGUIDCOL column.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Collation
Specify the collation for the column.

Column Set For All Sparse Columns

Combine all of the sparse columns of a table into a structured output.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

File Stream
Specify FILESTREAM storage for the varbinary(max) BLOB data.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

User Defined Type Schema

Set the schema of the user defined type.

153
User Defined Type
Set the user defined type.

Computed Expression
Set an expression that defines the value of a computed column.

Persisted
Specify that the SQL Server Database Engine will physically store the computed values in the table, and update the
values when any other columns on which the computed column depends are updated.

Default
Set the default value for the field.

With Values
Check this to enable the with values option.

Sparse
Indicate that the column is a sparse column.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Comment
Set any optional text describing the current field.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

SQL Server Table Indexes

Indexes are optional structures associated with tables. You can create indexes on one or more columns of a table to
speed SQL statement execution on that table.

In the Indexes tab, just simply click an index field for editing. By using the index toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected index field.

Button Description
Add Index Add an index to the table.
Delete Index Delete the selected index.

Use the Name edit box to set the index name.

To include field(s) in the index, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor for editing.

Note: Some of data types do not allow indexing. For example: text

The Index Type drop-down list defines the type of the table index.

154
 Clustered Create an index in which the logical order of the key values determines the physical order of the
corresponding rows in a table.
Non-Clustered Create an index that specifies the logical ordering of a table. With a nonclustered index, the
physical order of the data rows is independent of their indexed order.
Spatial Create a spatial index on a specified table and column. An index can be created before there is
data in the table.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure.
XML Create an XML index on a specified table. An index can be created before there is data in the
table.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Unique
Create a unique index on a table.

Comment
Specify the comment of the index.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

SQL Server Table Foreign Keys

A foreign key is a field in a relational table that matches the primary key column of another table. The foreign key can
be used to cross-reference tables.

In the Foreign Keys tab, just simply click a foreign key field for editing. By using the foreign key toolbar, you can create
new, edit and delete the selected foreign key field.

Button Description
Add Foreign Key Add a foreign key to the table.
Delete Foreign Key Delete the selected foreign key.

Use the Name edit box to enter a name for the new key.

Use the Referenced Schema and Referenced Table drop-down lists to select a foreign schema and table
respectively.

To include field(s)/referenced field(s) to the key, just simply double-click the Fields/Referenced Fields field or click
to open the editor(s) for editing.

The On Delete and On Update drop-down list define the type of the actions to be taken.

No Action The Database Engine raises an error and the delete or update action on the row in the parent table
is rolled back.
Cascade Corresponding rows are deleted from or updated in the referencing table if that row is deleted from

155
 or updated in the parent table.
Set Null All the values that make up the foreign key are set to NULL when the corresponding row in the
parent table is deleted or updated.
Set Default All the values that make up the foreign key are set to their default values when the corresponding
row in the parent table is deleted or updated.

Enable
You can choose whether to enable/disable the foreign key constraint by checking/unchecking the box.

Not For Replication

The constraint is not enforced when replication agents perform insert, update, or delete operations.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Comment
Specify the comment of the foreign key.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Related topic:
Foreign Keys Data Selection

SQL Server Table Uniques

Unique constraints ensure that the data contained in a column or a group of columns is unique with respect to all the
rows in the table.

In the Uniques tab, just simply click an unique field for editing. By using the unique toolbar, you can create new, edit
and delete the selected unique field.

Button Description
Add Unique Add an unique to the table.

Delete Unique Delete the selected unique.

Use the Name edit box to set the unique name.

To set field(s) as unique, just simply double-click the Fields field or click to open the editor for editing.

Clustered
Indicate that a clustered index is created for the unique constraint.

Comment
Specify the comment of the unique.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

156
SQL Server Table Checks

A check a constraint that enforces domain integrity by limiting the possible values that can be entered into a column or
columns.

In the Checks tab, just simply click a check field for editing. By using the check toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected check field.

Button Description
Add Check Add a check to the table.
Delete Check Delete the selected check.

Use the Name edit box to set the check name.

Check
Set the condition for checking, e.g. "field_name1 > 0 AND field_name2 > field_name1" in the Check edit box.

Enable
You can choose whether to enable/disable the check constraint by checking/unchecking the box.

Not For Replication

The constraint is not enforced when replication agents perform insert, update, or delete operations.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Definition
Type in the definition for the check constraint.

Comment
Specify the comment of the check.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

SQL Server Table Triggers

A trigger is a special kind of stored procedure that automatically executes when an event occurs in the database
server.

In the Triggers tab, just simply click a trigger field for editing. By using the trigger toolbar, you can create new, edit and
delete the selected trigger field.

Button Description
Add Trigger Add a trigger to the table.
Delete Trigger Elimine el desencadenador seleccionado.

157
Use the Name edit box to set the trigger name.

Use the Fires drop-down list to define the trigger action time.

AFTER Specify that the DML trigger is fired only when all operations specified in the
triggering SQL statement have executed successfully.
INSTEAD OF Specify that the DML trigger is executed instead of the triggering SQL statement,
therefore, overriding the actions of the triggering statements.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table.

Enable
You can choose whether to enable/disable the trigger constraint by checking/unchecking the box.

The Definition tab defines the statement to execute when the trigger activates. To include your statement, just simply
click to write. If you want to execute multiple statements, use the BEGIN ... END compound statement construct.

Execute As
Specify the security context under which the trigger is executed.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

User
Choose a user that the trigger executes in.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

Encrypted
Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Not For Replication

Indicate that the trigger should not be executed when a replication agent modifies the table that is involved in the
trigger.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

158
With Append
Specify that an additional trigger of an existing type should be added.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Definition Type
Choose the type of definition.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Comment
Specify the comment of the trigger.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

SQL Server Table Options

Table Lock Escalation

Specify the allowed methods of lock escalation for a table.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Identity Seed
The value used for the very first row loaded into the table.

Identity Increment
The incremental value added to the identity value of the previous row loaded.

Current Identity Value

Set the current identity value.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Not For Replication

Values are not incremented in identity columns when replication agents perform inserts.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Change Tracking Enabled

Specify change tracking is enabled for the table.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Track Columns Updated

Specify the Database Engine tracks which change tracked columns were updated.

159
Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

SQL Server Table Storage

On Filegroup

Option Description
Filegroup Choose a filegroup that storing the table.
Text/Image Filegroup Choose a filegroup for storing text, ntext, image, xml, varchar(max),
nvarchar(max), varbinary(max), and CLR user-defined type columns.
File Stream Filegroup Choose a filegroup for FILESTREAM data.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

On Partition Scheme

Option Description
Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme that storing the table.
Partition Column Choose a partition column name.
File Stream Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme for FILESTREAM data.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Data Compression
Specify the data compression option for the specified table, partition number, or range of partitions. Choose the Type
for the partition.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

SQL Server Views

A view can be thought of as either a virtual table or a stored query. Unless a view is indexed, its data is not stored in the
database as a distinct object. What is stored in the database is a SELECT statement. The result set of the SELECT
statement forms the virtual table returned by the view. A user can use this virtual table by referencing the view name in

Transact-SQL statements the same way a table is referenced. Click to open an object list for View.

You can create a view shortcut by right-click a view in the Object List pane and select Create Open View Shortcut
from the pop-up menu. This option is used to provide a convenient way for you to open your view directly without
activating the main Navicat.

Note: SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab.

Button Description
Preview Preview the result of the view.

160
 Explain Show the Query Plan of the view.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.

Note: You can choose to show the Result tab below the editor or in a new tab by selecting View -> Show Result ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

View Builder (Available only in Full Version)

View Builder allows you to build views visually. It allows you to create and edit views without knowledge of SQL. See
Query Builder for details.

Definition

You can edit the view definition as SQL statement (SELECT statement it implements).

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Advanced Properties

Encrypted
Encrypt the entries in sys.syscomments that contain the text of the CREATE VIEW statement.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Schema Bound
Bind the view to the schema of the underlying table or tables.

View Metadata
Specify that the instance of SQL Server will return to the DB-Library, ODBC, and OLE DB APIs the metadata
information about the view, instead of the base table or tables, when browse-mode metadata is being requested for a
query that references the view.

With Check Option

Force all data modification statements executed against the view to follow the criteria set within select_statement.

View Viewer

View Viewer displays the view data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View. See
Table Viewer for details.

SQL Server Functions/Procedures

A user-defined function, which is a Transact-SQL or common language runtime (CLR) routine that accepts parameters,
performs an action, such as a complex calculation, and returns the result of that action as a value. The return value can
either be a scalar (single) value or a table. Click to open an object list for Function.

161
Stored procedures are similar to procedures in other programming languages in that they can:

 Accept input parameters and return multiple values in the form of output parameters to the calling procedure or
batch.
 Contain programming statements that perform operations in the database, including calling other procedures.
 Return a status value to a calling procedure or batch to indicate success or failure (and the reason for failure).

Note: SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab.

Function Wizard

Click the New Function from the object list toolbar. The Function Wizard will pop up and it allows you to create a
procedure/function easily. You are allowed not to show the Function Wizard when create new procedure/function.

1. Specify the Name of the routine and select the type of the routine: Procedure or Function.
2. Define the parameter(s) of the procedure. Set the parameter Name, Type Schema, Type, Default Value,
Output and/or Read Only under corresponding columns.
3. If you create a function, select the Function type from the drop-down list. Then, choose the Schema and the
Return Type from the list if necessary.
4. Set the advanced options:

Option Description
Encryption The database will convert the CREATE statement to an obfuscated format.
Note: SQL Azure does not support.
Recompile Instruct the database not to cache a plan for the procedure.
Note: Available only for procedure.
Schema binding The function is bound to the database objects that it references.
Note: Available only for function.
NULL on NULL Input Indicate the server can return null without invoking the function body.
Note: Available only for function and support from SQL Server 2005 or later.
Execute As Specify the runtime user of the function.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.
For replication Stored procedures created for replication cannot be executed on the Subscriber.
Note: Available only for procedure and SQL Azure does not support.

Hint: Once uncheck the Show wizard next time, you can go to Options to enable it.

Definition

The Code Outline window displays information about the function/procedure including parameter, code body, etc. To
show the Code Outline window, simply choose View -> Code Outline.

Note: Available only in Full Version.

Button Description

162
 Refresh the code outline.
Show the detail view of the code outline.
Turn mouse over highlight on or off.
Expand the selected item.
Collapse the selected item.
Toggle sorting by position.

Hint: To customize the view of the editor and find out more features for sql editing, see Editor Advanced Features.

Result

To run the procedure/function, click Run on the toolbar. If the SQL statement is correct, the statement will be
executed and, if the statement is supposed to return data, the Result tab opens with the data returned by the
procedure/function. If an error occurs while executing the procedure/function, execution stops, the appropriate error
message is displayed. If the function/procedure requires input parameter, the Input Parameters box will pop up.

Hint: Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets.

SQL Server Indexes

An index in a database lets you quickly find specific information in a table or indexed view. An index contains keys built
from one or more columns in the table, or view, and pointers that map to the storage location of the specified data. You
can significantly improve the performance of database queries and applications by creating well-designed indexes to
support your queries. Indexes can reduce the amount of data that must be read to return the query result set. Indexes

can also enforce uniqueness on the rows in a table, ensuring the data integrity of the table data. Click -> Index to
open an object list for Index.

Note: SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab.

You can choose the index Type: Nonclustered, Clustered, XML or Spatial.

Note: XML index is supported from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Spatial index is supported from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure.

General Properties for Nonclustered and Clustered Indexes

Unique
A unique index is one in which no two rows are permitted to have the same index key value.

Table / View
Choose to create a table index or a view index.

Table name or View Name

Select a table or a view.

163
Columns
Select the column or columns on which the index is based and the sorting order.

Included Columns (only for Nonclustered Index)

Select the non-key columns to be added to the leaf level of the nonclustered index.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

Filter Properties for Nonclustered Index

To create a filtered index, specify which rows to include in the index.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later and SQL Azure.

Advanced Properties for Nonclustered and Clustered Indexes

Ignore duplicate key values

A warning message will occur when duplicate key values are inserted into a unique index. Only the rows violating the
uniqueness constraint will fail.

Recompute statistics
Enable automatic statistics updating.

Allow row locks

Row locks are allowed when accessing the index. The Database Engine determines when row locks are used.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Allow page locks

Page locks are allowed when accessing the index. The Database Engine determines when page locks are used.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Fill Factor (%)

Specify a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of each index page during
index creation or rebuild.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Pad Index
The percentage of free space that is specified by fillfactor is applied to the intermediate-level pages of the index.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Sort in tempdb
Specify to store temporary sort results in tempdb.

164
Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Online
Long-term table locks are not held for the duration of the index operation.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

Max. degree of parallelism

Override the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration of the index operation.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Storage Properties for Nonclustered and Clustered Indexes

Note: SQL Azure does not support this tab.

On Filegroup

Option Description
Filegroup Choose a filegroup that storing the index.
File Stream Filegroup Choose a filegroup for FILESTREAM data.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

On Partition Scheme

Option Description
Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme that storing the index.
Partition Column Choose a partition column name.
File Stream Partition Scheme Choose a partition scheme for FILESTREAM data.
Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Data Compression
Specify the data compression option for the specified index, partition number, or range of partitions. Choose the Type
for the patition.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2008 or later.

General Properties for XML Index

Table / View
Must be TABLE.

Table name
Select a table.

165
XML Column
Select the xml column on which the index is based.

XML Index Type

PRIMARY A clustered index is created with the clustered key formed from the clustering key of
the user table and an XML node identifier.
PATH Create a secondary XML index on columns built on path values and node values in
secondary the primary XML index. In the PATH secondary index, the path and node values are
key columns that allow efficient seeks when searching for paths.
VALUE Create a secondary XML index on columns where key columns are (node value and
secondary path) of the primary XML index.
PROPERTY Create a secondary XML index on columns (PK, path and node value) of the primary
secondary XML index where PK is the primary key of the base table.

Primary XML Index

Specify the primary XML index to use in creating a secondary XML index.

Advanced Properties for XML Index

Recompute statistics
Enable automatic statistics updating.

Allow row locks

Row locks are allowed when accessing the index. The Database Engine determines when row locks are used.

Allow page locks

Page locks are allowed when accessing the index. The Database Engine determines when page locks are used.

Fill Factor (%)

Specify a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of each index page during
index creation or rebuild.

Pad Index
The percentage of free space that is specified by fillfactor is applied to the intermediate-level pages of the index.

Sort in tempdb
Specify to store temporary sort results in tempdb.

Max. degree of parallelism

Override the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration of the index operation.

General Properties for Spatial Index

166
Table / View
Must be TABLE.

Table name
Select a table.

Spatial Column
Select a spatial column which the index is based.

Tessellation Scheme
The tessellation scheme for the spatial index.

Min. Coordinates
Specify the x-coordinate (X) and y-coordinate (Y) of the lower-left corner of the bounding box.

Max. Coordinates
Specify the x-coordinate (X) and y-coordinate (Y) of the upper-right corner of the bounding box.

Level 1
Specify the first (top) level grid.

Level 2
Specify the second-level grid.

Level 3
Specify the third-level grid.

Level 4
Specify the fourth-level grid.

Cells Per Object

Specify the number of tessellation cells per object that can be used for a single spatial object in the index by the
tessellation process.

Advanced Properties for Spatial Index

Recompute statistics
Enable automatic statistics updating.

Allow row locks

Row locks are allowed when accessing the index. The Database Engine determines when row locks are used.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Allow page locks

Page locks are allowed when accessing the index. The Database Engine determines when page locks are used.

167
Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Fill Factor (%)

Specify a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of each index page during
index creation or rebuild.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Pad Index
The percentage of free space that is specified by fillfactor is applied to the intermediate-level pages of the index.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Sort in tempdb
Specify to store temporary sort results in tempdb.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Max. degree of parallelism

Override the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration of the index operation.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

SQL Server Synonyms

A synonym is an alternative name for a schema-scoped object. Client applications can use a single-part name to
reference a base object by using a synonym instead of using a two-part, three-part, or four-part name to reference the

base object. Click -> Synonym to open an object list for Synonym.

Note: SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab.

General Properties

Object Linked Server

The name of the server on which base object is located.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Object Database
The name of the database in which the base object is located.

Object Schema
The name of the schema of the base object.

Object Type
The object type.

168
Object
The name of the base object that the synonym references.

SQL Server Triggers

A trigger is a special kind of stored procedure that automatically executes when an event occurs in the database server.
Click -> Trigger to open an object list for Trigger.

See Triggers for details.

Note: SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab.

General Properties

Trigger Type
Choose Table or View on which the DML trigger is executed.

Enable
Check this option to enable the trigger.

Table name or View name

Choose a table or a view.

AFTER
Specify that the DML trigger is fired only when all operations specified in the triggering SQL statement have executed
successfully.

INSTEAD OF
Specify that the DML trigger is executed instead of the triggering SQL statement, therefore, overriding the actions of the
triggering statements.

Insert
The trigger is activated whenever a new row is inserted into the table.

Delete
The trigger is activated whenever a row is deleted from the table.

Update
The trigger is activated whenever a row is modified.

SQL Statement
Specify additional criteria in Definition tab.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

169
Assembly
Specify the method of an assembly to bind with the trigger.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Advanced Properties

Caller
Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the caller of the module.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

Owner
Specify the statements inside the module executes in the context of the current owner of the module.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

Self
Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the specified user is the person creating or
altering the module.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

User
Specify the statements inside the module execute in the context of the user.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.

Encrypted
Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

Not For Replication

Indicate that the trigger should not be executed when a replication agent modifies the table that is involved in the
trigger.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

With Append
Specify that an additional trigger of an existing type should be added.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Definition

170
This tab will appear when the Definition Type is set to SQL Statement in General tab or when connecting to SQL
Azure. Enter valid SQL statements.

SQL Server Backup Devices

During a backup operation on a SQL Server database, the backed up data (the backup) is written to a physical backup
device. This physical backup device is initialized when the first backup in a media set is written to it. The backups on a

set of one or more backup devices compose a single media set. Click -> Backup Device to open an object list for
Backup Device.

General Properties

Name
Enter the name of the backup device.

Type
The type of the backup device: DISK.

Physical name
Specify the physical file name or path of the backup device.

SQL Server Linked Servers

A linked server configuration enables SQL Server to execute commands against OLE DB data sources on remote
servers. Click -> Linked Server to open an object list for Linked Server.

Linked servers offer the following advantages:

 Remote server access.

 The ability to issue distributed queries, updates, commands, and transactions on heterogeneous data sources
across the enterprise.
 The ability to address diverse data sources similarly.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

General Properties

You can choose the Server Type: SQL Server or Other Data Source. If you choose Other Data Source, define the
required information:

Provider
Choose the unique programmatic identifier (PROGID) of the OLE DB provider corresponding to the data source.

Product Name
Define the product name of the OLE DB data source to add as a linked server.

171
Data Source
Define the name of the data source as interpreted by the OLE DB provider.

Provider String
Define the OLE DB provider-specific connection string that identifies a unique data source.

Location
Define the location of the database as interpreted by the OLE DB provider.

Catalog
Define the catalog to be used when making a connection to the OLE DB provider.

Security

In this tab, add or delete a mapping between logins on the local instance of SQL Server and remote logins on the linked
server.

Local Login
Choose a login on the local server.

Impersonate
Check this option to specify that logins use their own credentials to connect to the linked server.

Remote Login
Enter the username used to connect the linked server.

Remote Password
Enter the user password.

Set the action when a login not defined in the list:

 Not be made
 Be made without using a security context
 Be made using the login's current security context
 Be made using the following security context
Set the Remote Login and Password

Advanced Properties

Connect Timeout
Define the time-out value for connecting to a linked server.

Query Timeout
Define the time-out value for queries against a linked server.

172
Data Access
Check this option to enable a linked server for distributed query access.

Collation Compatible
If this option is checked, SQL Server assumes that all characters in the linked server are compatible with the local
server, with regard to character set and collation sequence (or sort order). This enables SQL Server to send
comparisons on character columns to the provider.

Use Remote Collation

If this option is checked, the collation of remote columns is used for SQL Server data sources, and the collation
specified in collation name is used for non-SQL Server data sources.

Collation
Specify the name of the collation used by the remote data source if Use Remote Collation is checked and the data
source is not a SQL Server data source. The name must be one of the collations supported by SQL Server.

Lazy Schema Validation

If this option is checked, skip schema checking of remote tables at the beginning of the query.

Publisher
Check this option to enable publisher.

Subscriber
Check this option to enable subscriber.

Distributor
Check this option to enable distributor.

RPC
Check this option to enable RPC from the given server.

RPC Out
Check this option to enable RPC to the given server.

Promotion of Distributed Transactions for RPC

Use this option to protect the actions of a server-to-server procedure through a Microsoft Distributed Transaction
Coordinator (MS DTC) transaction.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

SQL Server Server Triggers

A server trigger can be a DDL or logon trigger for current server. DDL triggers execute in response to a variety of data
definition language (DDL) events. These events primarily correspond to Transact-SQL CREATE, ALTER, and DROP
statements, and certain system stored procedures that perform DDL-like operations. Logon triggers fire in response to

173
the LOGON event that is raised when a user sessions is being established. Click -> Server Trigger to open an
object list for Server Trigger.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

General Properties

Trigger Type
Choose the trigger type.

Enable
Check this option to enable the trigger.

SQL Statement
Specify additional criteria in Definition tab.

Assembly
Specify the method of an assembly to bind with the trigger.

Events
Check the DDL event from the list.

Advanced Properties

Caller
Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the caller of the module.

Self
Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the specified user is the person creating or
altering the module.

User
Specify the statements inside the module execute in the context of the user.

Encrypted
Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement.

Definition

This tab will appear when the Definition Type is set to SQL Statement in General tab. Enter valid SQL statements.

SQL Server Assemblies

An assembly is a managed application module that contains class metadata and managed code as an object in an
instance of SQL Server. By referencing this module, common language runtime (CLR) functions, stored procedures,

174
triggers, user-defined aggregates, and user-defined types can be created in the database. Click -> Assembly to
open an object list for Assembly.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

General Properties

Owner
Specify the name of a user or role as owner of the assembly.

Permission set
Specify a set of code access permissions that are granted to the assembly when it is accessed by SQL Server. If not
specified, SAFE is applied as the default.

Assembly
Specify the local path or network location where the assembly that is being uploaded is located, and also the manifest
file name that corresponds to the assembly.

Dependent Assemblies
Upload a file to be associated with the assembly, such as source code, debug files or other related information, into the
server and made visible in the sys.assembly_files catalog view.

SQL Server Database Triggers

A database trigger is a DDL trigger to the current database. DDL triggers execute in response to a variety of data
definition language (DDL) events. These events primarily correspond to Transact-SQL CREATE, ALTER, and DROP

statements, and certain system stored procedures that perform DDL-like operations. Click -> Database Trigger to
open an object list for Database Trigger.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later and SQL Azure.
SQL Azure does not support the Comment tab.

General Properties

Trigger Type
Trigger type must be Database Trigger.

Enable
Check this option to enable the trigger.

SQL Statement
Specify additional criteria in Definition tab.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

175
Assembly
Specify the method of an assembly to bind with the trigger.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Events
Check the DDL event from the list.

Advanced Properties

Caller
Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the caller of the module.

Self
Specify the statements inside the module are executed in the context of the specified user is the person creating or
altering the module.

User
Specify the statements inside the module execute in the context of the user.

Encrypted
Obfuscate the text of the CREATE TRIGGER statement.

Note: SQL Azure does not support.

Definition

This tab will appear when the Definition Type is set to SQL Statement in General tab. Enter valid SQL statements.

SQL Server Partition Functions

A partition function is a function in the current database that maps the rows of a table or index into partitions based on
the values of a specified column. Click -> Partition Function to open an object list for Partition Function.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

General Properties

Input Parameter Type

Choose the data type of the column used for partitioning.

Length
Specify the length of the data type if necessary.

Decimals
Specify the decimals of the data type if necessary.

176
Collation
Specify the collation of the data type if necessary.

Boundary values belong to right interval

Specify to the right of each boundary value interval.

Boundary Values
Specify the boundary values for each partition of a partitioned table or index that uses partition_function_name.

SQL Server Partition Schemes

A partition scheme is a scheme in the current database that maps the partitions of a partitioned table or index to
filegroups. The number and domain of the partitions of a partitioned table or index are determined in a partition scheme.

Click -> Partition Scheme to open an object list for Partition Scheme.

Note: Support from SQL Server 2005 or later.

General Properties

Partition Function
Choose the partition function.

Filegroup Mapping
Specify the filegroups to hold the partitions specified by partition_function_name.

SQL Preview

The SQL Preview tab shows the CREATE statement and necessary SQL statements of the database or schema
object.

For some database or schema objects, you can use the below drop-down list to show the SQL which will be run when
pressing Save or Save As button.

Maintain

Navicat provides a complete solution for maintaining databases and their database objects in MySQL, Oracle,
PostgreSQL, SQLite, SQL Server and MariaDB.

To maintain server objects, you can right-click it and select Maintain from the pop-up menu.

Maintain MySQL/MariaDB

Maintain Table

177
Analyze Tables
Analyze and store the key distribution for the table. During the analysis, the table is locked with a read lock for MyISAM
and BDB. For InnoDB the table is locked with a write lock. Currently, MySQL supports analyzing only for MyISAM, BDB,
and InnoDB tables.

Check Tables
Check a table or tables for errors. Currently, MySQL supports checking only for MyISAM, InnoDB and ARCHIVE tables.
For MyISAM tables, the key statistics are updated as well.

Normal Run the CHECK TABLE statement without an extra option.

Quick Don't scan the rows to check for wrong links.
Fast Check only tables that have not been closed properly.
Changed Only check tables which have been changed since last check or haven't been closed properly.
Extended Do a full key lookup for all keys for each row. This ensures that the table is 100 % consistent,
but will take a long time.

Optimize Tables
The main reason for optimizing your table is to reclaim unused space and to defragment the data file. You should
optimize a table if you have deleted a large part of a table or if you have made many changes to a table with
variable-length rows (tables that have VARCHAR, BLOB, or TEXT columns). Deleted records are maintained in a
linked list and subsequent INSERT operations reuse old row positions. Currently, MySQL supports optimizing only for
MyISAM, InnoDB and BDB tables.

Repair Tables
Repair a possibly corrupted table and returns a result set.

Quick Repair Table tries to repair only the index tree.

Extended MySQL creates the index row by row instead of creating one index at a time with sorting.

Get Rows Count

Count the number of rows in the table.

Maintain Oracle

Maintain Table

Enable Table Lock

Choose Enable Table Lock to enable table locks, thereby allowing DDL operations on the table. All currently executing
transactions must commit or roll back before Oracle Database enables the table lock.

Disable Table Lock

Choose Disable Table Lock to disable table locks, thereby preventing DDL operations on the table.

178
Enable Row Movement
Choose Enable Row Movement to allow the database to move a row, thus changing the rowid.

Disable Row Movement

Choose Disable Row Movement if you want to prevent the database from moving a row, thus preventing a change of
rowid.

Shrink Space
Shrink Space is to compact the table segment. This clause is valid only for segments in tablespaces with automatic
segment management. By default, Oracle database compacts the segment, adjusts the high water mark, and releases
the recuperated space immediately.

Compacting the segment requires row movement. Therefore, you must enable row movement for the table you want to
shrink before shrink space. Further, if your application has any rowid-based triggers, you should disable them before
issuing this clause.

Move
Move relocates data of a nonpartitioned table or of a partition of a partitioned table into a new segment, optionally in a
different tablespace, and optionally modify any of its storage attributes.

Collect Statistics
Collect Statistics analyzes the contents of tables. When you analyze a table, the database collects statistics about
expressions occurring in any function-based indexes as well. Therefore, be sure to create function-based indexes on
the table before analyzing the table.

Validate Structure
Validate Structure verifies the integrity of the structure of a table. The statistics collected by this clause are not used by
the Oracle database optimizer. If the structure is valid, no error is returned. However, if the structure is corrupt, an error
message will be shown.

For a table, Oracle database verifies the integrity of each of the data blocks and rows.

Maintain View

Compile
To recompile the view specification or body.

Maintain Function/Procedure

Compile
To recompile the function/procedure specification or body.

Compile for Debug

To recompile the function/procedure specification or body and instruct the PL/SQL compiler to generate and store the
code for use by the PL/SQL debugger.

179
Maintain Index

Rebuild
To re-create an existing index or one of its partitions or subpartitions. If the index is marked unusable, then a successful
rebuild will mark it usable.

Make Unusable
To make the index unusable. An unusable index must be rebuilt, or dropped and re-created, before it can be used.

Coalesce
To instruct Oracle database to merge the contents of index blocks where possible to free blocks for reuse.

Compute Statistics
To compute the statistics of the index.

Monitoring Usage
To begin monitoring the index. Oracle Database first clears existing information on index use, and then monitors the
index for use until choosing No Monitoring Usage.

No Monitoring Usage
To terminate monitoring of the index.

Maintain Java

Compile or Resolve
To resolve the primary Java class schema object.

Set AuthID Current User

Set the invoker rights to AUTHID CURRENT_USER.

Set AuthID Definer

Set the invoker rights to AUTHID DEFINER.

Maintain Materialized View

Enable Row Movement

To enable row movement.

Shrink
To compact the materialized view segment. By default, Oracle database compacts the segment, adjusts the high water
mark, and releases the recuperated space immediately.

Compile
To explicitly revalidate a materialized view. If an object upon which the materialized view depends is dropped or altered,
then the materialized view remains accessible, but it is invalid for query rewrite. You can choose this option to explicitly
revalidate the materialized view to make it eligible for query rewrite.
180
Force Refresh
To perform a refresh.

Maintain Materialized View Log

Enable Row Movement

To enable row movement. Row movement indicates that rowids will change after the flashback occurs.

Disable Row Movement

To disable row movement.

Shrink Space
To compact the materialized view log segments. By default, Oracle database compacts the segment, adjusts the high
water mark, and releases the recuperated space immediately.

Maintain Package

Compile
To recompile the package specification or body.

Compile Debug
To recompile the package specification or body and instruct the PL/SQL compiler to generate and store the code for
use by the PL/SQL debugger.

Maintain Trigger

Enable
To enable the trigger.

Disable
To disable the trigger.

Compile
To explicitly compile the trigger, whether it is valid or invalid. Explicit recompilation eliminates the need for implicit
run-time recompilation and prevents associated run-time compilation errors and performance overhead.

Compile for Debug

To recompile the trigger and instruct the PL/SQL compiler to generate and store the code for use by the PL/SQL
debugger.

Maintain Type

Compile
To compile the type specification and body.

181
Compile Debug
To recompile the type specification or body and instruct the PL/SQL compiler to generate and store the code for use by
the PL/SQL debugger.

Maintain XML Schema

Compile
To re-compile an already registered XML schema. This is useful for bringing a schema in an invalid state to a valid
state.

Purge
To remove the XML Schema completely from Oracle XML DB in Oracle 11g.

Maintain Tablespace

Read Only
To place the tablespace in transition read-only mode. In this state, existing transactions can complete (commit or roll
back), but no further DML operations are allowed to the tablespace except for rollback of existing transactions that
previously modified blocks in the tablespace.

Read Write
To indicate that write operations are allowed on a previously read-only tablespace.

Online
To take the tablespace online.

Offline
To take the tablespace offline.

Normal To flush all blocks in all datafiles in the tablespace out of the system global area (SGA).
Temporary Oracle database performs a checkpoint for all online datafiles in the tablespace but does not
ensure that all files can be written.
Immediate Oracle database does not ensure that tablespace files are available and does not perform a
checkpoint.

Coalesce
To combine all contiguous free extents into larger contiguous extents for each datafile in the tablespace.

Shrink Space
To reduce the amount of space the tablespace is taking. This is valid only for temporary tablespaces in Oracle 11g.

Maintain User

Expire Password
To set password of user account will expire.

182
Lock Account
To lock user account.

Unlock Account
To unlock user account.

Maintain PostgreSQL

Maintain Database, Table and Materialized View

Analyze Database, Analyze Tables and Analyze Materialized Views

Collect statistics about the contents of tables in the database, and stores the results in the system table pg_statistic.
Subsequently, the query planner uses these statistics to help determine the most efficient execution plans for queries.
Analyze Database examines every table in the current database.

When VERBOSE is specified, ANALYZE emits progress messages to indicate which table is currently being processed.
Various statistics about the tables are printed as well. It is enabled in Navicat by default.

Vacuum Database, Vacuum Tables and Vacuum Materialized Views

Reclaim storage occupied by deleted tuples. In normal PostgreSQL operation, tuples that are
deleted or obsoleted by an update are not physically removed from their table; they remain present
until a Vacuum is done. Therefore it's necessary to do Vacuum periodically, especially on
frequently-updated tables. Vacuum Database examines every table in the current database.

When VERBOSE is specified, VACUUM emits progress messages to indicate which table is currently being processed.
Various statistics about the tables are printed as well. It is enabled in Navicat by default.

Vacuum Run the VACUUM VERBOSE statement without extra options.

Vacuum Analyze Update statistics used by the planner to determine the most efficient way to execute a
query.
Vacuum Full Select "full" vacuum, which may reclaim more space, but takes much longer and exclusively
locks the table.
Vacuum Full Select "full" vacuum, which may reclaim more space, but takes much longer and exclusively
Analyze locks the table. Update statistics used by the planner to determine the most efficient way to
execute a query.
Vacuum Freeze Select aggressive "freezing" of tuples.
Vacuum Freeze Select aggressive "freezing" of tuples. Update statistics used by the planner to determine
Analyze the most efficient way to execute a query.

Reindex Database, Reindex Tables and Reindex Materialized Views

Rebuild an index using the data stored in the index's table, replacing the old copy of the index. There are several
scenarios in which to use Reindex:

 An index has become corrupted, and no longer contains valid data.

183
  An index has become "bloated", that it is contains many empty or nearly-empty pages.
 You have altered a storage parameter (such as fill factor) for an index, and wish to ensure that the change has
taken full effect.
 An index build with the CONCURRENTLY option failed, leaving an "invalid" index.

Maintain SQLite

Maintain Database and Table

Analyze Database and Analyze Tables

Gather statistics about tables and indexes and stores the collected information in internal tables of the database where
the query optimizer can access the information and use it to help make better query planning choices.

Vacuum Database
Rebuild the entire database. VACUUM only works on the main database. It is not possible to VACUUM an attached
database file.

Reindex Database and Reindex Tables

Delete and recreate all indexes in database or attached to the tables from scratch. This is useful when the definition of
a collation sequence has changed.

Maintain Index

Reindex
Delete and recreate the index from scratch. This is useful when the definition of a collation sequence has changed.

Maintain SQL Server

Maintain Assembly

Set Visible
To show the assembly.

Set Invisible
To hide the assembly.

Maintain Index

Rebuild
To rebuild and enable the index.

Reorganizar
To reorganize the enabled index.

184
Disable
To disable the index.

Maintain Trigger

Enable
To enable the server trigger, database trigger or trigger.

Disable
To disable the server trigger, database trigger or trigger.

Maintain Login

Enable
To enable the login.

Disable
To disable the login.

185
Table Viewer
Table Viewer displays the table data as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid View and Form View.

The toolbars of Table Viewer provides the following functions for managing data:

 Begin Transaction/Commit/Rollback
Click Begin Transaction to start a transaction. To make permanent all changes performed in the
transaction, click Commit. Or, click Rollback to undo work done in the current transaction.
Hint: The Commit and Rollback buttons are available only when Auto Begin Transaction is enabled under
Options or after clicking the Begin Transaction button.

 Edit TEXT/BLOB/BFile
Allow you to view and edit the content of TEXT, BLOB and BFile fields.
Note: Only Oracle supports BFile.

 Filter Data
Allow you to filter records by creating and applying filter criteria for the data grid.

 Sort Records
Sort Records by custom order of multi fields.

 Import Data
Import data from files.

 Export Data
Export data to files.

Grid View

The Grid View allows you to view, update, insert, or delete data in a table. The pop-up menu of the grid provides
the following additional functions: set the field value as Null/Empty String, use current field value as a filter, format grid
view, and more.

Using Navigation Bar

Table Viewer provides a convenient way to navigate among the records/pages using Record/Page Navigation Bar
buttons. All buttons are used to navigate left and right to the previous or the next records/pages.

Record Navigation Bar

186
 Button Description
New record: enter a new record. At any point when you are working with your table in the
grid view, click on this button to get a blank display for a record.
Delete record: delete an existing record.
Apply changes: apply the changes.
Cancel changes: remove all edits made to the current record.
Actualizar: actualizar la tabla.
Stop: stop when loading enormous data from server.

Extra Record Navigation Bar Button for Form View

Button Description
First Record: move to the first record.
Previous Record: move one record back (if there is one) from the current record.
Next Record: move one record ahead.
Last Record: move to the last record.

Note: The SQL statement shows under the Record Navigation Bar indicates any statement has just been executed.

Page Navigation Bar

Button Description
First Page: move to first page.
Previous Page: move to previous page.
Next Page: move to next page.
Last Page: move to last page.
Limit Record Setting: set number of records showing on each page.
Grid View: switch to grid view.
Form View: switch to form view.

Use the Limit Record Setting button to enter to the edit mode.

Limit Records records per page

Check this option if you want to limit the number of records showed on each page. Otherwise, all records will be
displayed in one single page. And, set the records per page value in the edit field. The number representing the
number of records showed per page.

Note: This setting mode will take effect on current table only. To adjust the global settings, see Options.

Record a of b in page c
The Record/Page Indicator displays the numbers representing the selected record and page.

187
a. the selected record.
b. number of records in the current page.
c. the current page.

Editing Records

The navigation bar allows you to switch the records quickly, insert, update or delete records. View data as a grid is
most helpful for entering new records and editing old records in a table.

To add a record

1. Make sure that your cursor is situated in the first blank cell on the table, then enter the desired data. If you are
adding the new record into an existing table, just simply click on an existing record and click the from the
navigation bar or press CTRL+N to get a blank display for a record.

2. Watch the graphics symbol in the record selectors box just to the left of your record. It will change from the ,
which indicates that it is the current record, to , which indicates that you are editing this record.
3. Just simply move to another record to save the record or click the from the navigation bar.

To edit a record

1. Select the record that you wish to edit by clicking in the specific field you want to change.
2. Type in the new data for that field.
3. Just simply move to another record, the new data will overwrite the previous data or click the from the
navigation bar.

Note: Close the table is another way to save the records.

To edit multiple cells with same data

1. Select a block of cells in the data grid.

2. Type in the new data.

Note: Changes will apply to multiple fields with compatible data type.

To delete a record

1. Select the record that you wish to delete.

2. Just simply right-click and select Delete Record or click the from the navigation bar.

Edit Records with Special Handling

To set Empty String for the cell, right-click the selected cell and select Set to Empty String.

To set Null value for the cell, right-click the selected cell and select Set to NULL.

To edit the text field record, just simply click Show Memo In Grid from the View menu.
188
Note: Available only for MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL and MariaDB.

Hint: To view/edit the text field record in an ease way, see Memo Editor.

To view images in the grid, just simply click Show Image In Grid from the View menu.

Note: Available only for MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQL Server and MariaDB.

Hint: To view/edit the image in an ease way, see Image Editor.

To edit a Date/Time record, just simply click or press CTRL+ENTER to open the editor for editing. Choose/enter
the desired data. The editor used in cell is determined by the field type assigned to the column.

Note: Available only for MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQL Server and MariaDB.

Date Time DateTime/Timestamp

To edit an Enum record, just simply choose the record from the drop-down list.

Note: Available only for MySQL, PostgreSQL and MariaDB.

To edit a Set record, just simply click or press CTRL+ENTER to open the editor for editing. Select the record(s)
from the list. To remove the records, uncheck them in the same way.

Note: Available only for MySQL and MariaDB.

189
To view BFile content, just simply enable Preview BFile under the View menu.

Note: Available only for Oracle.

To generate UUID/GUID, right-click the selected cell and select Generate UUID.

Note: Available only for PostgreSQL and SQL Server.

Edit Records with Foreign Key (Foreign Key Data Selection - Available only in Full Version)

Foreign Key Data Selection is a useful tool for letting you to get the available value from the reference table in an
easy way. It allows you to show additional record(s) from the reference table and search for a particular record(s).

To include data to the record, just simply click or press CTRL+ENTER to open the editor for editing.

Just simply double-click to select the desired data.

Hint:By default, the number of records showed per page is 100. To show all records, right-click anywhere on the grid
and select Show All. To adjust the global settings, see Options.
To refresh the record, right-click anywhere on the grid and select Refresh or press F5.

Click to open a panel on the left for showing a list of column name(s). Just simply click to show the additional
column. To remove the column(s), uncheck them in the same way.

190
Hint:To set column in ascending or descending mode, right-click anywhere on the column and select Sort -> Sort
Ascending / Sort Descending.
To find for the text in the editor window, right-click anywhere on the grid and select Find or press CTRL+F.

Enter a value into the edit box and click to filter for the particular record(s).

Hint: To remove the filter results, right-click anywhere on the grid and select Show All.

Copy Data from Navicat

Data that being copied from Navicat goes into the windows clipboard with the fields delimited by tabs and the records
delimited by carriage returns. It allows you to easily paste the clipboard contents into any application you want.
Spreadsheet applications in general will notice the tab character between the fields and will neatly separate the
clipboard data into rows and columns.

To select data using Keyboard Shortcuts

CTRL+A Toggles the selection of all rows and columns in a data grid.
SHIFT+ARROW Toggle the selection of cells as you move up/down/left/right in the data grid.

To select data using Mouse Actions

 Select the desired records by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on each row.
 Select a block of cells.

Note: After you have selected the desired records, just simply press CTRL+C or right-click and select the Copy
from the pop-up menu.

191
Paste Data into Navicat

Data is copied into the clipboard will be arranged as below format:

 Data is arranged into rows and column.

 Rows and columns are delimited by carriage returns/tab respectively.
 Columns in the clipboard have the same sequence as the columns in the data grid you have selected.

When pasting data into Navicat, you can replace the contents of current records and append the clipboard data into the
table. To replace the contents of current records in a table, you must select the cells in the data grid whose contents
must be replaced by the data in the clipboard. Just simply press CTRL+V or right-click and select the Paste from
the pop-up menu. Navicat will paste all the content in the clipboard into the selected cell. The paste action cannot be
undone if you do not enable transaction.

Copy Records as Insert/Update Statements

To copy records as Insert/Update statement, select the records and click Edit -> Copy As -> Insert Statement or
Update Statement from the menu. Then, you can paste the statements in any editor.

Copy Field Name

To copy field names as tab separated values, select the columns/data and choose Edit -> Copy As -> Tab Separated
Values (Field Name only) from the menu. If you want to copy data only or both field names and data, you can choose
Tab Separated Values (Data only) or Tab Separated Values (Field Name and Data) respectively.

Save Data as a File

You can save the data in the table grid to a file. Simply right-click a cell and choose Save Data As. Enter the file name
and file extension in the Save As dialog.

Note: Not available when multiple selection.

Sorting/Finding/Replacing Records

Sorting Records

Server stores records in the order they were added to the table. Sorting in Navicat is used to temporarily rearrange
records, so that you can view or update them in a different sequence.

Move over the column caption whose contents you want to sort by, click the right side of the column and select the Sort
Ascending, Sort Descending or Remove Sort.

192
To sort by custom order of multi fields, click the Sort from the toolbar.

Finding Records

The Find bar is provided for quick searching for the text in the editor window. Just simply click Edit -> Find from
the menu or press CTRL+F. Then, choose Find Data and enter a search string.

The search starts at the cursor's current position to the end of the file. There will not have differentiates when
performing a uppercase or lowercase search.

To find for the next text, just simply click Next or press F3.

Replacing Records

To open the Replace bar, simply check the Replace box and enter the text you want to search and replace.

Click Replace or Replace All button to replace the first occurrence or all occurrences automatically.

If you clicked Replace All button, you can click Apply button to apply the changes or Cancel button to cancel the
changes.

Finding Columns

To search a column, just simply click Edit -> Find from the menu or press CTRL+F. Then, choose Find Column
and enter a search string.

193
Filtering Records

Use either of the following methods to filter the data in the grid:

 Right-click a field and select the Filter from the pop-up menu to filter records by the current value of the
selected column.

 The Custom Filter Dialog is provided for quick building a simple filter. Just simply right-click a field and select
the Filter -> Custom Filter from the pop-up menu. Use character '_' to represent any single symbol in the
condition and use character '%' to represent any series of symbols in the condition.

 You can also customize your filter in a more complicated way by right-click a field and selecting the Filter ->
Filter from the pop-up menu or clicking the Filter from the toolbar. The Filter Wizard becomes
visible at the top of grid, where you can see the active filtering condition and easily enable or disable it by
clicking a
check box at the left.

Manipulating Raw Data

Navicat normally recognize what user has input in grid as normal string, any special characters or functions would be
processed as plain text (that is, its functionality would be skipped).

Editing data in Raw Mode provides an ease and direct method to apply server built-in function. To access the Raw
Mode function, just simply select View -> Raw Mode from the menu.

Note: Available only for MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite, SQL Server and MariaDB.

194
Formatting Table Grid

Use the following methods to format the table grid:

Move Columns

1. Click on the column header and hold down the left mouse button.
2. Move the pointer until a double black line appears in the desired location.
3. Release the mouse and the column will move.

Freeze Selected Column

If there are many columns in the table and you want to freeze one or more columns to identify the record. Just simply
right-click the column you want to freeze and select Display -> Freeze Selected Column or select View -> Freeze
Selected Column from the menu.

The frozen column(s) will move to the leftmost position in the table grid. This action will locks the frozen column(s),
preventing them from being edited.

To unfreeze the columns, just simply right-click anywhere on the table grid and select Display -> Unfreeze Columns
or select View -> Unfreeze Columns from the menu.

Set Display Format

The Set Display Format Dialog is provided for you to customize format applied to exported data on the selected
column. Just simply right-click the column you want to edit its format and select Display -> Set Display Format or
select View -> Set Display Format from the menu. Edit the format style to adjust the result format in the way you need.
For example: dd-mm-yyyy.

Hint: This action applies on the selected column only. To adjust the global settings, see Options.

Set Column Width

Click right border at top of column and drag either left or right.

Double-click right border at top of column to obtain the best fit for the column.

Right-click the column you want to set the column width with and select Display -> Set Column Width or select View
-> Set Column Width from the menu. Specify width in the Set Column Width Dialog. The default value is 120.

Hint: The result only applies on the selected column. To adjust the global settings, see Options.
195
Set Row Height

Right-click anywhere on the table grid and select Display -> Set Row Height or select View -> Set Row Height from
the menu. Specify row height in the Set Row Height Dialog. The default value is 17.

Hint: This action applies on the current table grid only. To adjust the global settings, see Options.

Show/Hide Columns

If there are many columns in the table and you want to hide some of them from the table grid. Just simply right-click
anywhere on the table grid and select Display -> Show/Hide Columns or select View -> Show/Hide Columns from
the menu. Select the columns that you would like to hide.

The hidden column(s) will disappear from the table grid.

To unhide the columns, just simply right-click anywhere on the table grid and select Display -> Show/Hide Columns
or select View -> Show/Hide Columns from the menu. Select the columns that you would like to redisplay.

Show/Hide ROWID

If you want to display or hide the rowid (address) of every row, right-click anywhere on the table grid and select Display
-> Show/Hide ROWID or select View -> Show/Hide ROWID from the menu.

The column ROWID will be showed in the last column.

Note: Available only for Oracle and SQLite.

Form View (Available only in Full Version)

The Form View allows you to view, update, insert, or delete data as a form, which the current record is displayed:
field name and its value. The pop-up menu of the form provides the following additional functions: set the field value as
Null/Empty String, use current field value as a filter, format form view, and more.

The navigation bar allows you to switch the records quickly, insert, update or delete records.

Related topic:
Sorting/Finding/Replacing Records
Filtering Records
Manipulating Raw Data
Formatting Table Grid

196
Assistant Editors

Navicat provides Memo/Hex/Image/Web/Dynamic Column pane to view and edit TEXT/BLOB/BFile fields content. The
editor allows you to view, update, insert, or delete data in a table. Click Memo, Hex, Image, Web
and Dynamic Column from the toolbar to activate the appropriate viewer/editor.

Note: Oracle BFile fields cannot be edited.

The Memo pane allows you to edit data as a simple text. To change the syntax highlight, simply right-click the empty
space and choose Language. Use the button on the navigation bar to update the changed records to the table.

The Hex pane allows you to edit data in hexadecimal mode. Use the button on the navigation bar to update the
changed records to the table.

Note: Use the INSERT key on the keyboard to switch between Insert and Overwrite modes.

The Image pane allows you to show data as image. Use the Load, Save to disk and Clear button to
load/remove the image from a file, or save the image to a file.

The Web pane allows you to show data with HTML codes as in a web browser.

The Dynamic Column pane allows you to edit data as dynamic column in MariaDB. Use the and buttons on
the left to add and delete values.

Filter Wizard

Filter Wizard allows you to facilitate creating and applying filter criteria that you specify for the table grid. Moreover, it
allows you to save filter criteria as a profile for future use. Click Filter from the toolbar to activate the editor.

197
1. To add a new condition to the criteria, just simply click <Add>.
2. Click on the column box (next to the checkbox) and choose a table column. You can choose [Additional Filter]
from the list to enter the condition manually.
3. Click on the operator box (next to the column box) and choose a filter operator.

Filter Operator Result

is equal to <?> My_Field = 'your_value'
is not equal to <?> My_Field <> 'your_value'
is less than <?> My_Field < 'your_value'
is less than or equal to <?> My_Field <= 'your_value'
is greater than <?> My_Field > 'your_value'
is greater than or equal to <?> My_Field >= 'your_value'
contains <?> My_Field LIKE '%your_value%'
contains (case insensitive) <?> My_Field ILIKE '%your_value%'
Note: Available only for PostgreSQL.
does not contain <?> My_Field NOT LIKE '%your_value%'
does not contain (case insensitive) <?> My_Field NOT ILIKE '%your_value%'
Note: Available only for PostgreSQL.
begin with <?> My_Field LIKE 'your_value%'
end with <?> My_Field LIKE '%your_value'
is null My_Field IS NULL
is not null My_Field IS NOT NULL
is empty My_Field = ''
is not empty My_Field <> ''
is between <?> <?> ((My_Field >= your_value1) AND (My_Field <=

198
 your_value2))
is not between <?> <?> NOT ((My_Field >= your_value1) AND (My_Field <=
your_value2))
is in list <?> My_Field IN ('aaa','bbb',...)
is not in list <?> My_Field NOT IN ('aaa','bbb',...)

4. Click on the criteria values box (next to the operator box) to activate the appropriate editor and enter the criteria
values. The editor used in criteria values box is determined by the editor type assigned to the corresponding
column.
5. Click on the logical operator box (next to the criteria values box) and choose and or or.
6. Repita el paso 1-5 para agregar otro nuevo condición.
7. Clic<Apply (ctrl+r)=""></Apply>o presione Ctrl + R para ver el resultado del filtrado que hecho.

Pista: Para establecer el filtro compuesto, simplemente haga clic con el botón derecho en una condición seleccionada y elija
Guión o Sangría.

You are allowed to save filter criteria to and load them from the profiles for future use. Just simply right-click on the
Filter Wizard and select Open Profile, Save Profile, Save As or Delete Profile.

199
Query
A query is used to extract data from the database in a readable format according to the user's request. Navicat provides
two powerful tools for working with the SQL queries: Query Editor for editing the query text directly and Query Builder
for building queries visually. You can save your queries for setting schedule. Click to open an object list for Query.
Or, you can simply click button in the main window to open the Query Builder or the Query Editor.

To open a query using an external editor, right-click it and choose Open with External Editor. You can set the file path
of an external editor in Options.

Hint: Queries(.sql) are saved under the Settings Location. To open the folder, right-click the query and choose Open
Containing Folder. If the connection is synchronized to Navicat Cloud, queries are stored in the Cloud.

Button Description
Run Execute the query: Run, Run Selected or Run a statement from here.
Stop Stop the query.
Explain Show the Query Plan of the query.
Beautify SQL Format the codes with the Beautify SQL settings in Editor.
Export Result Export the result of the query.

Query Builder (Available only in Full Version)

Navicat provides a useful tool called Query Builder for building queries visually. It allows you to create and edit queries
without knowledge of SQL. The database objects are displayed in left pane. Whereas in the right pane, it is divided into
two portions: the upper Diagram Design pane, and the lower Syntax pane.

Note: Query Builder supports SELECT statement only. Use Query Editor for creating complex queries.

Drag a table or a view from the left pane to the Diagram Design pane or double-click it to add it to query. To include a
field in the query, check the left of the field name in the Diagram Design pane. To include all the fields, click at the left of
the object caption.

To remove the object from the Diagram Design pane, click the cross button at the object caption.

To add the table/view alias, simply double-click the table/view name and enter the alias in the Diagram Design pane.

Hint: You are also allowed to set criteria by right-click any fields from the Diagram Design pane.

200
Setting Field Association

To associate database objects by two fields, just drag one field from the object to another and a line will appear
between the linked fields.

Hint: To delete all the links of some object, click button '-' next to the object alias.

Go to the Syntax pane to change the association between the links, click the operator and choose the properties item
from the pop-up menu. You can change the association condition by choosing it from the list (=, <>, <, <=, >, >=). Click
OK to confirm the changes you made. Also you can change the type of Join.

Setting Output Fields

The fields you have selected in the Diagram Design pane will be displayed in the Syntax pane which allows you to set
their displaying order and modify the output fields of the query using <Distinct>, <func> and <Alias>.

<Distinct>
Enable this option if you wish the repeated records are not included into the query result.

<func>
Set the aggregate functions (SUM, MAN, MIX, AVG, COUNT) for each field.

<Alias>
Change the output query field name.

Setting Criteria
201
To add a condition, click the <--> = <--> from the WHERE clause in the Syntax pane. Click <--> to choose the field from
the list of all the table fields, available in the query. To define your own criteria, type your values directly in the Edit Tab.
Clicking = to set condition operator.

Setting Grouping Criteria

You can set the conditions for grouping query records from the GROUP BY clause in the Syntax pane. They are set in
the same way as setting criteria. The conditions will be included into the HAVING statement of the current query.

Setting Sorting Criteria

When you query your database/schema, you can sort the results by any field in an ascending or descending order by
just adding ORDER BY at the end of your query.

In Query Builder, you can set the way of sorting query records from the ORDER BY clause in the Syntax pane. To
change the sorting direction, click on either ASC or DESC.

Setting Limit Criteria

LIMIT clause is used to limit your query results to those that fall within a specified range. You can use it to show the first
X number of results, or to show a range from X - Y results. It is phrased as Limit X, Y and included at the end of your
query. X is the starting point (remember the first record is 0) and Y is the duration (how many records to display).

Note: Available only for MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and MariaDB.

Query Editor

Navicat provides a useful tool called Query Editor for creating and executing queries. It allows you to create and edit
SQL text for a query, prepare and execute selected queries.

Hint: Query text will be automatically generated while you build in Query Builder.

You are allowed to run selected portion of query, just simply right-click the highlighted query and select Run Selected.

You can define multiple SQL statements in one Editor window, and the editor let you run the current statement your
cursor is on (place your cursor in the front of the desired statement). Just simply select Run a statement from here or
press F7.

Note: Select Run a statement from here or press F7, the next statement will continue to run.

Editor Advanced Features

Navicat provides a wide range advanced features, such as compelling code editing capabilities, smart code-completion,
sql formatting, and more.

202
SQL Formatting

To change the SQL statement format, simply choose from the Format menu -

Indent
Increase/decrease indent for the selected lines of codes.

Comment
Comment/uncomment the selected lines of codes.

Convert Case
Format the selected codes into upper/lower case.

Beautify SQL (Available only in Full Version)

Format the selected codes with the Beautify SQL settings.

Beautify SQL With (Available only in Full Version)

Change the Beautify SQL settings.

Option Description
Use tab character Check this option to use tab character.
Tab size Set the tab size.
Short brace length Set the length of the short brace.
Upper case keywords Format all the SQL keywords to upper case.
Save settings Save the SQL beautify options settings after you click Beautify button.

Minify SQL (Available only in Full Version)

Minify the format of the SQL in the SQL Editor.

Code-Completion (Available only in Full Version)

Code-completion in Navicat displays information in drop-down lists as you type your SQL statement in the editor, it
assists you with statement completion and the available properties of database objects, for example databases, tables,
fields, views etc with their appropriate icons.

To activate the code-completion, just simply press '.' for the available properties of database object currently in the
scope.

203
Hint: You may invoke code-completion by typing two characters or pressing CTRL+SPACE on your keyboard for SQL
keywords.

Hint: Smart code-completion will pop up a list of variants for the word completion automatically.

Note: Code-completion can be also applied on View, Functions/Procedures, etc.

Related topic:
Code Insight Options

Code Folding

Code folding feature enables you to collapse blocks of code such that only the first line of the block appears in Editor.

A block of code that can be folded is indicated by an icon to the left of the first line of the block. A vertical line
extends from the icon to the bottom of the foldable code. In contrast, a folded block of code is indicated by an icon
to left of the code block. You can fold the block by clicking or expand it by clicking in Editor.

Brace Highlight

Navicat supports to highlight the matching brace in the editor, i.e. ().

Note: The cursor must be on a brace to show the highlight.

Find and Replace

Find

The Find Dialog is provided for quick searching for the text in the editor window. Just simply click Edit -> Find from the
menu or press CTRL+F and enter a search string.

204
The search starts at the cursor's current position to the end of the file. There will not have differentiates when
performing a uppercase or lowercase search.

To find for the next text, just simply click Next or press F3.

Replace

To open the Replace Dialog, simply check the Replace box and enter the text you want to search and replace.

Click Replace button to replace the first occurrence.

Click Replace All button to replace all occurrences automatically.

There are some additional Options for Find and Replace:

Copy with Quotes

To copy the SQL statement with quotes, just simply right-click the highlighted SQL. Then, select Copy with quotes
and choose the format.

Note: Only available in Query, View and Materialized View.

Zoom In/Zoom Out

Navicat has the ability to zoom in or zoom out the SQL in the editor. The zooming options are available from the View
menu. The same effect can be achieved with keyboard shortcuts.

 Zoom In: [CTRL+=]

 Zoom Out: [CTRL+-]

205
  Reset: [CTRL+0]

Hint: Range from -10 to +20.

Note: Files are opened in different tabs will not be effected by the zoom.

Query Results

To run the query, click Run on the toolbar. If the query statement is correct, the query executes and, if the query
statement is supposed to return data, the Result tab opens with the data returned by the query. If an error occurs while
executing the query, execution stops, the appropriate error message is displayed.

The Result tab displays the result data, returned by the query, as a grid. Data can be displayed in two modes: Grid
View and Form View. See Table Viewer for details.

Hint: Navicat supports to return 10 resultsets.

Nota: Puede elegir mostrar la ficha resultado debajo del editor o en una ficha nueva seleccionando Vista -> Mostrar
resultado ->
Below Query Editor or In a New Tab.

Naming Result Tab

To name the result tab, simply add -- NAME:tab_name or /*NAME:tab_name*/ before each SELECT statement in the
Query Editor.

Example:

-- NAME:Q1
SELECT * from table1;
/*NAME:Q2*/
SELECT * from table2;

Query Profile and Status (Available only for MySQL and MariaDB)

To show the profile and status when running the query, simply choose View -> Show Profile and Status and click
Run on the toolbar.

The Profile tab displays the query profile: Table lock, System lock, Statistic, etc.

Note:For MySQL 5.0, support from 5.0.37 or above.

For MySQL 5.1, support from 5.1.24 or above.

The Status tab displays the query status: Bytes received, Bytes sent, etc.

206
Query Parameters

Query Builder and Query Editor both support using of parameters inside the query text. You can set query parameters
to add variable values to a query each time you run it. The parameter should appear as an identifier with $ at its
beginning, quote with [ ], e.g. [$any_name].

Execute the query and the Input Parameter Dialog is provided for you to enter the desired data you wish to search.

Debugging Oracle Query (Available only in Full Version)

To debug the Oracle query click Debug on the toolbar to launch the Oracle Debugger.

Enter the parameter(s) if the query has input parameter(s).

207
Model (Available only in Navicat Premium and
Enterprise Version)
Model is a powerful tool for creating and manipulating physical database models. Click to open an object list for
Model. Some of key features are listed here:

 Create and manipulate a physical model graphically.

 Reverse engineer a database/schema, table(s) or view(s) to a physical model.
 Forward engineer a physical model to a sql file or database/schema.
 Create and edit table structures directly.

To create a model, click New Model from the object list toolbar. The New Model window will pop up for you to
select the target Database and Version.

Hint: Model files(.ndm) are saved under the Profiles Location. To open the folder, right-click the model file and choose
Open Containing Folder. If the model is synchronized to Navicat Cloud, it is stored in the Cloud.

Model Sidebar

In the model's sidebars, all objects of your model/diagram(s), their properties and action history are listed.

The sidebars consist of the following components:

 Explorer
 History
 Properties
 Overview

Model Explorer Pane

The Explorer pane has two tabs: Model and Diagram. Model tab holds all tables or views in the model, including those
used in each individual diagram. You can simply drag an object from the Model tab and drop to the active diagram
canvas. Diagram tab holds all the objects (tables, views, foreign keys, layers, notes, images, etc) added to the active
diagram. If the Explorer pane is hidden, choose View -> Show Explorer from the model's menu.

208
Model History Pane

The History pane shows all the actions that you have taken. Simply click an action to restore that state. If the History
pane is hidden, choose View -> Show Explorer and Show History from the model's menu.

Model Properties Pane

The Properties pane includes the Model, Diagram and Object tabs for setting default properties for your model. You
can edit the properties settings of the model, the active diagram and the selected objects quickly. If the Properties pane
is hidden, choose View -> Show Properties from the model's menu.

Begin Arrow Style

The style of the arrow's back.

Black and White

Check this box to change the diagram color to black and white.

Bold
Check this box or press CTRL+B to bold the table, view, foreign key or shape.

Border Color
The color of the shape's border.

Estilo del casquillo

The cap style of the line/arrow.

Case Sensitivity
The case sensitivity of the table or view names. Available only for MySQL and MariaDB physical models.

Color
The color of the object.

209
Dash Style
The dash style of the line/arrow.

Database Type
The database type of the model.

Database Version
The database version of the model.

Diagram Notation
The notation of the diagram. The value for this can be Default, Simple, IDEF1X, UML, IE (Crow's Foot) or Classic.

End Arrow Style

The style of the arrow's front.

Font Bold
Check this box to bold the note/label font.

Color de la fuente
The font color of the note, label or layer.

Font Italic
Check this box to apply an italic style to the note/label font.

Font Name
The font name of the note, label or layer.

Font Size
The font size of the note, label or layer.

Height
The height of the object.

Height (pages)
The height of the diagram (number of papers).

Join Style
The join style of the line/arrow.

Left
The number of pixels from the object to the left side of the canvas.

Model Type
The type of the model.

210
Name
The name of the object.

Opacity
The transparency of the image/shape. The value for this can be between 0 to 100. Use 100 for opacity and 0 for
transparent.

Referenced Cardinality
The foreign key cardinality of referenced (parent) table.

Referencing Cardinality
The foreign key cardinality of referencing (child) table.

Schema Name
The schema names of the table/view.

Show Name
Check this box to show the name of the foreign key or shape.

Show Schema Name

Check this box to show the schema names of the tables/views in the diagram.

Show View Relationships

Check this box to show the relationship line of the view.

Table Font Name

The font name of the tables.

Table Font Size

The font size of the tables.

Top
The number of pixels from the object to the top of the canvas.

Visible
Check this box to show the foreign key lines.

Width
The width of the object.

Width (pages)
The width of the diagram (number of papers).

211
Model Overview Pane

The Overview pane displays the whole active diagram in the canvas. To zoom in or zoom out the selected area of the
diagram, adjust the slider. If the Overview pane is hidden, choose View -> Show Properties and Show Overview from
the model's menu. Same effect can be achieved with keyboard shortcuts:

Zoom In: [CTRL++] or [CTRL+Mousewheel Up]

Zoom out: [CTRL+-] or [CTRL+Mousewheel Down]

Diagram Canvas

Diagram Canvas consists of a canvas and a toolbar for you to design the diagram, such as adding objects, formatting
diagrams and printing models, etc. A model file can have more than one diagram. Each diagram is represented by a tab
in the model. To create a new diagram, choose File -> New Diagram from the model's menu.

Create Tables

To create a new table, click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas. To add an
existing table from the Explorer's Model tab, simply drag and drop the selected table from the Model tab to the canvas.

For Default diagram notation, the icon means the field is a primary key. The icon indicates that the field
serves as an index.

Note: If you right-click a field, you can choose to add, insert, delete, rename field and set the field as primary key.

The pop-up menu options of the table object in canvas include:

Design Table
Edit the table structure in a designer, e.g. fields, indexes, foreign keys, etc. The tabs and options in the designer
depend on the diagram database type you are chosen. For the settings of different tabs, see Server Objects.

Add Related Objects

Add all related tables/views to the selected table.

Add Field
Add fields to the existing table.

Cut
Remove the table from the diagram and put it on the clipboard.

Copy
Copy the table from the diagram to the clipboard.

212
Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

Select All Tables

Select all the tables in the diagram.

Delete
Delete a table from the diagram or from both diagram and model.

Rename
Change the name of the table.

Color
Change the color of the table.

Size to Fit
Resize the table automatically to fit its contents.

Bring to Front
Bring the table to the foreground.

Send to Back
Move the table to the background.

Create Views

To create a new view, click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas. To add an
existing view from the Explorer's Model tab, simply drag and drop the selected view from the Model tab to the canvas.

Note: If you right-click the view connector, you can choose to add or delete vertices and change its color, or go to the
source view and the target table.

The pop-up menu options of the view object in canvas include:

Design View
Edit the view structure in a designer. The tabs and options in the designer depend on the diagram database type you
are chosen. For the settings of different tabs, see Server Objects.

Add Related Objects

Add all related tables/views to the selected view.

Cut
Remove the view from the diagram and put it on the clipboard.

213
Copy
Copy the view from the diagram to the clipboard.

Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

Select All Views

Select all the views in the diagram.

Delete
Delete a view from the diagram or from both diagram and model.

Rename
Change the name of the view.

Color
Change the color of the view.

Size to Fit
Resize the view automatically to fit its contents.

Bring to Front
Bring the view to the foreground.

Send to Back
Move the view to the background.

Create Foreign Keys

To add a foreign key, click the button from the diagram toolbar and drag and drop a field from the child table to the
parent table. To show/hide the linked name label, simply check/uncheck the Show Name option in Properties pane.

The pop-up menu options of the foreign key object in canvas include:

Design Relation
Edit the foreign key in a designer. The options in the designer depend on the diagram database type you are chosen.
For the settings, see Server Objects.

Cardinality on table_name1
Set the cardinality on table_name1: None, One and Only One, Many, One or Many, Zero or One, Zero or Many.

Cardinality on table_name2
Set the cardinality on table_name2: None, One and Only One, Many, One or Many, Zero or One, Zero or Many.

214
Add Vertex
Add a vertex on a foreign key connecter.

Delete Vertex
Delete a vertex on a foreign key connecter.

Delete All Vertices

Delete all vertices on a foreign key connecter.

Go to Source
Go to and select the source (child) table.

Go to Target
Go to and select the target (parent) table.

Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

Select All Relations

Select all the foreign keys in the diagram.

Delete from Diagram and Model

Delete a foreign key from the diagram and model.

Color
Change the color of the foreign key.

Create Labels

Labels are typically used to help document the diagram design process. For example, to explain a grouping table objects. To c reate a new

label, click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas.

The pop-up menu options of the label object in canvas include:

Edit
Change the content of the label.

Cut
Remove the label from the diagram and put it on the clipboard.

Copy
Copy the label from the diagram to the clipboard.

Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

215
Select All
Select all the labels in the diagram.

Delete
Delete a label from the diagram.

Size to Fit
Resize the label automatically to fit its contents.

Bring to Front
Bring the label to the foreground.

Send to Back
Move the label to the background.

Create Notes

Notes are typically used to help document the diagram design process. For example, to explain a grouping table
objects. To create a new note, click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas.

The pop-up menu options of the note object in canvas include:

Edit
Change the content of the note.

Cut
Remove the note from the diagram and put it on the clipboard.

Copy
Copy the note from the diagram to the clipboard.

Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

Select All Notes

Select all the notes in the diagram.

Delete
Delete a note from the diagram.

Color
Change the color of the note.

Size to Fit
Resize the note automatically to fit its contents.

216
Bring to Front
Bring the note to the foreground.

Send to Back
Move the note to the background.

Create Images

To create a new image, click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas. Then, select
an image file in the Open dialog box.

The pop-up menu options of the image object in canvas include:

Reset Size
Reset the size of the image to its original size.

Reset Aspect Ratio

Maintain image original width to height ratio.

Cut
Remove the image from the diagram and put it on the clipboard.

Copy
Copy the image from the diagram to the clipboard.

Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

Select All Images

Select all the images in the diagram.

Delete
Delete an image from the diagram.

Bring to Front
Bring the image to the foreground.

Send to Back
Move the image to the background.

Create Shapes

To create a new shape (line, arrow, rectangle, ellipse, user, database, cloud or trigger), click the button from the
diagram toolbar and choose the type of shape. Then, click anywhere on the canvas. To show/hide the linked name
label, simply check/uncheck the Show Name option in Properties pane.

217
The pop-up menu options of the shape in canvas include:

Reset Aspect Ratio (only for rectangle, ellipse, user, database, cloud, trigger, server, desktop and mobile)
Maintain shape original width to height ratio.

Cut
Remove the shape from the diagram and put it on the clipboard.

Copy
Copy the shape from the diagram to the clipboard.

Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

Select All Shapes

Select all the shapes in the diagram.

Delete
Delete a shape from the diagram.

Color
Change the color of the shape.

Border Color (only for rectangle, ellipse, user, database, cloud, trigger, server, desktop and mobile)
Change the color of the shape's border.

Begin Arrow Style (only for arrow)

Change the style of the arrow's back.

End Arrow Style (only for arrow)

Change the style of the arrow's front.

Add Vertex (only for line and arrow)

Add a vertex on a line or arrow.

Delete Vertex (only for line and arrow)

Delete a vertex on a line or arrow.

Delete All Vertices (only for line and arrow)

Delete all vertices on a line or arrow.

Bring to Front
Bring the shape to the foreground.

Send to Back
Move the shape to the background.

218
Create Layers

Layers are used to help organize objects (e.g. tables, notes, images, etc) on the canvas. You can add all related objects
to the same layer. For example, you may choose to add all your sales related tables to one layer. To create a new layer,

click the button from the diagram toolbar and click anywhere on the canvas.

The pop-up menu options of the layer object in canvas include:

Cut
Quite la capa del diagrama y póngalo en el portapapeles.

Copy
Copy the layer from the diagram to the clipboard.

Paste
Paste the content from the clipboard into the diagram.

Select All Layers

Select all the layers in the diagram.

Delete
Delete a layer from the diagram.

Color
Change the color of the layer.

Size to Fit
Resize the layer automatically to fit its contents.

Bring to Front
Bring the layer to the foreground.

Send to Back
Move the layer to the background.

Format Diagram

Show Grid
To turn the grid on in the diagram canvas, choose View -> Show Grid from the menu.

Snap to Grid
To align objects on the canvas with the grid, choose View -> Snap To Grid from the menu.

Change Diagram Notation

To change the notation of the diagram, choose Diagram -> Diagram Notation and select the notation from the menu.

219
 Default The default notation style used in Navicat.
Simple A simple notation style. The table and view objects will only show
the name.
IE (Crow's Foot) Crow's Foot notation style.
IDEF1X The ICAM DEFinition language information modeling method.
UML Universal Modeling Language style.
Classic A classic notation style.
Black and White Change the color of the diagram to black and white.
Show Schema Name Show the schema names of the tables and views in the diagram.

Change Diagram Dimensions

To change the number of pages used in the diagram, choose Diagram -> Diagram Dimensions from the menu and
set the Width and Height.

Align Objects
To align objects on the canvas, select more than one object (tables, views, notes, labels, images or shapes), then
right-click and choose Alignment -> Align Left/Align Center/Align Right/Align Top/Align Middle/Align Bottom.

Change the Objects Distribution

To distribute objects on the canvas, select more than one object (tables, views, notes, labels, images or shapes), then
right-click and choose Distribute -> Horizontal/Vertical.

Change Page Setup

To change paper size, orientation and margins, choose File -> Page Setup.

Apply Auto Layout

To automatically arrange objects on the canvas, click Auto Layout from the toolbar. To change the Auto Layout
format, simply choose Diagram -> Auto Layout with from the menu and set the following options:

Option Description
Auto Diagram Dimension Choose the suitable diagram dimension automatically.
Auto Size Tables to Fit Resize the table to fit its content automatically.
Quality The quality of the auto layout output.
Object Distance The distance between the objects in the diagram.

Preview and Print Model

To preview the pages before printing, simply click the Print Preview button. The model can be printed to the
printer or to various file formats.

Print to a printer

Choose File -> Print to send your diagram directly to the printer. You can set the printer option in the pop-up
window.

220
Print to a file (PDF/PNG/SVG)

Choose File -> Print As -> PDF/PNG/SVG to create a PDF/PNG/SVG file of your diagram.

Reverse Engineering

Reverse Engineering is one of the key features of Model. This feature allows you to load already existing database
structures to create new diagrams. It supports to import MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, SQLite, SQL Server or MariaDB
databases, schema, tables or views.

Navicat provides a step-by-step wizard for you to complete the task:

1. Select Tools -> Import from Database.

2. Select a connection.
3. Choose databases, schemas or tables you want to import.
4. Click Start.

You can also simply create a new model using reverse engineering in the Navicat main window. Right-click an opened
database/schema, table(s) or view(s) and select Reverse Database to Model, Reverse Schema to Model,
Reverse Tables to Model or Reverse Views to Model from the pop-up menu.

Script Generation

Después de finalizar el modelo, puede guardar las estructuras de la tabla, las vistas y las claves extranjeras del modelo en un
archivo de script. La
Exportar SQL Feature genera un archivo SQL para el script. Seleccione Herramientas -> Exportar SQL.

General Settings for Export SQL

File
Set the output file name and location.

Objects
Choose objects in current model you wish to export.

Advanced Settings for Export SQL

The following options depend on the diagram database type you are chosen: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite,
SQL Server and MariaDB.

Server Version
Select server version for the SQL file.

221
Include Schema
Include the schema name in file with this option is on. Otherwise, only object names are included in SQL statements.

Default Schema
Set the schema name for the objects without schema settings.

Include Drop SQL

Include drop object SQL statements in file with this option in on.

Include Drop With CASCADE

Include drop object SQL statements with cascade option in file with this option in on.

Include Primary Keys

Include primary keys in file with this option is on.

Include Foreign Keys

Include foreign keys in file with this option is on.

Include Uniques
Include uniques in file with this option is on.

Include Indexes
Include indexes in file with this option is on.

Include Checks
Include checks in file with this option is on.

Include Excludes
Include excludes in file with this option is on.

Include Rules
Include rules in file with this option is on.

Incluir desencadenadores
Incluir desencadenadores en el archivo con esta opción está activada.

Incluir conjunto de caracteres

Include table and field character set in file with this option is on.

Incluir incremento automático

Include table auto increment values in file with this option is on.

Include Collation
Include table collation in file with this option is on.

222
Forward Engineering

Forward engineering is one of the key features of Model. This feature allows you to compare the model with an existing
database or schema, states the differences between their structures, and offer synchronizing the structures in model to
the target connection.

Navicat provides a step-by-step wizard for you to complete the task.

1. Select Tools -> Synchronize to Database.

2. Select the synchronization type.
3. Select the source databases, schemas, tables or views and the target connection from existing connections.
4. Choose the compare and execution options.
5. Click Compare to generate a set of scripts that show the differences between source and target tables.
6. Select the scripts you want to run.
7. Click Run Query.

Selecting Synchronization Type

Sync with selected schemas

Set the synchronization to work on all objects in the selected schemas.

Sync with selected objects

Set the synchronization to work on selected objects only.

Selecting Schemas/Objects and Connection

In this step, choose one or more schemas or objects in model to compare to the target schemas or objects. If objects in
model are from existing schemas, you can select the existing schemas. Otherwise, enter a target schema name in
Objects without schema will synchronize to this schema for the source model objects to compare to.

Then, choose target connection and database from existing connections.

Selecting Compare and Execution Options

The following options depend on the diagram database type you are chosen: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite,
SQL Server and MariaDB.

Compare Identifier With Case Sensitive

Check this option if you want to compare table identifier with case sensitive option.

Compare Tables
Check this option if you want to compare tables.

223
Compare Primary Keys
Check this option if you want to compare table primary keys.

Compare Foreign Keys

Check this option if you want to compare table foreign keys.

Compare Indexes
Check this option if you want to compare indexes.

Compare Triggers
Check this option if you want to compare triggers.

Compare Character Set

Check this option if you want to compare character set of tables.

Compare Auto Increment Value

Marque esta opción si desea comparar los valores de incremento automático de las tablas.

Compare Uniques
Marque esta opción si desea comparar los únicos.

Compare Checks
Check this option if you want to compare checks.

Compare Excludes
Check this option if you want to compare excludes.

Compare Rules
Check this option if you want to compare rules.

Compare Collation
Check this option if you want to compare collation of tables.

Compare Views
Check this option if you want to compare views.

Compare Definers
Check this option if you want to compare the definers of views.

SQL for objects to be created

Check this option to include all related SQL statements if new database objects will be created in the target.

SQL for objects to be changed

Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be changed in the target.

224
SQL for objects to be dropped
Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be dropped from the target.

Continue on error
Ignore errors that are encountered during the synchronization process.

Viewing Comparison Result

Source Objects/Target Objects

The tree view shows the differences between model and database/schema objects after the comparison of their
structures, providing with the detailed SQL statements shown in the Queries for Modification list.

The red item represents the non-existence for the other database/schema.

The blue item represents the existence for the other database/schema, but different definition detected.

All the scripts are unchecked in the Queries for Modification list by default. Check the scripts you want to apply to the
target.

You can highlight multiple lines of scripts, and then right-click to show the pop-up menu. Choose Checked Scripts
Detail to view the full SQL statements you selected.

Click Run Query button to execute the selected query.

225
Model Conversion

You can convert your models from one database type to another database type, e.g. MariaDB 10.0 physical model to
PostgreSQL 9.0 physical model.

During the conversion, all data types are converted automatically. The conversion process does not change the SQL
syntax of views if converting from one database type to another. If the target database version is MySQL 4.0 or below,
all views will be removed.

To convert an opened model file, choose File -> Model Conversion. Then, select the target Database and Version.

Model Hints and Tips

Navicat provides some useful hints to work on the model more effectively.

Action Description
Locate Object in the - Object selected in the Explorer's Diagram tab will be highlighted in the
Diagram Canvas Diagram Canvas.
- Double-click an object in the Explorer's Diagram tab will jump to the
objeto correspondiente en el lienzo de diagrama.
Eliminar objeto de - Select an object in the Diagram Canvas and press SHIFT+DELETE.
Model
Open Table/View -Haga doble clic en una tabla/vista en la ficha modelo del explorador o en el
diagrama
Designer
Canvas.
Add table/view from - Drag table/view from Navicat main window and drop to the Diagram
Navicat Main Canvas.
Get Table/View -Seleccionar y copiar una tabla/vista en el lienzo de diagrama, y pegarla a
Structure (SQL otros editores de texto.
Statement)
Design Field without - Select and click the table name and press TAB/DOWN ARROW to add/edit
Table Designer fields.

Navicat will predict field types according to field names you entered.

Integer/int/INT4/Number
- suffix "id", "no" (if it is the first column, it will be predicted as a primary key)
- suffix "num"
- "Qty", "número"
- exactly "age", "count"

DECIMAL(10,2)/decimal(10,2)/NUMBER/REAL/money

226
 - suffix "price", "cost", "salary"

FLOAT/double/float8/NUMBER/REAL/float
- "size", "height", "width", "length", "weight", "speed", "distance"

DATE/datetime/date/TEXT/datetime2
- "date", "time"

VARCHAR(255)/varchar(255)/VARCHAR2(255)/TEXT
- other field names

Enter * before the field name to recognize as primary key. e.g. *itemNo:int.
Enter : between field name and field type to custom field type, e.g.
itemName:varchar(255).
Reordenar campo -Seleccione una tabla en el lienzo de diagrama y, a continuación, mantenga
pulsada la tecla Mayús. Uso

to drag the field to a desired location.

Delete Field -Seleccione una tabla en el lienzo de diagrama y, a continuación, mantenga
pulsada la tecla Mayús. Uso

to drag the desired field out of the table.

Add Vertex to Foreign - Select a foreign key/line/arrow in Diagram Canvas. Press and hold the
Key/Line/Arrow SHIFT key and click on it to add vertex.
Delete Vertex on - Select a foreign key/line/arrow in Diagram Canvas. Press and hold the
Foreign Key/Line/Arrow SHIFT key and click on the vertex.
Switch to Hand Mode - Press and hold the SPACE key, then move the diagram.
Select a Page in Print - Press and hold the SHIFT key, then point to a page to show the page
Preview number.
- Press and hold the SHIFT key, then click a page to jump to the
corresponding page in Diagram Canvas.

227
Advanced Tools
Navicat provides a number of powerful tools for working with data, which includes Import Wizard, Export Wizard,
Dump SQL File, Execute SQL File and more.

Import Wizard

Import Wizard allows you to import data to tables from CSV, TXT, XML, DBF and more. You can save your settings as
a profile for setting schedule.

Note: Navicat Essentials version only supports to import text-based files, such as TXT, CSV, HTML, XML and JSON
file.

To open the Import Wizard, click Import Wizard from the table object list toolbar.

Hint: You can drag a supported file to the Table's Object List pane or a database/schema in the Connection pane.
Navicat will pop up the Import Wizard window. If existing table is highlighted, Navicat will import the file to the
highlighted table. Otherwise, import the file to a new table.

Setting Import File Format (Step 1)

Select one of the available import types for the source file.

Note: The Excel file format is according to the Microsoft Office version installed in your computer.

Setting Source File Name (Step 2)

Examine el nombre del archivo de origen. La extensión de archivo en el Importar desde el cuadro de texto cambia
según el tipo de importación seleccionado en el paso 1. Seleccione el Codificación para el archivo de origen.

Note: For TXT and XML file, you can select more than one file to import.

Excel

Sheets will be shown in the Tables list.

Access

If there is security settings, i.e. database password and user level security in your access file, you are required to input
the necessary information. Click Security button for more settings:

System Database File

Locate the system security file of the Access file, e.g. D:\Temp\Security.mdw.

228
Contraseña de base de datos
Enter the password for the database if any.

Logon Name
Enter the user name set by the user level security.

Logon Password
Enter the password of that user.

ODBC

Setting up an ODBC Data Source Connection

1. In Control Panel, select Administrative Tools.

2. Select Data Sources (ODBC).
3. Click Add button in User DSN tab.
4. Select the appropriate ODBC driver, such as Microsoft ODBC for Oracle and click Finish button.
5. Enter required information.
6. Click OK button to see your ODBC Driver in the list.

Connecting to ODBC Data Source in Navicat

1. Click in Import from in step 2 of the Import Wizard.

2. In Provider tab, select the appropriate ODBC driver, such as Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers.
3. Under Connection tab, choose the data source from the Use data source name drop-down list and provide
valid username and password.
4. All available tables will be included in the Tables list if connection is success.

Hint: If you are importing from Access and ODBC, the Add Query, Delete Query and Modify Query buttons open the
Add Query dialog where you can construct query to import only certain rows from your source tables. In other words,
import only rows that satisfy the criteria set by you. Tables and queries will be shown in the Tables list.

Setting Delimiter (Step 3) - TXT, XML

TXT

Define Record Delimiter, Field Delimiter and Text Qualifier for file.

Choose Fixed Width to import the text file with fixed width format. To delimit the source column bounds, click on the
desired position to create a break line. Simply drag it to move it or double-click it to remove it.

229
XML

Define tag to identify table row.

Consider tag attributes as table field

For example:

<row age="17">
<id>1</id>
<name>Mié</name>
</row>

With this option is on, Navicat will recognizes "age" as a table field together with "id" and "name", otherwise, only "id"
and "name" will be imported as table fields.

Note: Navicat does not support multiple level of XML file.

Setting Additional Options (Step 4) - TXT, XML, Excel, HTML

The following options depend on the file format chose in step 1.

Fila de nombre de campo

Fila de nombre de campo indica qué fila debe Navicat reconocer como título de columna.

Primera fila de datos

First data row indicates which row should Navicat start reading the actual data.

Last Data Row

Last data row indicates which row should Navicat stop reading the actual data.

Note: If no column title are defined for the file, enter 1 for First data row and 0 for Field name row.

Date Order, Date Delimiter, Time Delimiter, DateTime Order

Define the formats of date and time.

230
Decimal Symbol
Define the format of decimal number.

Binary Data Encoding

Set binary data is imported as Base64 encoded or None encoding from file.

Setting Target Table (Step 5)

You are allowed to define a new table name or choose to import into an existing table from the drop-down list.

Note: If you type a new table name in Target Table, the box in New Table will be checked automatically.

For importing multiple tables, all tables will be shown in the list.

Adjusting Field Structures and Mapping Fields (Step 6)

Navicat will make assumption on the field types and length in the source table. You are allowed to choose desired type
from the drop-down list.

Hint: For importing multiple tables, select other tables from the Source Table drop-down list.

If you are importing data into existing table(s), you might need to map the source field names manually to the
destination table or right-click and select Smart Match All, Direct Match All and Unmatch All from the pop-up menu
for quick mapping.

231
If you are importing via ODBC, the Condition Query button opens the WHERE dialog where you can specify a
WHERE clause to import only certain rows from your source tables. In other words, import only rows that satisfy the
criteria set by you.

Hint: Do not include the word WHERE in the clause.

Selecting Import Mode (Step 7)

Select the import mode that defines how the data being imported.

Hint: To activate the remaining options, you must enable Primary Key in step 6.

Click Advanced button for more settings:

The following options depend on the database type you are chosen: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite, SQL Server
and MariaDB.

Run multiple queries in each execution

Check this option if you want to run multiple queries in each execution.

Use extended insert statements

Insert records using extended insert syntax.

232
Example:
INSERT INTO `users` VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23'), ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56'), ('0', 'Katherine', '23');

Use empty string as NULL

Import NULL value if the source data field contains empty string.

Use Foreign Key constraint

Add foreign key if there is foreign key relations between tables.

Continue on error
Ignore errors that are encountered during the import process.

Include Unique, Index and Foreign Key

Include Unique, Index and foreign key during the import process.

Note: Support only when file type is MS Access database or ODBC.

Create Auto Increment Fields

Create Auto Increment Fields during the import process.

Note: Support only when file type is MS Access database, Paradox file or DBase file.

Import Deleted Records

Import the deleted records in the DBase file during the import process.

Note: Support only when file type is DBase file.

Saving and Confirming Import (Step 8)

Click Start button to start the import process. You can view the running process indicating success or failure. These
messages are saved in file - LogImport.txt.

Hint: Click Save button to save your settings as a profile for setting schedule.

You can click Log button to view the log file.

Export Wizard

Export Wizard allows you to export data from tables, views, or query results to any available formats. You can save
your settings as a profile for setting schedule.

Note: Navicat Essentials version only supports to export text-based files, such as TXT, CSV, HTML, XML and JSON
file.

To open the Export Wizard, click Export Wizard from the object list toolbar.
233
Setting Export File Format (Step 1)

Select one of the available export formats for the target file.

Note: The Excel file format is according to the Microsoft Office version installed in your computer.
Navicat 64-bit version does not support exporting to .mdb file.

Setting Destination File Name (Step 2)

Set exported file name and location. You can check the box next to table name in Source directly to assign a default
file name and location. If existing table is highlighted, it will be checked automatically and assigned a default file name
and location. The file extension in the Export to text box changes according to the selected export type in step 1.

Note: For exporting query result, ensure the query is saved before running the Export Wizard. Otherwise, no source
table displayed in here.

In Vista or above, you can select/unselect all source tables from Select All button.

If you are exporting selected tables into the same target file, you can select Export selected to same file from Select
All button for quick mapping.

If you are exporting selected tables into the same directory, you can select Export selected to same folder from
Select All button for quick mapping.

Click Advanced button for more settings:

Encoding
Select the encoding for the exported file.

Add timestamp
Check this option if you want your file name specifies the timestamp of the export is run. Select the date/time format
from the drop-down list.

234
Seleccionar campos para exportar (paso 3)

Select table fields for export. All the fields are selected in the Available Fields list by default. If you want to omit some
fields to be exported, uncheck the box All Fields first and then uncheck those fields in the Available Fields list.

Note: For exporting query result, the wizard will skip this step.

Setting Additional Options (Step 4)

The following options depend on the file format chose in step 1.

Include column titles

Field names will be included into the exported file if this option is on.

Append
Append records to the existing file. If you select Export selected to same file option for multiple tables in step 2,
checks this option to append the records.

Continue on error
Ignore errors that are encountered during the export process.

Use Attributes Format in XML

Attributes Format
<RECORDS>
<RECORD OrderNo="1003" ItemNo="1" PartNo="1313" Qty="5"
Discount="0"></RECORD>
<RECORD OrderNo="1004" ItemNo="1" PartNo="1313" Qty="10"
Discount="50"></RECORD>
</RECORDS>
Non-Attributes Format
<RECORDS>
<RECORD>
<OrderNo>1003</OrderNo>
<ItemNo>1</ItemNo>
<PartNo>1313</PartNo>
<Qty>5</Qty>
<Discount>0</Discount>
</RECORD>
<RECORD>
<OrderNo>1004</OrderNo>
<ItemNo>1</ItemNo>
<PartNo>1313</PartNo>

235
 <Qty>10</Qty>
<Discount>50</Discount>
</RECORD>
</RECORDS>

Define Record Delimiter, Field Delimiter and Text Qualifier for file.

Date Order, Date Delimiter, Zero Padding Date, Time Delimiter

Define the formats of date and time.

Decimal Symbol
Define the format of decimal number.

Binary Data Encoding

Set binary data is exported as Base64 encoded or None encoding in file.

Saving and Confirming Export (Step 5)

Click Start button to start the export process. You can view the running process indicating success or failure. These
messages are saved in file - LogExport.txt.

Hint: Click Save button to save your settings as a profile for setting schedule.

You can click Open button to open the exported file or the log file.

Data Transfer (Available only in Full Version)

Navicat allows you to transfer database objects from one database and/or schema to another, or to a sql file. The target
database and/or schema can be on the same server as the source or on another server. You can save your settings as

a profile for setting schedule. Select Tools -> Data Transfer from the main menu.

Hint: You can drag tables to a database/schema in the Connection pane. If the target database/schema is within the
same connection, Navicat will copy the table directly. Otherwise, Navicat will pop up the Data Transfer window.

To open a saved profile, select the profile and click the Load button or double-click it in the Profiles tab.

General Settings for Data Transfer

Source
Define connection, database and/or schema for the source.

All the database objects are selected in the Database Objects list by default. If you do not want some database objects
to be transferred, uncheck them.

236
 With this option is on, only the checked database objects will be transferred. However, if you add any new
database objects in the source database and/or schema after you create your data transfer profile, the newly added
database objects will not be transferred unless you manually modify the Database Objects list.

Choose this option if you wish all the database objects being transferred to the target database/schema, all newly
added database objects will also be transferred without amending the data transfer profile.

Target

Connection
Transfer your selected database objects directly to a connection, database and/or schema.

File
Transfer your selected database objects directly to a text file. You can select different SQL Format and Encoding for
the file.

Advanced Settings for Same Server Type Data Transfer

In this tab, you can choose the advanced settings for transferring between same server type or between MySQL and
MariaDB.

The following options depend on the database type you are chosen: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite, SQL Server
and MariaDB.

Create tables
Create tables in the target database and/or schema with this option is on.

Suppose this option is unchecked and tables already exist in the target database/schema, then all data will be
appended to the destination tables.

Include indexes
Include indexes in the table with this option is on.

Include foreign key constraints

Include foreign keys in the table with this option is on.

Include engine/table type

Include table type with this option is on.

Include character set

Include character set in the table with this option is on.

Include auto increment

Include auto increment in the table with this option is on.

237
Include other table options
Include other options in the table with this option is on.

Include unique constraints

Include uniques in the table with this option is on.

Include rules
Include rules in the table with this option is on.

Include check constraints

Include checks in the table with this option is on.

Include triggers
Include triggers in the table with this option is on.

Include excludes
Include exclusion constraints in the table with this option is on.

Convert object name to

Check this option if you require convert object names to Lower case or Upper case during the process.

Insert records
Check this option if you require all records to be transferred to the destination database and/or schema.

Lock target tables

Lock the tables in the target database and/or schema during the data transfer process.

Use transaction
Check this option if you use transaction during the data transfer process.

Use complete insert statements

Insert records using complete insert syntax.

Example:
INSERT INTO `users` (`ID Number`, `User Name`, `User Age`) VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23');
INSERT INTO `users` (`ID Number`, `User Name`, `User Age`) VALUES ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56');
INSERT INTO `users` (`ID Number`, `User Name`, `User Age`) VALUES ('0', 'katherine', '23');

Use extended insert statements

Insert records using extended insert syntax.

Example:
INSERT INTO `users` VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23'), ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56'), ('0', 'Katherine', '23');

Use delayed insert statements

Insert records using DELAYED insert SQL statements.
238
Example:
INSERT DELAYED INTO `users` VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23');
INSERT DELAYED INTO `users` VALUES ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56');
INSERT DELAYED INTO `users` VALUES ('0', 'katherine', '23');

Run multiple insert statements

Check this option if you want to run multiple insert statements in each execution, which will make the data transfer
process faster.

Use hexadecimal format for BLOB

Insert BLOB data as hexadecimal format.

Continue on error
Ignore errors that are encountered during the transfer process.

Lock source tables

Lock the tables in the source database and/or schema so that any update on the table is not allowed once the data
transfer is triggered off.

Drop target objects before create

Check this option if database objects already exist in the target database and/or schema, the existing objects will be
deleted once the data transfer starts.

Create target database/schema if not exist

Create a new database/schema if the database/schema specified in target server does not exist.

Use DDL from SHOW CREATE TABLE

If this option is on, DDL will be used from show create table.

Use DDL from sqlite_master

If this option is on, DDL will be used from the SQLITE_MASTER table.

Advanced Settings for Cross Server Data Transfer (Available only in Navicat
Premium)

Navicat Premium supports transferring table with data across different server types, e.g. from MySQL to Oracle. If you
are transferring between MySQL and MariaDB, you can refer to Advanced Settings for Same Server Type Data
Transfer.

The following options depend on the database type you are chosen: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite, SQL Server
and MariaDB.

Create tables
Create tables in the target database and/or schema with this option is on.

239
Suppose this option is unchecked and tables already exist in the target database/schema, then all data will be
appended to the destination tables.

Include indexes
Include indexes in the table with this option is on.

Include foreign key constraints

Include foreign keys in the table with this option is on.

Convert object name to

Check this option if you require convert object names to Lower case or Upper case during the process.

Insert records
Check this option if you require all records to be transferred to the destination database and/or schema.

Lock target tables

Lock the tables in the target database and/or schema during the data transfer process.

Use transaction
Check this option if you use transaction during the data transfer process.

Use complete insert statements

Insert records using complete insert syntax.

Example:
INSERT INTO `users` (`ID Number`, `User Name`, `User Age`) VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23');
INSERT INTO `users` (`ID Number`, `User Name`, `User Age`) VALUES ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56');
INSERT INTO `users` (`ID Number`, `User Name`, `User Age`) VALUES ('0', 'katherine', '23');

Use extended insert statements

Insert records using extended insert syntax.

Example:
INSERT INTO `users` VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23'), ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56'), ('0', 'Katherine', '23');

Use delayed insert statements

Insert records using DELAYED insert SQL statements.

Example:
INSERT DELAYED INTO `users` VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23');
INSERT DELAYED INTO `users` VALUES ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56');
INSERT DELAYED INTO `users` VALUES ('0', 'katherine', '23');

240
Run multiple insert statements
Check this option if you want to run multiple insert statements in each execution, which will make the data transfer
process faster.

Use hexadecimal format for BLOB

Insert BLOB data as hexadecimal format.

Continue on error
Ignore errors that are encountered during the transfer process.

Lock source tables

Lock the tables in the source database and/or schema so that any update on the table is not allowed once the data
transfer is triggered off.

Drop target objects before create

Check this option if database objects already exist in the target database and/or schema, the existing objects will be
deleted once the data transfer starts.

Create target database/schema if not exist

Create a new database/schema if the database/schema specified in target server does not exist.

Data Synchronization (Available only in Full Version)

Navicat allows you to transfer data from one database and/or schema to another with detailed analytical process. In
other words, Navicat provides the ability for data in different databases and/or schemas to be kept up-to-date so that
each repository contains the same information. You are not only authorized to rollback the transferring process, but
also insert, delete and update records to the destination. You can save your settings as a profile for setting schedule.

Select Tools -> Data Synchronization from the main menu.

All tables must contain primary keys and all table structures must be identical between the source and target. You
could apply Structure Synchronization before Data Synchronization.

The messages indicate the running process success or failure are saved in file - LogSynchronize.txt.

To open a saved profile, select the profile and click Load button or double-click it in Profiles tab.

Note: SQL Server 2000 does not support.

For Oracle server, BLOB, CLOB, NCLOB, LONG and LONG RAW data are skipped during the data
synchronization process. TIMESTAMP primary key cannot synchronize (insert, update) with Database Link to 9i
server. RAW primary key cannot synchronize (insert, update, delete) with Database Link to any server, without
error.
Navicat Premium and Navicat for MySQL support synchronize between MySQL and MariaDB.

241
General Settings for Data Synchronization

Source/Target
Define connection, database and/or schema for the source and target.

Note: For Oracle server, you need to create Public/Private Database Link to the target Oracle database before.

Source Table/Target Table

Only tables which contain identical table names between the source and target are mapped in the list by default. If you
do not want some tables to be synchronized, disable them manually from the drop-down list.

Hint: You can preview the outcome before execution.

Advanced Settings for Data Synchronization

Use Transaction
Rollback all data when error occurs.

Show synchronization detail

Check this option if you want to list the details process in Message Log tab during the synchronization.

Note: The process will be faster if this option is unchecked.

Insert records, Delete records, Update records

Check these options to performing such actions to the target when data are synchronized.

Structure Synchronization (Available only in Full Version)

Navicat allows you to compare and modify the table structures with detailed analytical process. In other words, Navicat
compares tables between two databases and/or schemas and states the differential in structure. Select Tools ->
Structure Synchronization from the main menu.

To open a saved profile, select the profile and click Load button or double-click it in Profiles tab.

Note: Available only for MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQL Server and MariaDB. Navicat Premium and Navicat for
MySQL support synchronize between MySQL and MariaDB.

General Settings for Structure Synchronization

The following options depend on the database type you are chosen: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQL Server and
MariaDB.

Source/Target
Define connection, database and/or schema for the source and target.
242
Compare Tables
Check this option if you want to compare tables between the source and target.

Compare Primary Keys

Check this option if you want to compare table primary keys.

Compare Foreign Keys

Check this option if you want to compare table foreign keys.

Compare Character Set

Check this option if you want to compare character set of tables.

Compare Auto Increment Value

Check this option if you want to compare auto increment values of tables.

Compare Partitions
Check this option if you want to compare table partitions.

Compare Uniques
Check this option if you want to compare uniques.

Compare Checks
Check this option if you want to compare checks.

Compare Excludes
Check this option if you want to compare exclude constraints.

Compare Collation
Check this option if you want to compare collation of tables.

Compare Identity Last Value

Check this option if you want to compare table identity last values.

Compare Views
Check this option if you want to compare views.

Compare Functions
Check this option if you want to compare functions.

Compare Events
Check this option if you want to compare events.

Compare Definer
Check this option if you want to compare definer.

243
Compare Indexes
Check this option if you want to compare indexes.

Compare Sequences
Check this option if you want to compare sequences.

Compare Triggers
Check this option if you want to compare triggers.

Compare Rules
Check this option if you want to compare rules.

Compare Tablespace and Physical Attributes

Check this option if you want to compare tablespace and physical attributes.

Compare Storage
Check this option if you want to compare storage.

SQL for objects to be created

Check this option to include all related SQL statements if new database objects will be created in the target.

SQL for objects to be changed

Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be changed in the target.

SQL for objects to be dropped

Check this option to include all related SQL statements if database objects will be dropped from the target.

Drop with CASCADE

Check this option if you want to cascade to drop the dependent database objects.

Compare after execution

Compare tables after the synchronization is executed.

Continue on error
Ignore errors that are encountered during the synchronization process.

Create inheriting parent

Create tables of inheriting parents during the synchronization process.

Structure Synchronization Result

Source Objects/Target Objects

The tree view shows the differences between the source and target database and/or schema after the comparison of
their structures, providing with detailed SQL statements shown in the Queries for Modification list.

244
The red item represents the non-existence for the other database/schema.

The blue item represents the existence for the other database/schema, but different definition detected.

You are allowed to edit object structure manually, right-click the object in the tree view and select Edit from the pop-up
menu to open the relevant designer.

All the scripts are unchecked in the Queries for Modification list by default. Check the scripts you want to apply to the
target.

You can highlight multiple lines of scripts, and then right-click to show the pop-up menu. Choose Checked Scripts
Detail to view the full SQL statements you selected.

Click Run Query button to execute the selected query.

Backup/Restore (Available only in Full Version)

A secure and reliable server is closely related to performing regular backups, as failures will probably occur sometimes
- caused by attacks, hardware failure, human error, power outages, etc.

Navicat allows you to backup/restore database objects for your database. You can save your settings as a profile for
setting schedule. Click to open an object list for Backup.

Hint: Backup files are stored under Settings Location. To open the folder, right-click the backup file and choose Open
Containing Folder.

Note: Available only for MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and MariaDB. To backup Oracle, see Oracle Data Pump. To
backup SQL Server, see SQL Server Backup/Restore.

245
Backup

General Properties

You can enter comment for the backup file.

Object Selection

Choose database objects you wish to backup.

Advanced Properties

The following options depend on the database type you are chosen: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and MariaDB.

Compressed
Check this option if you want to produce smaller backup file.

To compress or decompress the backup file in the Object List pane, right-click the backup file and select Compress
Backup or Decompress Backup from the pop-up menu.

Hint: compressed (.psc), uncompressed (.psb).

Lock All Tables

Lock all objects while backup is being processed.

Use Single Transaction (InnoDB only)

If a table uses InnoDB storage engine, with this option is on, Navicat uses transaction before the backup process starts.

Use specify file name

Define your file name for backup. Otherwise, your backup file will be named as "2007-05-10 17:38:20" for example.

Restore

Restore feature will firstly drop the selected objects of the database, then recreate the new objects according to your
backup. Finally, inserting the data.

To restore a backup to an existing database, open a database and select an existing backup file. Click Restore
Backup from the backup object list toolbar.

To restore a backup to a new database, create and open a new database and click Restore Backup from the
backup object list toolbar. Browse the backup file.

Nota: Debe tener crear, soltar e insertar privilegios (MySQL/MariaDB o PostgreSQL) para ejecutar la restauración.

General Properties

246
Show information of the backup file.

Object Selection

Choose database objects you wish to restore.

Advanced Properties

The following options depend on the database type you are chosen: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and MariaDB.

Use Transaction
Rollback all data when error occurs.

Continue on error
Ignore errors that are encountered during the restore process.

Lock tables for write

Lock the tables to prevent user to modify tables during the restore process.

Use extended insert statements

Insert records using extended insert syntax.

Example:
INSERT INTO `users` VALUES ('1', 'Peter McKindsy', '23'), ('2', 'Johnson Ryne', '56'), ('0', 'Katherine', '23');

Run multiple queries in each execution

Check this option if you want to run multiple queries in each execution, which will make the restore process faster.

Create tables
Create tables during the restore process with this option is on.

Create records
Restore table records with this option is on. Otherwise, only table structures will be restored.

Create indexes
Create indexes for the restored table with this option is on.

Create triggers
Create triggers for the restored table with this option is on.

Overwrite existing tables

Overwrite if tables already exist in the database/schema.

Overwrite existing views

Overwrite if views already exist in the database/schema.

247
Overwrite existing functions
Overwrite if functions already exist in the database/schema.

Overwrite existing events

Overwrite if events already exist in the database/schema.

Overwrite existing sequences

Overwrite if sequences already exist in the database/schema.

Overwrite existing indexes

Overwrite if indexes already exist in the database/schema.

Sobrescribir desencadenadores existentes

Overwrite if triggers already exist in the database/schema.

Insert Auto Increment Values

Insert auto increment values in the database/schema.

Extract SQL

Extract SQL allows extracting SQL into a SQL file from your backup file.

To extract SQL from a backup file, open a database and select an existing backup file. Click Extract SQL from the
backup object list toolbar.

Batch Job/Schedule (Available only in Full Version)

Navicat allows you to create a batch job for setting schedule to execute at one or more regular intervals, beginning and
ending at a specific date and time using Windows Task Scheduler. Batch job can be created for Query, Report
printing, Backup, Data Transfer, Data Synchronization, Import and Export from databases. You can define a list of

actions to be performed within one batch job, either run it manually or at the specified time/periodically. Click to
open an object list for Schedule.

The messages indicate the running process success or failure are saved in file - LogCmd.txt.

Click Set Task Schedule to set schedule for batch job.

Note: Please save the batch job before setting schedule. Passwords must be saved in Connection Properties and
Windows Scheduler before running your schedule.

Connection Properties Windows Scheduler

248
General Settings for Batch Job/Schedule

Move objects from the Available Jobs list to the Selected Jobs list by using Select button, double-clicking or
dragging them. To delete the objects from the selected jobs list, remove them in the same way. You are allowed to run
profiles from different servers in a single batch job/schedule.

To rearrange the sequence of the selected jobs, use Move Up or Move Down buttons.

To backup whole server, you can select the connection and choose Backup Server xxx. (To backup your connection
settings, see Migrate Navicat to new computer.)

Report can be printed to physical printer or in various formats, e.g. Excel, HTML, PDF and more. Select the report to
the Selected Jobs list will allow you to set Report Type.

To edit this setting later, right-click the report and select Adjust Parameter from the pop-up menu.

Exported file or printed report can be added to the batch job as mail attachment. Select the job in the Selected Jobs list
and click Add Attachment or Remove Attachment to add or remove the mail attachment.

To find Data Transfer or Data Synchronization profile, choose Navicat at the top on the left panel.

Advanced Settings for Batch Job/Schedule

Send Email
Navicat allows you to generate and send personalized e-mails with results returned from a schedule. The resultset(s)
can be emailed to multiple recipients. Check this option and enter required information.

From
Specify e-mail address of sender. For example, [email protected].

To, CC
Specify e-mail addresses of each recipient, separating them with a comma or a semicolon (;).

Subject
Specify the email subject with customized format.

Body
Write email content.

249
Host (SMTP Server)
Enter your Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server for outgoing messages.

Port
Enter the port number you connect to your outgoing e-mail (SMTP) server. Default value is 25.

Use Authentication
Check this option and enter User Name and Password if your SMTP server requires authorization to send email.

Secure Connection
Specify the connection to use TLS, SSL secure connection or Never.

Send test mail

Navicat will send you a test mail indicating success or failure.

Batch Job Converter (Available only in Navicat Premium)

Navicat Premium allows you to convert saved batch jobs from either Navicat for MySQL, Navicat for Oracle, Navicat for
PostgreSQL, Navicat for SQLite, Navicat for SQL Server and Navicat for MariaDB to it. Right-click in the Object List
pane and select Batch Job Converter from the pop-up menu.

In Vista or above, you can select all batch jobs from all or either one Navicat from Select All button.

Delete original batch jobs

Check this option if you want to delete the original batch jobs in Navicat. If the original batch job is deleted, the
scheduled batch job will not work until it is set again in Navicat Premium or the original application.

Overwrite existing batch jobs

Check this option if you want to overwrite the existing batch jobs in Navicat Premium.

Append when batch job exists

Check this option and enter the name of existing batch job if you want to append the details to the existing batch jobs in
Navicat Premium.

Click Start button to start the import process.

Dump SQL File/Execute SQL File

Navicat allows you to backup and restore your database/schema/table(s) using the Dump SQL File and Execute SQL
File features.

To backup your database/schema/table(s), right-click it and select Dump SQL File -> Structure And Data or
Structure Only from the pop-up menu.

250
To restore your database/schema/table(s) or execute SQL file, right-click and select Execute SQL File from the pop-up
menu.

Hint: You can drag a .sql file to the table object list or a database/schema in the Connection pane. Navicat will pop up
the Execute SQL File window.

Print Database/Schema/Table Structure (Available only in Full

Version)

Navicat allows you to view and print database, schema and table structures. Right-click the database/schema/table(s)
and select Print Database or Print Schema or Print Tables from the pop-up menu.

Console

Console allows you to use a command-line interface. In other words, it provides interactive text-based screen for you
to query input and result output from database. Open the connection and select Tools -> Console from the main
menu or press F6.

Hint: You are allowed to open multiple console windows which each represents different connection.

Note: For Oracle server, you have to have SQL*Plus executable in order to get this works. By default, Navicat will look
for the SQL*Plus under client folder (e.g. ORACLE_HOME\bin). However, if Navicat cannot locate SQL*Plus
under the SQL*Plus default path, you are prompted to locate the executable.
SQL*Plus does not support Unicode.

251
Report (Available only in Navicat Premium and
Enterprise Version)
Report feature helps to deliver data in your database in a presentable manner and to turn it into valuable information.
Various kinds of reports can be built easily such as invoice, statistics, mailing labels and more. You can save your
reports for setting schedule. Click to open an object list for Report.

Hint: Report files(.rtm) are saved under the Settings Location.

To view an archive report

1. Click the Open Report Archive from the object list toolbar.
2. Browse your archive file.

To print report to file (PDF, HTML, Excel or Archive)

1. Select the report for printing in the Connection pane/the Object List pane.
2. Derecha-clamer y seleccionar Imprimir informe Como desde el pop-up menú.

Report Data

The Data tab allows you to select and manipulate the data needed for a report. These tasks are accomplished via two
visual tools: the Query Wizard and the Query Designer. These tools greatly simplify the often-difficult task of data
selection by giving you the ability to select data without requiring an in-depth knowledge of databases.

252
Report Query Wizard

You can select data from your database using an SQL query. This functionality is provided via query-based dataviews,
which can be visually created using the Query Wizard and visually maintained using the Query Designer. To open the
Query Wizard, select File -> New under Data tab and double-click the Query Wizard icon.

1. Seleccione las tablas de la consulta. Si selecciona más de una tabla, abrirá el cuadro de diálogo unir para
seleccionar el campo a.
2. Select the fields for the query.
3. Add calculated fields to the query.
4. Select common field for grouping.
5. Set searching criteria for the query.
6. Set the order for the query.
7. Enter the query (data pipeline) name.

Report Query Designer

La Diseñador de consultas se utiliza para modificar las vistas de información basadas en consultas creadas por el
Asistente para consultas. El diseñador de consultas presenta una serie de fichas de cuaderno; cada ficha representa
una parte diferente de la consulta. Para crear la canalización de datos mediante el Consulta Diseñador, Seleccione
Archivo -> Nuevo bajo Datos tAB y Haga doble clic en la Consulta Diseñador icono. O, que puede editar la
canalización de datos, haga clic en los siguientes botones de los datos tubería:

To Add Search Criteria

In the Search tab, click on the field that has been added to the list of Criteria at the bottom. Then, select the Operator
and set the Value.

To Create a Group Sum

In the Calcs tab, click on the field that has been added to the list of Calculations at the bottom. Then, select the

253
Function and enter the Field Alias you would like to use for this calculated field.

254
To Concatenate Fields

En Calcs Tab, haga clic en el campo que se ha añadido a la lista de cálculos en la parte inferior. Luego, seleccione
Expresión como el Función Escriba para el cálculo e introduzca la expresión, como Concat (FIRST_NAME, ' ',
LAST_NAME).

Para editar SQL

Puede haber veces cuando necesita utilizar funciones avanzadas de SQL a las que no se puede acceder a través de
la interfaz visual del diseñador de consultas. En estos casos, puede editar el SQL manualmente en el diseñador de
consultas. Una vez que haya editado el SQL manualmente, siempre debe utilizar la SQL Tab del diseñador de
consultas para realizar modificaciones futuras y ya no utilizar las fichas de diseño visual para modificar la consulta. En
SQL Tab, haga clic con el botón derecho sobre el texto SQL y elija Editar SQL.

255
Diseño del informe

La Diseño ficha permite que Para construir y diseño informes. La diseño espacio es dividido en dos áreas: la Workbench
y el lienzo. El Workbench se compone de barras de herramientas, paletas de componentes, reglas y otras herramientas
que se pueden utilizar para manipular la lona. La lona es la área que Contains la Informe diseño. Este es donde que
lugar la bandas y componentes que, en última instancia, controlarán el contenido de cada página del Informe.

Asistente para informes

La Asistente para informes es una de las muchas partes de ReportBuilder que refleja un nivel de profesionalismo
y atención al detalle encontrado en ningún otro producto de presentación de informes. Si usted o sus usuarios
finales han utilizado los asistentes estándar de Windows en otros productos, entonces usted será capaz de QuicKly
reconocer y utilizar el Asistente para informes ReportBuilder.

The Report Wizard can be accessed via the File -> New menu option of the Design tab. A series of screens are
presented, each requesting information about the report. When the last page is reached, either a preview or design
option can be selected. When the Finish button is clicked, it causes a report to be created and displayed as requested.

1. Seleccione la canalización de datos y campos.

2. Select common fields for grouping.
3. Select the report layout and orientation.
4. Seleccione el estilo.
5. Seleccione diseño o vista previa y Terminar.

Barras de herramientas de diseño de informes

Las distintas barras de herramientas accesibles desde el área de diseño están documentadas en esta sección. Las
barras de herramientas son acoplables. Las barras de herramientas son accesibles desde el Vista -> Barras mENU la
opción del diseñador de informes o haciendo clic con el botón derecho en el área de acoplamiento en la parte superior
del diseñador de informes.

256
Barra de herramientas de componentes estándar

257
Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a crear los componentes de informe más comúnmente usados.

Etiqueta
Se utiliza para mostrar texto. Asigne la propiedad Caption para controlar el valor del texto. Para cambiar el tamaño
de la etiqueta automáticamente para que se adapte a un título cambiante, establezca la propiedad auto-size en true.

Memo
Imprima varias líneas de texto plano en un informe. Para establecer el valor, AssIGN una lista de cadenas a la
propiedad Lines. Para cambiar el tamaño de forma dinámica del Memo durante la impresión, establezca la
propiedad Stretch en true. Utilice la propiedad ShiftRelativeTo para definir relaciones dinámicas con otros objetos
extensibles.

Enriquecido
Imprimir texto formateado. To defina el valor, asigne la propiedad enriquecido o utilice los métodos LoadFromFile
orLoadFromRTFStream. Utilice la propiedad ShiftRelativeTo para definir relaciones dinámicas con otros objetos
extensibles. En
tiempo de diseño puede utilizar el RTF incorporado del ReportBuilder Editor para cargar, modificar y guardar los datos de
texto enriquecido almacenados en archivos.

SystemVariable
Used to display common report information such as page number, page count, print date and time, date, time, etc. The
type of information displayed is controlled by the VarType property. The format is controlled by the DisplayFormat
property.

Variable (Navicat Report does not support this control)

Se utiliza para los cálculos mediante un controlador de eventos Pascal Object asignado al evento de Calc o a
un controlador de eventos de rap asignado al evento de Calc. Acceda al cuadro de diálogo cálculos (a través
del menú velocidad) o a la ficha Calc de el diseñador de informes para codificar un cálculo de rap para este
componente.

Image
Used to display bitmaps and windows metafiles in reports. Assign the Picture property of this component in order to
place an image in your report. Use the Report Designer's built-in picture dialog to load images at design-time.

Forma
Utilice este componente para imprimir varias formas (cuadrados, rectángulos, círculos, elipses). Establezca la
propiedad Shape para seleccionar un tipo de forma. Utilice las propiedades pincel y plumilla para controlar el color y el
borde respectivamente.

Línea
Mostrar líneas simples y dobles (ya sea verticales o horizontal.) Establezca la propiedad Style para controlar si la
línea es simple o doble. Establezca la propiedad Weight para controlar el grosor de línea en puntos. Establezca la
propiedad Position para controlar si la línea es vertical u horizontal.

Gráfico

258
Utilizado para display gráficos estándar (no conscientes de los datos). Este componente le permite utilizar la
tabla dentro del diseñador de informes. Puede acceder al editor de gráficos mediante un menú emergente.

Barras
Se utiliza para procesar códigos de barras. El valor de cadena asignado a la propiedad data está codificado basándose en la
barra-CodeType. Si el

259
los datos que deben codificarse se encuentran en una base de datos, utilice DBBarCode. Se admiten las siguientes
simbologías: Codabar, código 128, código 39, EAN-13, EAN-8, FIM A, B, C, Interleaved 2 de 5, poste-red, UPC-A,
UPC-E.

2DBarCode
Utilizado para representar simbologías de código de barras bidimensionales. Soporta tipos de códigos de barras PDF417 y
Maxicode.

Data Component Toolbar

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a crear repo de datoscomponentes RT.

DBText
Used for displaying values from all types of database fields. Use the DisplayFormat property to format the value.

DBMemo
Se utiliza para imprimir texto plano desde un campo Memo de una tabla de base de datos. Este control ajustará
automáticamente el texto. Establezca la propiedad Stretch en true y el componente cambiará de tamaño
dinámicamente para imprimir todo el texto. Utilice la propiedad ShiftRelativeTo en Defrelaciones dinámicas del INE con
otros objetos elásticos.

DBRichText
Used to print formatted text from a memo or BLOB field of a database table. This control will automatically word-wrap
the text. Set the Stretch property to True and the component will dynamically resize to print all of the text. Use the
ShiftRelativeTo property to define dynamic relationships with other stretchable objects.

DBCalc
Utilizado para los cálculos simples de la base de datos (suma, minuto, máximo, cuenta y promedio). El valor se puede
restablecer cuando un grupo se rompe utilizando la propiedad ResetGroup.

DbImage
Se utiliza para imprimir bitmaps o metaarchivos de Windows, que se almacenan en un campo de BLOB de base de datos.

DBChart
Permitir que los gráficos de datos se coloquen en un informe.

DBBarCode
Se utiliza para representar códigos de barras basándose en el tipo de código de barras y el valor proporcionado a
través de la propiedad Field. La se apoyan las siguientes simbologías: Codabar, código 128, código 39, EAN-13,
EAN-8, FIM A, B, C, Interleaved 2 de 5, Postnet, UPC-A, UPC-E.

DB2DBarCode
Se utiliza para representar un código de barras bidimensional basado en el tipo de código de barras y el valor
proporcionado a través del campo de propiedad. Se admiten las siguientes simbologías: PDF417, Maxicode.

Barra de herramientas de componentes avanzada

260
Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a crear componentes de informe avanzados.

261
 Región
Utilizado Para lógicamente Grupo componentes juntos. Uso la ShiftRelativeTo propiedad Para mover la región en relación Para
otro componente de cambio de tamaño dinámico (como Memo, enriquecido o tipo secundario Sub-informe).

Subinforme
Used to handle multiple master details, create sideby-side reporting effects, and hook reports together as one. If you
need a report to print within the context of a band, use a child-type subreport. If you need to hook reports together, use
a section type subreport. The PrintBehavior property determines the subreport type.

CrossTab
Utilizado para presiente los datos resumidos en un formato de cuadrícula.

Salto
El componente TppPageBreak es un control de informe que permite al usuario forzar una nueva página durante la
generación de informes. La colocación de un componente TppPageBreak en un informe hará que todos los objetos
creados después de la PageBreak (orden Z) que se va a mover a la página siguiente del informe en relación con la
posición superior del objeto salto.

Paintbox
Cree un área de Paintbox para dibujar.

Árbol de informes

Esta ventana de herramienta es acoplable en los lados izquierdo y derecho del diseñador de informes. Se puede
utilizar para organizar componentes dentro de cada banda. Los componentes seleccionados en el árbol de informes
se seleccionan en el diseño del informe. La parte superior del informe Árbol muestra THe principal Informe objeto y
cualquier subinformes anidados dentro es. Este característica puede ser útil para organizar su subinformes.

Árbol de datos

This tool window is dockable on the left and right sides of the Report Designer. It can be used to create components
within any band. Simply select a set of fields and drag the selection into the band. A set of corresponding data-aware
components will be created.
262
En la Arriba árbol vista de Datos ficha, es contiene a lista de datos tuberías Para que la Informe ha acceso. En la
inferior lista vista, se muestran todos los campos de la tubería de datos seleccionada actualmente. Los campos se
pueden seleccionar desde la vista de lista inferior y arrastrarlos a cualquier parte del diseño del informe. El
componente de datos que es apropiado para el gel campo Iven se creará junto con una etiqueta y frontera.

La Diseño TAB le permite controlar el comportamiento de arrastrar y soltar. De forma predeterminada, se crean una
etiqueta y un borde para cada componente consciente de los datos. Puede apagar la etiqueta y el borde, controlar el
Colo de la etiqueta o el borde, y controlar la fuente de la etiqueta y el componente de datos de esta ficha. Una vez que
haya configurado el comportamiento de arrastrar y soltar, se conservará para futuras sesiones de diseño.

Align or Space Toolbar

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a colocar los componentes en relación entre sí y en relación con la banda en la que
aparecen.

Alinee Izquierda
Alinee un grupo de componentes con la posición más a la izquierda del componente que se seleccionó primero.

Align Middle
Center a group of components based on the horizontal center of the component that was first selected.

Align Right
Alinee un grupo de componentes con la posición derecha del componente que se seleccionó primero.

Alinee Arriba
Alinear un grupo de componentess con la posición más destacada del componente que se seleccionó primero.

Alinee Centro
Alinee un grupo de componentes basándose en el centro vertical del componente que se seleccionó por primera vez.

Alinee Inferior
Alinear un grupo de componentes con el inferior postularion del componente que se seleccionó primero.

263
 Espacio horizontal
Espaciar un conjunto de componentes basándose en la posición más a la izquierda del primer componente
seleccionado y en la posición derecha del último componente seleccionado.

Espacio verticalmente
Espaciar un conjunto de componentes basándose en la posición más destacada del primer componente seleccionado
y en la posición inferior del último componente seleccionado.

Centrar horizontalmente en Banda

Centre un componente horizontalmente dentro de una banda.

Centro verticalmente en Banda

Centre un componente verticalmente dentro de una banda.

Barra de herramientas de tamaño

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a establecer el tamaño de los componentes.

Reduzca la anchura a Más

Determine el ancho mínimo de todos los componentes seleccionados y, a continuación, establezca el ancho de los
componentes en tvalor del sombrero.

Crezca el ancho a Más

Determine el ancho máximo de todos los componentes seleccionados y, a continuación, establezca el ancho de los
componentes en ese valor.

Reduzca la altura a Más

Determine la altura mínima de todos los componentes seleccionados y, a continuación, establezca el alto de los
componentes en ese valor.

Crezca la altura a Más

Determinar la altura máxima de todos los componentes seleccionados y, a continuación, establece la altura de los
componentes en Thavalor t.

Barra de herramientas de codazo

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a establecer la posición de los componentes.

Codazo Hasta
Mover todos los componentes seleccionados un píxel hacia arriba.

Codazo Abajo
Mueva todos los componentes seleccionados un píxel hacia abajo.

Codazo Izquierda
Mueva todos los componentes seleccionados un píxel a la izquierda.

264
 Codazo Correcto
Mueva todos los componentes seleccionados un píxel a la derecha.

Dibujar barra de herramientas

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a establecer los colores y bordes de los componentes.

Llenar Color
Para las formas, Lines, y los componentes de la región solamente. Establezca la propiedad Brush. color. Para definir
el color de un componente textual, marque la acción resaltar color de la barra de herramientas formato.

Línea Color
Sólo para las formas, líneas y componentes de la región. Establezca la propiedad Pen. color.

GRel apropiado
Sólo para uso con un componente Shape. Establezca la propiedad degradado.

Línea Grueso
Sólo para uso con un componente de línea. Establezca la propiedad weight.

Línea Estilo
Sólo para uso con un componente de línea. Establezca la propiedad Pen. Style.

Editar barra de herramientas

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a establecer la propiedad o las propiedades más importantes para el componente
seleccionado actualmente.

Ningún componente seleccionado

Componente consciente de los datos seleccionado

Esta configuración permite que la tubería de datos y el campo de datos del componente set. la lista desplegable
de la izquierda muestra la tubería de datos. La lista desplegable de la derecha muestra el nombre del campo.

Componente Label seleccionado

Aquí a etiqueta componente ha sido seleccionado en la Informe Diseñador. La Editar barra muestra un editar caja De
que el título de la etiqueta puede ser conjunto.

265
Componente de forma seleccionado
Aquí se ha seleccionado un componente Shape en el diseñador de informes. La barra de herramientas Editar
muestra los distintos tipos de formas.

Componente de línea seleccionado

Esta configuración le permite mover la línea a la parte superior, inferior, izquierda o derecha dentro de los controles de
selección de la línea.

Barra de herramientas estándar

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a guardar el diseño del informe, acceder a las opciones de impresión y
previsualización de impresión y acceder ag las operaciones de corte y pegado.

Nuevo
Crear un diseño de informe en blanco.

Abierto
Muestre el cuadro de diálogo abrir, permitiéndole abrir un diseño de informe existente.

Salvar
Guardar un diseño de informe en el archivo.

Impresión
Muestre el cuadro de diálogo Imprimir antes de enviar el informe a la impresora.

Vista previa de impresión

Mostrar la ventana vista previa de impresión.

Corte
Corte los componentes seleccionados actualmente en el portapapeles.

266
 Copia
Copie los componentes seleccionados actualmente en tel portapapeles.

Pasta
Pegue los componentes del portapapeles en el informe.

Barra de herramientas de formato

Esta barra de herramientas ayudará a establecer la fuente y los colores. También ayudará a acodar los componentes.

Nombre de fuente
Seleccione el nombre de la fuente para los componentes textuales.

Tamaño de fuente
Seleccione el tamaño de la fuente. También puede escribir este cuadro para establecer el tamaño de fuente exactamente.

Negrita
Configure la fuente en negrita.

Cursiva
Defina la fuente en cursiva.

Subrayar
Defina la fuente en subrayar.

Izquierda justificar
Izquierda justificar el texto en el componente.

Centro
Centre el texto en el componente.

Correcto Justificar
Derecho justificar el texto en el componente.

Justificar
Justificar el texto en el componente.

Fuente Color
Defina el color de la fuente.

Destacar Color
Defina el color de fondo del componente textual.

Anclajes
Especifique cómo se ancla un componente de informe a su elemento primario. Utilice anclajes para asegurarse de
que un elemento de informe mantenga su posición actual en relación con un borde de su control primario (es decir,

267
banda/región), incluso si el padre es redimensionado.

268
 Frontera
Especifique cuál de las líneas fronterizas externas de un componente de informe se procesará.

Traer Adelante
Lleve el componente un paso adelante.

Llevar a Frente
Lleve el componente al frente. Los componentes en la impresión delantera Duran, y los componentes en la impresión
trasera primero. Utilice el árbol de informes para ver la capa exacta de componentes dentro de la banda.

Enviar Atrás
Envíe el componente un paso hacia atrás.

Enviar a Atrás
Envíe el componente a la parte posterior. Los componentes en la impresión delantera Duran, y los componentes en la
impresión trasera primero. Utilice el árbol de informes para ver la capa exacta de componentes dentro de la banda.

Diálogos de informes

La Impresión el diálogo es automáticamente se muestra cuando se envía el informe a la impresora, lo que le permite
seleccionar las páginas, el número de copias y la impresora para el informe. Cuando la AllowPrintToFile o
AllowPrintToArchive propiedades del informe son habilitado, Este diálogo muestra adicional impresión Para archivo
Opciones. Para abierto Este diálogo, Seleccione la Archivo -> Impresión opción de menú del informe Diseñador.

La Configuración de página se puede acceder al diálogo desde el Archivo -> Configuración de página opción
de menú del diseñador de informes. Puede establecer las propiedades de la impresora, tamaño de página, origen
de papel, diseño y márgenes en el cuadro de diálogo Configurar página.

269
La Grupos el diálogo es accesible a través del Informe -> Grupos opción de menú del informe Ddiseñador. Puede
separar su Informe en diferentes secciones usando grupos. A número de Opciones son disponible Para control la
comportamiento de cada Grupo. Para ejemplo, que puede Quiero cada Grupo Para empezar en a Nuevo Página o
Para reimpresión la Grupo Rúbrica Cuando la Grupo continúa en adicional páginas. Otro poderoso característica es la
Mantener Grupo juntos opción, que puede ser utilizado Para asegurar que todos de la información para un grupo
encaja en un Página.

La Imprimir en configuración de archivo el diálogo es accesible a través del Archivo -> Imprimir en
configuración de archivo opción de menú del diseñador de informes. Este cuadro de diálogo se utiliza para
especificar el formato y el contenido del archivo ASCII que se creará si el informe se imprime en el archivo.

La Datos se puede acceder al diálogo desde el Informe -> Datos opción de menú de el diseñador de informes.
Se puede utilizar para especificar la canalización de datos para el informe.

270
La Opciones de Grid el diálogo es accesible a través del Vista -> Opciones de Grid menú del diseñador de
informes. Utilice el cuadro de diálogo de opciones de cuadrícula para controlar cómo el espacio de trabajo la
cuadrícula se dibuja y si los elementos de diseño se ajustan automáticamente a los puntos de cuadrícula.

La Configuración de esquema el diálogo es accesible a través del Informe -> Configuración de esquema
opción de menú del diseñador de informes. Utilice este cuadro de diálogo para controlar el comportamiento de la
generación de esquemas de informes. Cuando está activada, una estructura de árbol de esquema se genera
dinámicamente por el motor de informes y la representa el previsor de informes.

La Encontrar Texto Configuración diálogo es accesible Via la Informe -> Encontrar Texto Configuración menú
opción de la Informe Diseñador. Utilice este cuadro de diálogo para configurar las opciones de búsqueda de texto
utilizadas por el previsor de informes. Cuando está activada, el previsualizador se puede utilizar para encontrar y
resaltar texto que aparece in las páginas del Informe.

271
Diseño de informes

Hay muchas opciones especiales para establecer el diseño. Puede simplemente hacer clic con el botón derecho en
los componentes y habilitar las siguientes opciones:

Autopantalla
Determinar si se mostrará automáticamente el contenido de un BLOB en un campo de base de datos en un memo o un
componente de imagen.

AutoSize
El componente Report redimensiona el ancho y la longitud.

AutoSizeFont
Defina el texto legible en un tamaño de fuente aceptado estándar basándose en el tamaño del componente de código de
barras.

Niño
El informe se imprime hasta su finalización, utilizando el ancho de los componentes del subinforme como el ancho de
la página y extendiéndose sobre varias páginas hasta que se complete la impresión.

DirectDraw
Indicar que la imagen se enviará directamente a la impresora o a un mapa de bits intermedio y luego copiado en la impresora.

Fijo
Una sola página imprime basándose en las dimensiones y la posición del componente de subinforme.

MaintainAspectRatio
Mantenga la proporción de anchura y altura original de imagen.

NewPrintJob
Determinar si se ha iniciado un nuevo trabajo de impresión cuando el subreel puerto se envía a la impresora.

GraphicType
Indique el tipo de objeto gráfico: Bitmap, GIF, icono, JPEG y metarchivo.

KeepTogether
Controle la paginación del componente cuando el contenido no quepa en la página actual.

Búsqueda
Mostrar cálculos de resumen en la banda de título, los cálculos de pie de página en la banda de encabezado
de página, los cálculos de pie de grupo en la banda de encabezado de grupo y los cálculos de pie de
columna en el encabezado de columna.

ParentHeight
Fuerce la altura del componente a MATaltura CH del componente padre. El padre puede ser una banda o una
región.
272
ParentWidth
Fuerce el ancho del componente para que coincida con el ancho del componente primario.

ParentPrinterSetup
Determina si los valores de PrinterSetup PRoperty debe copiarse del informe principal.

PrintHumanReadable
Emite la versión legible del código de barras (es decir, las letras o números reales).

ReprintOnOverFlow
Se utiliza para imprimir componentes que no se estiran cuando los componentes de estiramiento están imprimiendo páginas
adicionales.

ReprintOnSubsequent
Utilícelo junto con la propiedad SuppressRepeatedValues. Cuando SuppressRepeatedValues se establece en true, y
las líneas de detalle se han desbordado en una nueva página, puede forzar el valor a reimprimir en la primera línea de
detalle de la nueva página estableciendo ReprintOnSubseQuent a true.

ResetPageNo
Habilitar numeración de páginas de subconjuntos. En los números de página de subconjuntos, se muestran los
números de página y el recuento de páginas del subinforme en lugar de los números de página del informe maestro.

Sección
El informe se imprime como una sección separada, iniciando una nueva page cuando comienza y termina la última
página cuando termina. La propiedad PrinterSetup se utiliza para determinar el tamaño de página y la
configuración de la impresora.

ShiftRelativeTo
Se utiliza para especificar el posicionamiento vertical que debe tener lugar entre varios compon de estiramientolos padres en
una banda.

Estiramiento
Determine whether the image is scaled to fit inside the component.

StretchWithParent
Allow a shape or line to expand or contract based on the change in height of the band or region in which it is contained.

SuppressRepeatedValues
When the value of a field (as determined by the DataField property) is the same across several records, the
SuppressRepeatedValues property allows you to print the value only once each time the field value changes.

TraverseAllData
Indique que el subinforme seguirá imprimiendo (imprima en páginas adicionales en la misma posición exacta) hasta
que se atraviesen todos los datos. De forma predeterminada, el subinforme de tipo fijo trunca los datos.

273
Vista previa del informe

La Vista previa TAB contiene el reInforme ndered. Puede controlar y ver la salida del informe. Se muestra un
esquema de nodos de página en la izquierda lado de la forma, adyacente Para la Página espectador. Uso la
Impresión botón Para Enviar Informe salida Para impresora o a un archivo de salida, como PDF.

Para crear un Informe de búsqueda, habilite el AutoSearch opción en el Diseñador de consultas.

A continuación, puede hacer clic en el Datos de búsqueda para entrar en la búsqueda criterios.

274
Seguridad del servidor
Navicat proporciona la herramienta de administración de seguridad para su servidor. Puede Agregar, editar, eliminar
usuarios, conceder/revocar privilegios en la base de datos seleccionada y sus objetos de base de datos. Clic
para abrir una lista de objetos para Usuario. El panel de lista de objetos muestra todos los usuarios That existen en el
servidor.

Seguridad de MySQL/MariaDB

La información sobre los privilegios del usuario se almacena en el usuario, dB, host, tables_priv, columns_priv, y
procs_priv mesas en el MySQL base de datos (es, en la base de datos denominada MySQL). El servidor MySQL lee
la estafatiendas de estas mesas cuando se inicia.

El control de acceso de MySQL implica dos etapas cuando se ejecuta un programa cliente que se

conecta al servidor: etapa 1: el servidor comprueba si debería permitirle conectarse.

Etapa 2: asumiendo que se puede conectar, el servidor comprueba cada sentencia que emite para determinar si
tiene privilegios suficientes para realizarla. Por ejemplo: crear privilegio de tabla, privilegio de tabla de entrega o
modificar privilegio de tabla.

El servidor utiliza el usuario, dB, y host mesas en el MySQL base de datos en ambas etapas de control de acceso.

Diseñador de usuario de MySQL/MariaDB

Propiedades

generales Nombre

de usuario
Establecer nombre para el usuario.

Host
Nombre de host en el que se sitúa la base de datos o la dirección IP del servidor.

Contraseña
Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.

Propiedades avanzadas

Max consultas por hora, Actualizaciones máximas por hora, Conexiones máximas por hora
Estas opciones limitan el número de consultas, actualizaciones e inicios de sesión que un usuario puede realizar
durante un período de una hora determinado. Si se establecen como 0 (el valor por defecto), This significa que no hay
limitación para ese usuario.
270
Conexiones de usuario máx.
Esta opción limita el número máximo de conexiones simultáneas que puede realizar la cuenta. Si se establece como 0 (el

271
predeterminado), el max_user_connections la variable de sistema determina el número de conexiones
simultáneas de la cuenta.

Usar encriptación OLD_PASSWORD

El mecanismo de hasheo de contraseñas se actualizó en MySQL 4.1 para proporcionar una mejor seguridad y
reducir el riesgo de contraseñas being interceptado. Sin embargo, este nuevo mecanismo sólo es entendido por los
servidores y clientes de MySQL 4.1 (y nuevos), lo que puede resultar en algunos problemas de compatibilidad. Un
cliente 4.1 o más reciente puede conectarse a un servidor pre-4.1, ya que el cliente entiende tanto el antiguo y
nuevos mecanismos de hasheo de contraseñas. Sin embargo, un cliente pre-4.1 que intente conectarse a un
servidor 4.1 o más reciente puede tener dificultades.

Habilite esta opción si desea mantener una compatibilidad retroactiva con clientes anteriores a 4.1 en circunstancias
en las que el servidor generaría de otro modo hashes de contraseña largos. La opción no afecta a la autenticación (los
clientes 4.1 y posteriores todavía pueden utilizar AccountTS que tienen hashes de contraseña largos), pero impide la
creación de un hash de contraseña largo en el usuario tabla como resultado de una operación de cambio de
contraseña.

Tipo SSL
MySQL puede comprobar los atributos del certificado X509 además de la autenticación habitual que se basado en el
nombre de usuario y la contraseña. Para especificar las opciones relacionadas con SSL para una cuenta MySQL,
utilice el Requieren cláusula de la Grant Declaración.

Cualquier Esta opción le indica al servidor que sólo permite conexiones encriptadas con SSL para la cuenta.
X509 Esto significa que el cliente debe tener un certificado válido, pero que el certificado exacto, emisor y
el sujeto no importa. El único requisito es que sea posible verificar su firma con uno de los
certificados de CA.
Especificado Emisor
Esto coloca la restricción en los intentos de conexión que el cliente debe presentar un certificado
X509 válido emitido por CA emisor. Si el cliente presenta un certificado que es válido pero tiene un
emisor diferente, el servidor rechaza la conexión. Uso de X509 CERTificates siempre implica
encriptación, por lo que la opción SSL es innecesaria en este caso.

Asunto
Esto coloca la restricción en los intentos de conexión que el cliente debe presentar un certificado
X509 válido que contiene el asunto Asunto. Si el cliente presenta un CErtificate que es válido pero
tiene un tema diferente, el servidor rechaza la conexión.

Cifrado
Esto es necesario para asegurar que se utilicen cifrados y longitudes clave de suficiente fuerza. El
propio SSL puede ser débil si los algoritmos antiguos que usan claves de encriptación cortas son
utilizado. Con esta opción, puede solicitar que se utilice un método de cifrado específico para
permitir una conexión.

Privilegios de servidor

272
En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido opción contra el privilegio de servidor que aparece en Privilegio
para asignar este usuario a tener ese privilegio. Se pueden conceder múltiples privilegios.

273
Privilegios

Para editar privilegios de objeto específicos para el usuario, haga clic en Agregar privilegios para abrir la ventana y
seguir los pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
3. En la cuadrícula, compruebe Estado opción contra el privilegio que aparece en Privilegio para asignar este
usuario a tener ese privilegio. Múltiples privilegios pueden ser concedido.

Seguridad de Oracle

Oracle administra los permisos de acceso a bases de datos utilizando usuarios y roles. Los usuarios poseen objetos
de esquema (por ejemplo, tablas, vistas) y pueden asignar privilegios a esos objECTS a otros usuarios para controlar
quién tiene acceso a qué objetos.

Además de las cuentas de usuario creadas, la base de datos incluye una serie de cuentas de usuario que se crean
automáticamente al realizar la instalación. Cuentas administrativas: Sys, Sistema, SYSMAN, y DBSNMP. Las
cuentas administrativas son cuentas altamente privilegiadas para realizar tareas administrativas como iniciar y
detener la base de datos, administrar la memoria y el almacenamiento de la base de datos, crear y administrar
usuarios de bases de datos, etc. Su base de datos también puede incluir esquemas de ejemplo (Scott, HR, OE,
OC, PM, IX y SH), que son un conjunto de esquemas enlazados que permiten que la documentación de Oracle y
los materiales de instrucción de Oracle ilustren las tareas comunes de la base de datos.

Al crear un objeto de base de datos, se convierte en su propietario. De forma predeterminada, sólo el propietario de
un objeto puede hacer cualquier cosa con el objeto. Para permitir que otros usuarios lo utilicen, se deben conceder
privilegios. (sin embargo, los usuarios que tienen el atributo superusuario pueden ALWays acceso a cualquier objeto.)

Normalmente, sólo el propietario del objeto (o un superusuario) puede conceder o revocar privilegios en un objeto. Sin
embargo, es posible conceder un privilegio Opción admin/Opción de concesión, lo que da al destinatario el derecho
de concederlo a su vez a OTella. Si la opción de concesión es revocada posteriormente, todos los que recibieron el
privilegio de ese destinatario (directamente o a través de una cadena de subvenciones) perderán el privilegio.

Nota: El nombre especial Público es accesible para cada usuario de la base de datos, todos los privilegiosND roles
concedidos a Público son accesibles para cada usuario de la base de datos.

Diseñador de usuarios de Oracle

Propiedades

generales Nombre

de usuario
Establecer nombre para el usuario.

274
Autenticación
Seleccione el método de autenticación.

Contraseñ Contraseña
a

275
 Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.

Caducar contraseña
Caducar la contraseña del usuario. Esta configuración obliga al usuario o al DBA a cambiar la contraseña
antes de que el usuario pueda iniciar sesión en la base de datos.
Externos Un usuario externo debe ser autenticado por un servicio externo, como un sistema operativo o un
servicio de terceras partes.
Global Un usuario global debe ser autorizado por el servicio de directorio de empresas (directorio de Internet de
Oracle).

Nombre X. 500
Especifique el nombre X. 509 en el servicio de directorio empresarial que identifica a este usuario.

Espacio de tabla predeterminado

Elija el espacio de tablas predeterminado para los objetos que crea el usuario.

Espacio de tabla temporal

Seleccione el espacio de tablas o el grupo de tablas para el tempo del usuariosegmentos rary.

Perfil
Elija el perfil que asigne al usuario.

Bloquear cuenta
Bloquear la cuenta del usuario y desactivar el acceso.

Miembro de

En la rejilla, Compruebe Concedido, Admin Opción o Como Defecto opción contra la papel lista en Papel Nombre
Para asignar Este usuario para ser miembro del rol seleccionado. Múltiples roles pueden ser concedido.

Cuotas

En la cuadrícula, especifique la cantidad máxima de espacio que el usuario puede asignar en los espacios de tablas.
Introduzca el Cuota y elegir el Unidad de los Tablas. Ilimitado permite al usuario asignar espacios en el espacio de
tablas sin enlazar. Se pueden establecer varios espacios de tablas.

Privilegios de servidor

En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido o Opción admin opción contra el privilegio de servidor que aparece en
Privilegio para asignar este usuario a tener ese privilegio. Se pueden conceder múltiples privilegios.

Privilegios

Para editar privilegios de objeto específicos para el usuario, haga clic en Agregar privilegios para abrir la ventana y
seguir los pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

276
2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.

277
 3. En la rejilla, Compruebe Concedido o Grant Opción opción contra la privilegio lista en Privilegio Para
asignar Este usuario tener ese privilegio. Múltiples privilegios pueden ser concedido.

Diseñador de roles Oracle

Propiedades

generales Nombre

de rol
Defina el nombre del rol.

Autenticación
Seleccione el método de autenticación.

Contraseña Contraseña
Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.
Externos Un usuario externo debe ser autenticado por un servicio externo, como un sistema
operativo
o un servicio de terceras partes, antes de habilitar el rol.
Global Un usuario global debe estar autorizado a utilizar el rol por el servicio de directorio de
empresas antes de
el papel es enabled en login.
No identificado La función está autorizada por la base de datos y no se requiere ninguna contraseña para
habilitar el rol.

Miembro de

En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido o Opción admin opción contra el rol que aparece en Nombre de rol
asignar este rol como miembro del rol seleccionado. Se pueden conceder múltiples roles.

Miembros

En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido o Opción admin opción contra el usuario que aparece en Miembro para
asignar al usuario seleccionado como miembro de esta función. Se pueden conceder múltiples usuarios.

Privilegios de servidor

En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido o Opción admin opción contra el privilegio de servidor que aparece en
Privilegio asignar este rol para tener ese privilegio. Multilos privilegios de PLE pueden ser concedidos.

Privilegios

Para editar privilegios de objeto específicos para rol, haga clic en Agregar privilegios para abrir la ventana y seguir los
pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
278
3. En la cuadrícula, compruebe Grant opción contra el privilegio que aparece en Privilegio asignar este rol para
tener ese privilegio. Múltiples privilegios pueden ser concedido.

279
Seguridad en PostgreSQL

PostgreSQL administra permisos de acceso a bases de datos usando usuarios y grupos. Los usuarios poseen
objetos de base de datos (por ejemplo, tablas) y pueden asignar privilegios en esos objetos a otros usuarios para
controlar quién tiene acceso a qué objetos.

Nota: A partir de PostgreSQL version 8.1, los usuarios y los grupos ya no eran distintos tipos de entidades, ahora sólo
hay roles. Cualquier rol puede actuar como usuario, grupo o ambos. El concepto de roles subsume los conceptos de
usuarios y grupos.

Sólo un superusuario (un usuario al que se le permiteTS) puede Agregar/eliminar usuarios. PostgreSQL instala un
solo superusuario por defecto llamado Postgres. Todos los demás usuarios deben ser agregados por este usuario, o
por otro superusuario agregado posteriormente.

Al crear un objeto de base de datos, se convierte en su propietario. Por defecto, sólo tel dueño de un objeto puede
hacer cualquier cosa con el objeto. Para permitir que otros usuarios lo utilicen, se deben conceder privilegios. (sin
embargo, los usuarios que tienen el atributo superusuario siempre pueden tener acceso a cualquier objeto.)

Normalmente, sólo el propietario del objeto (o un superusuario) puede conceder o revocar privilegios en un objeto. Sin
embargo, es posible conceder un privilegio Con la opción Grant, lo que da al destinatario el derecho de concederlo a
su vez a otros. Si la opción Grant es Subsequently revocado a continuación, todos los que recibieron el privilegio de
que el destinatario (directamente o a través de una cadena de subvenciones) perderá el privilegio.

Nota: El nombre especial público se puede utilizar para conceder un privilegio a cada función (usuario/grupo) del sistema.

PostgreSQL Servidor 7.3 a 8.0

PostgreSQL versión 7.3 a 8.0 administra permisos de acceso a bases de datos usando Usuarios y Grupos.

Diseñador de usuarios de PostgreSQL

Propiedades

generales Nombre

de usuario
Establecer nombre para el usuario.

ID de usuario
Especifique un identificador para el usuario. Esto normalmente no es necesario, pero puede ser útil si necesita volver
a crear el propietario de un objeto huérfano. Si no se especifica esto, el identificador de usuario asignado más alto
más uno (con un mínimo de 100) se usará como predeterminado.

Password
280
Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.

Nota: Si no planea utilizar la autenticación de contraseña puede omitir esta opción, pero entonces el usuario no podrá
conectarse si decide cambiar a autenticación de contraseña.

281
Encriptación de contraseña
Esta opción controla si la contraseña está almacenada Cifrado o Sin en los catálogos del sistema. (si no se especifica
ninguno, el comportamiento predeterminado se determina mediante el parámetro de configuración
password_encryption.)

Exfecha Piry
Establezca una fecha y una hora después de la cual la contraseña del usuario ya no es válida. Si se omite esta
cláusula, la contraseña será válida para todos los tiempos.

Superusuario
Marque esta opción para definir al usuario como superusuario.

Puede crear base de datos

Marque esta opción para definir al usuario que se le permitirá crear bases de datos.

Miembro de

En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido opción contra el grupo que aparece en Nombre del grupo para
asignar este usuario a ser un miembro del grupo seleccionado. Se pueden conceder varios grupos.

Privilegios

Para editar privilegios de objeto específicos para el usuario, haga clic en Agregar privilegios para abrir la ventana y
seguir los pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
3. En la rejilla, Compruebe Concedido o Grant Opción opción contra la privilegio lista en Privilegio Para
asignar Este usuario tener ese privilegio. Múltiples privilegios pueden ser concedido.

Diseñador de grupo PostgreSQL

Propiedades

generales Nombre

del grupo
Defina el nombre del grupo.

ID. de grupo
Especifique un identificador para el grupo. Esto normalmente no es necesario, pero puede ser útil si necesita volver a
crear un grupo al que se hace referencia en los permisos de algún objeto. Si esto no se especifica, el identificador de
grupo más alto asignado más uno (con un mínimo de 100) será nosotrosEd como default.

Miembros

282
En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido opción contra el usuario que aparece en Miembro asignar al usuario
seleccionado para que sea miembro de este grupo. Se pueden conceder múltiples usuarios.

283
Privilegios

Para editar privilegios de objeto específicos para el grupo, haga clic en Agregar privilegios para abrir la ventana y
seguir los pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
3. En la cuadrícula, cdiablos Grant opción contra el privilegio que aparece en Privilegio asignar este
grupo para tener ese privilegio. Múltiples privilegios pueden ser concedido.

PostgreSQL Server 8.1 o superior

A partir de la versión 8.1 de PostgreSQL, los usuarios y los grupos ya no eran parientes distintosDS de entidades, ahora sólo
hay
Papeles. Cualquier rol puede actuar como usuario, grupo o ambos. El concepto de roles subsume los conceptos de usuarios
y grupos.

Diseñador de funciones de PostgreSQL

Propiedades

generales Nombre

de rol
Defina el nombre del rol.

ID. de rol
Especifique un identificador para el rol. Esto normalmente no es necesario, pero puede ser útil si necesita volver a
crear el propietario de un objeto huérfano. Si no se especifica esto, el ID de rol asignado más alto más uno (con un
mínimo de 100) se usará como predeterminado.

Nota: In versiones de PostgreSQL 8.1 o superior, se omitirá el identificador especificado, pero se aceptará para
compatibilidad inversa.

Puede iniciar sesión

Compruebe Este opción Para crear a papel que permite Para login. A papel tener Este opción puede ser Pensé de
como a usuario. Papeles sin este los atributos son útiles para administrar los privilegios de la base de datos, pero no
son usuarios en el sentido usual de la palabra.

Contraseña
Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.

Nota: Si no planea utilizar la autenticación de contraseña puede omitir esta opción, pero entonces el rol no podrá
conectarse si decide cambiar a autenticación de contraseña.

Encriptación de contraseña
284
Esta opción controla si la contraseña está almacenada Cifrado o Sin en los catálogos del sistema. (si no se especifica
ninguno, el comportamiento predeterminado se determina mediante el parámetro de configuración
password_encryption.)

Límite de conexión
Si la función puede iniciar sesión, especifica cuántas conexiones simultáneas puede realizar el rol. -1 (por defecto) significa
sin límite.

285
Fecha de caducidad
Establezca una fecha y una hora después de la cual la contraseña del rol ya no es válida. Si se omite esta cláusula, la
contraseña será válida para todos los tiempos.

Superusuario
Marque esta opción para determinar si la nueva función es un superusuario, que puede anular todas las restricciones
de acceso de la base de datos.

Puede crear base de datos

Marque esta opción para definir la capacidad de una función para crear bases de datos.

Puede crear rol

Marque esta opción para permitir CREroles Ating.

Heredar privilegios
Marque esta opción para determinar si una función hereda los privilegios de los roles de los que es miembro.

Puede actualizar el catálogo del sistema

Marque esta opción para permitir la capacidad de la función de actualizar el catálogo del sistema.

Miembro de

En la cuadrícula, compruebe Concedido o Opción admin opción contra el rol que aparece en Nombre de rol
asignar este rol como miembro del rol seleccionado. Se pueden conceder múltiples roles.

Miembro

En la rejilla, Compruebe Concedido o Admin Opción opción contra la papel lista en Miembro Para asignar la
seleccionado papel Para ser un miembro de este papel. Múltiples roles pueden ser concedido.

Privilegios

Para editar privilegios de objeto específicos para rol, haga clic en Agregar privilegios para abrir la ventana y seguir los
pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
3. En la rejilla, Compruebe Concedido o Grant Opción opción contra la privilegio lista en Privilegio Para
asignar Este papel tener ese privilegio. Múltiples privilegios pueden ser concedido.

Seguridad de SQL Server

El servidor SQL Server SA iniciar sesión es un principal de nivel de servidor. De forma predeterminada, se crea
cuando se instala una instancia. En SQL Server 2005 o superior, la base de datos predeterminada de SA es
Maestro. Se trata de un cambio de comportamiento de versiones anteriores de SQL Server.

286
De forma predeterminada, la base de datos incluye un Comentarios usuario cuando se crea una base de datos.
Permisos concedidos a la Comentarios el usuario es heredado por usuarios que no tienen un usuario accouNT en la
base de datos. La Comentarios el usuario no puede desactivarse, pero puede deshabilitarse al revocar su permiso
Connect. El permiso Connect se puede revocar ejecutando Revocar conexión de invitado en cualquier base de datos
que no sea Maestro o tempdb.

En SQL Server, tel concepto de permisos es usar los principales y asegurables. Los directores son los individuos,
grupos y procesos concedidos acceso a SQL Server. Asegurables son el servidor, la base de datos y los objetos que
contiene la base de datos. Los directores pueden ser arreglados en un hierarchy. Para administrar fácilmente los
permisos en sus bases de datos, SQL Server proporciona varios roles que son los principales de seguridad que
agrupan a otros directores. Los roles de nivel de base de datos son de toda la base de datos en su ámbito de
permisos.

Principios de nivel de Windows

 Windows DomAin Login

 Inicio de sesión local

de Windows SQL Server-

LEVEL principal

 Nivel de base de

datos de inicio de sesión

de SQL Server Directores

 Base Usuario
 Base Papel
 Aplicación Papel

Login
SQL Servidor utiliza dos maneras Para validar conexiones Para SQL Servidor bases: Autenticación de Windows y SQL
Autenticación de servidor. SQL Servidor Autenticación utiliza login registros Para validar la conexión. A Login objeto
expone a Inicio de sesión de SQL Server registro.

Rol de servidor
Las funciones de nivel de servidor también se denominan roles de servidor fijos porque no se pueden crear
nuevas funciones de nivel de servidor y no se pueden cambiar los permisos de las funciones de servidor fijos.
Puede agregar conexiones de SQL Server, cuentas de Windows y grupos de Windows a roles de nivel de
servidor. Cada miembro de una función de servidor fija puede agregar otros inicios de sesión a ese mismo rol.

Usuario de base de datos

Para ganancia acceso Para a base, a login debe ser identificado como a base usuario. La base usuario es
generalmente conocido por el mismo nombre que el login, pero se puede crear un usuario de base de datos (para un
287
login) con un diferente nombre.

Función de base de datos

Las funciones de base de datos fijas se definen en el nivel de base de datos y existen en cada base de datos. Puede
agregar cualquier cuenta de base de datos y otra función de SQL Servers en roles a nivel de base de datos. Cada
miembro de una función de base de datos fija puede agregar otros inicios de sesión a ese mismo rol.

288
Función de aplicación
Una función de aplicación es un principal de base de datos que permite que una aplicación se ejecute con sus
propios permisos de usuario. Puede utilizar roles de aplicación para permitir el acceso a datos específicos a sólo
aquellos usuarios que se conecten a través de una aplicación concreta. A diferencia de DATabase roles, roles de
aplicación no contienen miembros y están inactivos de forma predeterminada.

Diseñador de inicio de sesión de SQL Server

Propiedades generales para SQL

Server 2000 Nombre de inicio de

sesión
Establecer nombre para iniciar sesión.

Tipo de autenticación
Seleccione el tipo de autenticación.

SQL Server Contraseña

Autenticación Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña
cuadro de texto.

Especificar contraseña antigua

Marque esta opción para introducir la contraseña antigua utilizada por esta
cuenta.

Base de datos predeterminada

Seleccione la base de datos predeterminada al iniciar sesión.

Idioma predeterminado
Seleccione el idioma de visualización predeterminado al iniciar sesión.
Autenticación de Windows Base de datos predeterminada
Seleccione la base de datos predeterminada al iniciar sesión.

Idioma predeterminado
Seleccione el idioma de visualización predeterminado al iniciar sesión.

Habilitado
Compruebe para activar el inicio de sesión.

Propiedades generales para SQL Server 2005 o

posterior Nombre de inicio de sesión

Establecer nombre para iniciar sesión.

Tipo de autenticación

289
Seleccione el tipo de autenticación.

SQL Server Contrase

ña
Autenticación

290
 Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña
texto caja.

Especificar contraseña antigua

Marque esta opción para introducir la contraseña antigua utilizada por esta
cuenta.

Aplicar política de contraseña

Puede comprobar esta opción para forzar la contraseña para seguir la
política de contraseña de SQL Server.

Aplicar caducidad de contraseña

Puede comprobar esta opción para forzar la contraseña a tener fecha de
caducidad.

El usuario debe cambiar la contraseña en el próximo inicio de sesión

Puede comprobar esta opción para obligar al usuario a cambiar la
contraseña cada vez que inicie sesión.

Base de datos predeterminada

Seleccione la base de datos predeterminada al iniciar sesión.

Idioma predeterminado
Seleccione el idioma de visualización predeterminado al iniciar sesión.
Autenticación de Base de datos predeterminada
Windows
Seleccione la base de datos predeterminada al iniciar sesión.

Idioma predeterminado
Seleccione el idioma de visualización predeterminado al iniciar sesión.
Asignado al certificado Nombre del certificado
Seleccione el nombre del certificado.
Mapeado a asimétrico Nombre de clave asimétrica
Clave Seleccione el nombre de la clave asimétrica.

Nota: SQL Server contiene funciones que permiten crear y administrar certificados y claves para su uso con el servidor
y la base de datos. Puede utilizar certificados generados externamente o SQL Server puede generar
certificados. Los certificados y las llaves asimétricas son ways para usar encriptación asimétrica. No hay
diferencia entre los dos mecanismos para el algoritmo criptográfico, y ninguna diferencia en la fuerza dada la
misma longitud de clave.

Habilitado
Compruebe para activar el inicio de sesión.

Credencial
Puede agregar credenciales en determinadas rol de este login. Una credencial es un registro que contiene la
información de autenticación (credenciales) requerida para conectarse a un recurso fuera de SQL Server. SQL
291
Server utiliza internamente esta información.

Propiedades generales para SQL Azure

292
Nombre de inicio de sesión
Establecer nombre para iniciar sesión.

Contraseña
Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.

Especificar contraseña antigua

Marque esta opción para introducir la contraseña antigua utilizada por esta cuenta.

Habilitado
Compruebe para activar el inicio de sesión.

Papeles

En la rejilla, Compruebe la servidor papel Para asignar Este servidor login Para ser a miembro de seleccionado servidor
papel. Múltiples papeles puede ser concedida.

Nota: Cada inicio de sesión de SQL Server pertenece a la público función de servidor. Cuando un principal de
servidor no ha sido otorgado o denegado SpecIFIC permisos en un objeto asegurable, el usuario hereda los
permisos concedidos a público en ese objeto. Sólo asignar público permisos en cualquier objeto cuando
desea que el objeto esté disponible para todos los usuarios.
SQL Azure no es compatible.

Mapeo de usuarios

En la cuadrícula, compruebe el Base y entrar en el Usuario y Esquema predeterminado para crear usuario para
iniciar sesión en la base de datos y especificar el primer esquema será buscado por el servidor.

Nota: SQL Azure no es compatible.

Permisos de servidor

Usted puede comprobar Grant, Con la opción Grant o Negar contra los permisos del servidor enumerados en
Permiso para asignar este login para tener ese permiso. Se pueden conceder varios permisos.

Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior.

Permisos de extremo

Usted puede comprobar Alterar, ConneCT, Control, Tomar posesión o Ver definición contra el extremo que aparece en
Final
para asignar este inicio de sesión para que tenga el permiso Endpoint. Se pueden

conceder varios permisos. Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior.

Permisos de inicio de sesión

293
Usted puede comprobar Alterar, Control, Suplantar o Ver definición contra el login del servidor que aparece en
Login para asignar este inicio de sesión del servidor para tener ese permiso de inicio de sesión. Se pueden
conceder varios permisos.

Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior.

Diseñador de funciones de servidor SQL Server

Propiedades generales

En Rol miembro cuadrícula, Compruebe la función del servidor para asignar la función de servidor seleccionada
como miembro de esta función del servidor. Se pueden conceder múltiples roles.

Nota: SQL Azure no admite la función de servidor.

Diseñador de usuarios de bases de datos SQL Server

Propiedades generales para SQL

Server 2000 Nombre de usuario

Defina el nombre del usuario de la base de datos.

Nombre de inicio de sesión

Asigne el inicio de sesión de SQL Server que utiliza este usuario de base de datos. Cuando este inicio de sesión de
SQL Server entra en el base de datos, se recuperará la información de este usuario de base de datos.

Propiedades generales para SQL Server 2005 o posterior y SQL Azure

Nombre de usuario
Defina el nombre del usuario de la base de datos.

Tipo de usuario
Seleccione el tipo de usuario de base de datos.

Para iniciar Nombre de inicio de sesión

sesión
Asigne el inicio de sesión de SQL Server que utiliza este usuario de base de datos.
Cuando este inicio de sesión de SQL Server ingrese a la base de datos, recuperará la
información de este usuario de base de datos.

Esquema predeterminado
Puede especificar el primer esquema que se buscará en el servidor para estos
datosusuario base.
Para el Nombre del certificado
certificado
Especifique el certificado para este usuario de
base de datos. Nota: SQL Azure no es
294
 compatible.

Para asimétrico Nombre de clave asimétrica

295
 Clave Especifique la clave asimétrica para este usuario de base de datos.
Nota: SQL Azure no es compatible.
Sin login Esquema predeterminado
Puede especificar el primer esquema que se buscará en el servidor para este
usuario de base de datos.

Papeles

En la cuadrícula, compruebe el rol de asignar este usuario de base de datos para que sea miembro de la función de base de
datos seleccionada. Se pueden conceder múltiples roles.

Cada usuario de la base de datos pertenece al público función de base de datos. Cuando un usuario no ha
sido concedido o negado permisos específicos en un asegurable, el usuario hereda los permisos concedidos a
público en ese seguro.

Esquemas propios

Puede consultar el esquema que aparece en Esquemas propios Tab para cambiar la propiedad de esquema

a este usuario de base de datos. Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior y SQL AZURE.

Permisos de base de datos

En la cuadrícula, compruebe Grant, Con la opción Grant o Negar contra el permiso de base de datos enumerado
en Permiso para asignar este usuario de base de datos a tener ese permiso en la base de datos. Se pueden
conceder varios permisos.

Objeto permissioNS

Para editar el permiso de objeto específico para el usuario de base de datos, haga clic Agregar permiso
para abrir la ventana y seguir los pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
3. En la cuadrícula, compruebe Grant, Con la opción Grant o Negar contra el permiso que aparece en
Privilegio para asignar este usuario de base de datos a tener ese permiso. Los permisos múltiples se
pueden concedido.

Diseñador de funciones de base de datos SQL Server

Propiedades

generales Nombre

de rol
Set nayo para la función de base de datos.
296
Propietario
Puede introducir el propietario para esta función de base de datos. Este propietario puede ser usuario de base de
datos o rol de base de datos. Si no se especifica el propietario, esta función de base de datos será propiedad del
usuario que ejecuta el Crear rol.

297
Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior y SQL Azure.

En Rol miembro cuadrícula, compruebe el usuario de la base de datos para asignar el usuario de base de datos
seleccionado para que sea miembro de esta función de base de datos. Se pueden conceder múltiples roles.

Esquemas propios

Puede consultar el esquema que aparece en Esquemas propios Tab para cambiar la propiedad de esquema

a esta función de base de datos. Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior y SQL Azure.

Permisos de objeto

Para editar el permiso de objeto específico para la función de base de datos, haga clic Añadir permission
para abrir la ventana y seguir los pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
3. En la cuadrícula, compruebe Grant, Con la opción Grant o Negar contra el permiso que aparece en
Privilegio para asignar esta función de base de datos a tener ese permiso. Los permisos múltiples se
pueden concedido.

Diseñador de funciones de aplicación de SQL Server

Propiedades

generales Nombre

de rol
Defina el nombre del rol.

Esquema predeterminado
Puede especificar el primer esquema que se buscará en el servidor para esta función de

aplicación. Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior.

Contraseña
Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.

Esquemas propios

Puede comprobar el esquema de LisTed en Esquemas propios Tab para cambiar la propiedad de esquema a

esta función de aplicación. Nota: Soporte de SQL Server 2005 o posterior.

Permisos de objeto

298
Para editar el permiso de objeto específico para la función de aplicación, haga clic en Agregar permiso para
abrir la ventana y seguir los pasos debajo:

299
 1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.
2. Compruebe el objeto para mostrar la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
3. En la cuadrícula, compruebe Grant, Con la opción Grant o Negar contra el permiso que aparece en
Privilegio para asignar esta función de aplicación para que tenga ese permiso. Los permisos múltiples se
pueden concedido.

Nota: SQL Azure no admite la función de aplicación.

Seguridad de SQLite

De forma predeterminada, una base de datos SQLite no requiere autenticación de usuario (sin autenticación-
requibase de datos roja). Después de crear un usuario, la base de datos se marcará como requerir autenticación
(base de datos requerida por autenticación). Entonces, la necesidad del usuario de proporcionar nombre de usuario y
contraseña al conectar con el archivo de base de datos.

Diseñador de usuario SQLite

Nombre de usuario
Senombre de t para el usuario.

Contraseña
Conjunto Contraseña y vuelva a escribirlo en el Confirmar contraseña cuadro de texto.

Administrador
Marque esta opción para dar el privilegio admin al usuario.

Administrador de privilegios

Además de establecer privilegios en cada usuario, el Administrador de privilegios proporciona otra vista sobre los
privilegios en conexión y sus objetos de base de datos.

Nota: Disponible sólo para MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQL Server y MariaDB.

Clic Administrador de privilegios de la barra de herramientas lista de objetos de usuario y siga los pasos debajo:

1. Expandir el nodo en la vista de árbol hasta llegar al destino objeto.

2. Elija el objeto y haga clic en Añadir Privilegio para abrir el ventana.
3. Compruebe que el usuario muestre la cuadrícula a la derecha panel.
4. En la cuadrícula, compruebe el privilegio pertinente en relación con el privilegio que aparece en Privilegio
para asignar el usuario seleccionado tener ese privilegio de objeto. Múltiples privilegios pueden ser
concedido.

300
Herramientas útiles
Navicat proporciona una variedad de herramientas que mejoran la experiencia del usuario al usar Navicat, que
son Información de objeto, Coloraciones de conexión, Filtro de búsqueda y más.

Vista de diagrama de lista/detalle/er

Navicat proporciona tres tipos de vistas para los objetos de la ventana principal. De forma predeterminada, Navicat
utiliza el Lista vista en el panel lista de objetos. Sólo muestra nombres de objeto. Puede seleccionar View -> Lista
en el menú principal o haga clic en en la parte inferior derecha esquina.

Detalle View muestra varias propiedades de objetos en columnas. Para cambiar a la vista detalle, seleccione Vista
-> Detalle en el menú principal o haga clic en en la parte inferior derecha esquina.

Para cambiar las columnas de visualización de las propiedades, seleccione Vista -> Elegir columnas en el menú principal y
seleccione Mostrar columnas para diferentes objetos de la ventana emergente.

Además de las vistas de lista y detalle, Navicat realza la visualización de la tabla a un nuevo Diagrama er vista. En
esta vista del diagrama de ER, puede ver los campos de tabla y las relaciones entre tablas de una base de
datos/esquema gráficamente. También permite agregar restricciones de claves extranjeras a las tablas
directamente.

Nota: Disponible sólo en versión completa. Sólo las tablas proporcionan er diagrama VIEW. Otros objetos de base de
datos sólo proporcionan vista de lista y vista de detalle.

Seleccione Vista -> Diagrama er en el menú principal o haga clic en en la esquina inferior derecha. Un diagrama
de ER se se creará automáticamente si la base de datos/esquema seleccionado contiene Mesas.

Pista: Los archivos del diagrama de ER se almacenan bajo Ubicación de configuración.

301
 Objeto Lista
Mostrar campos de tabla y relaciones entre tablas de una base de datos/esquema.

Nota: Haga doble clic en una tabla en la vista Diagrama de ER abrirá el diseñador de tablas, mientras hace doble clic
en una tabla en la vista de lista y detalle vista se abierto la Mesa Espectador. La lengüetas y Opciones en la diseñador
dependen en la diagrama base tipo Has elegido. Para la configuración de diferentes pestañas, consulte Servidor
Objetos.

Para agregar una relación, haga clic en de la barra de herramientas inferior. Arrastre el campo de la tabla

de origen y suelte a la tabla de destino campo. Para editar una relación, haga clic con el botón derecho en un

relación y seleccione Diseño de clave externa desde el pop-up menú.

Para eliminar una relación, haga clic con el botón derecho en una relación y seleccione

Eliminar clave externa en el menú emergente. Para agregar un vértice en una relación, haga

clic con el botón derecho en una relación y seleccione Agregar vértice en el menú emergente.

Para eliminar un vértice o todos los vértices de una relación, haga clic con el botón derecho en una relación y seleccione
Eliminar vértice o Eliminar todos los vértices
en el menú emergente.

Resumen
Para acercar o alejar el área seleccionada del diagrama, ajuste el deslizador del panel visión general. El mismo

302
efecto se puede lograr con atajos de teclado:

Zoom in: [CTRL + +] o [Ctrl + MouseWheel] zoom

out: [CTRL +-] o [Ctrl + MouseWheel abajo]

303
 Barra

Actualizar
Haga clic para actualizar el diagrama de ER.

Regenerar diagrama de ER
Elegir Regenerar diagrama de ER De Actualizar botón. Regenera el diagrama de ER con el uso de la función de
diseño automático.

Mover Diagrama
Haga clic para cambiar al modo de mano. Presione y sostenga la tecla Space, luego mueva el diagrama.

Nuevo Relación

Haga clic para crear una relación entre dos campos de tabla.

Color
Defina el color en las tablas y relaciones seleccionadas.

Tamaño del papel

Seleccione tamaño de papel en la lista desplegable, el tamaño del papel correspondiente se reflejará en el panel visión
general.

Información de objeto

En el panel de lista de objetos, también puede ver información de un objeto seleccionado. Seleccione Vista -> Mostrar
información de objeto
desde el menú principal o haga clic con el botón derecho en el objeto y seleccione Información

de objeto en el menú emergente. Nota: Las fichas dependen del tipo de objeto que haya elegido.

General
Mostrar la información del objeto.

DDL
Muestra la instrucción DDL del objeto.

Usando
Mostrar los objetos que utiliza el objeto actual.

Utilizado por
Mostrar el objeto actual utilizado por quién.

Objetos
Mostrar los objetos en el espacio de tablas.

304
Vista previa
Mostrar la instrucción SQL en la consulta.

Miembro de
Mostrar los roles que el usuario o el rolfirmado.

Miembros
Mostrar los miembros del rol.

Server Monitor (disponible sólo en versión completa)

Navicat proporciona Monitor de servidor para ver las propiedades de los servidores seleccionados. Seleccione
Herramientas -> Monitor de servidor y seleccione el tipo de servidor preferido de la menú.

Nota: Disponible sólo para MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQL Server y MariaDB. SQL Azure no es compatible.

Lista de procesos

Mostrar una lista de procesos de todos los servidores seleccionados.

Para detener el proceso seleccionado, haga clic en Finalizar proceso botón.

Actualización automática
Si desea tomar medidas en la actualización automática del servidor en segundos asignados, elija Vista -> Establecer el
tiempo de actualización automática
e introduzca un valor de actualización automática. Para desactivar la función de actualización

automática, cHoose Vista -> Actualización automática. Nota: Efecto se llevará una vez que

asigne el valor.

La lista de procesos proporciona la siguiente información depende del tipo de base de datos que se elija: MySQL, Oracle,
PostgreSQL, SQL Server y MariaDB.

 Nombre del servidor que se dale ajuste de la conexión.

 Identificador de proceso en el servidor.
 Número de serie del proceso.
 Usuario actual que inicie sesión en el servidor.
 Host desde el cual el usuario conectado.
 Base de datos que el usuario está actualmente utilizado.
 Último comando emitido por el usuario.
 Tiempo, estado e información del proceso.
 Tiempo de CPU y el estado de la proceso.

Variables

305
Muestra la lista de todas las variables de servidor y sus valores.

306
Nota: Disponible sólo para MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL y MariaDB.

Pista: Para editar el valor variable in servidores MySQL y Oracle, haga clic en o presione Ctrl + Intro para abrir
el editor para edición. El valor en PostgreSQL Server no se puede editar aquí. (estas variables se pueden configurar
utilizando el Conjunto Declaración, por
editar el PostgreSQL. conf archivo de configuración.)

Estado

Mostrar la lista de todos los Estados del servidor y sus valores.

Nota: Disponible sólo para MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL y MariaDB.

Agrupación virtual (disponible sólo en versión completa)

Grupo virtual pretende proporcionar una plataforma para agrupar objetos lógicos por categorías, para que todos
los objetos sean efectivamente preservados.

La agrupación virtual se puede aplicar en la conexión, la tabla, la visión, la función, la consulta, el informe, el respaldo, el
horario y el modelo.

Haga clic con el botón derecho en el panel de conexión/el panel lista de objetos y seleccione Nuevo grupo o
Administrar Group -> Nuevo grupo en el menú emergente para crear un nuevo grupo.

Para mover objeto (s) a un grupo, haga clic con el botón derecho en el objeto (s) y seleccione Administrar grupo ->
Mover a en el menú emergente o arrastre y suelte el objeto (s) en el grupo.

Para mover objeto (s) de vuelta a la parte superior-leVel, haga clic con el botón derecho en el objeto (s) y seleccione
Administrar grupo -> Excluir del grupo
en el menú emergente o arrastre y suelte el objeto (s) al nivel de destino en el panel de conexión.

Seleccione Vista -> Acoplar conexión/Acoplar lista de objetos desde el menú principal para ocultar grupos de
conexiones/objetos.

Coloraciones de conexión

Navicat proporciona conexiones de resaltado por colores para identificar conexiones y sus objetos de base de datos.
El color resaltado aparece en el panel de conexión y la barra de menús en iventana de objeto de base de datos TS.

Para resaltar una conexión, haga clic con el botón derecho en la conexión y seleccione Color en el menú emergente.

Favoritos (disponible sólo en versión completa)

Favoritos son vínculos a los objetos de base de datos que visita con frecuencia. Al agregar una ruta a la lista de
favoritos, puede ir a los objetos de la base de datos con un solo clic, en lugar de tener que navegar por la conexión y
307
la base de datos y/o el esquema en el panel de conexión.

308
Para agregar un vínculo a la lista de favoritos, abra un objeto de base de datos y elija Archivo -> Agregar a
Favoritos o pulse Mayús + Ctrl + #. Si el objeto de base de datos se abre en la ventana con fichas, también puede
hacer clic con el botón derecho en la ficha y seleccionar Agregar a Favoritos de la pmenú OP-up. Entrar Nombre
favorito y seleccione Identificador favorito.

Para abrir un objeto de base de datos de la lista Favoritos, seleccione Favoritos -> favorite_name en el menú
principal o pulse Ctrl + #.

Seleccione Favoritos -> Borrar favoritos -> favorite_name del menú principal para quitar un vínculo de la lista

de favoritos. Seleccione Favoritos -> Borrar favoritos -> Borrar todo del menú principal para eliminar todos los

vínculos de la lista de favoritos.

Nota: # representa 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 o 9.

Buscar en base de datos/esquema (Available solamente en la versión

completa)

Navicat proporciona una Buscar en base de datos/esquema Feature ofrece la búsqueda de tablas y ver registros o
estructuras de objetos dentro de una base de datos y/o esquema. Seleccione Herramientas -> Buscar en base de
datos/esquema del menú principal.

1. Seleccionar un destino Connección, Base y/o Esquema.

2. Introduzca la cadena de búsqueda en Encontrar Qué.
3. Elija buscar datos o Structruce en el Mirar en desplegable lista.
4. Elija el Modo de búsqueda: Contiene, palabra completa, prefijo o expresión regular. La expresión regular
sólo está disponible cuando se encuentra Estructura.
5. Compruebe el Caso insensible para desactivar la búsqueda sensible a mayúsculas si necesario.
6. Al encontrar la estructura, usted puede elegir buscar diverso objeCTS: tablas, vistas, funciones,
Consultas, índices, desencadenadores, eventos y/o materializados Vistas.
7. Haga clic en el Encontrar y, a continuación, haga doble clic en un objeto Buscar resultados lista
para ver el registro o la estructura.

Filtro de búsqueda

Navicat proporciona filtros de búsqueda para buscar en los objetos en el panel de conexión, el panel lista de objetos,
la ventana del diseñador de modelos y otras estructuras de árbol.

En el panel de conexión u otras estructuras de árbol, haga clic en el panel o en el árbol para enfocar y entrar una
cadena de filtro directamente. Si las conexiones se han abierto en el panel de conexión, el filtro también se aplicará a
sus objetos de base de datos.

309
En el panel lista de objetos, haga clic en en la ventana principal de Navicat e introduzca una

cadena de filtro en la búsqueda caja. En la ventana del diseñador de modelos, simplemente introduzca

una cadena de filtro en la búsqueda caja.

Puede quitar el filtro eliminando la cadena del filtro.

310
311
Opciones
Navicat proporciona una completa personalización de la interfaz de usuario con varios opciones para todas las herramientas.
Seleccione Herramientas -> Opciones
del menú principal.

Opciones generales

Windows en la barra de tareas

Cada nueva ventana que se abre automáticamente se muestra en la barra de tareas de Windows. Con esta
opción está desactivada, todas las instancias (por ejemplo, tablas, consultas) se cerrarán mientras la Navicat
principal sale.

Pista: Reinicie Navicat para que tenga efecto.

Permitir varias instancias de formulario

Con esta opción activada, permite abrir varias instancias de la misma ventana seleccionada.

Permitir varias instancias de Navicat

Desmarque este elemento significa que al hacer clic en el atajo de Navicat se reactivará la instancia en ejecución
de Navicat y no se iniciará una nueva copia.

Haga clic para actualizar

Actualice el panel de lista de objetos cada vez que haga clic en los objetos.

Mostrar Asistente para funciones

Mostrar el Asistente para funciones (MySQL/MariaDB, Oracle, PostgreSQL o SQL Server) al crear una
nueva función/procedimiento.

Solicite guardar nuevas consultas/perfiles antes de cerrar

Con esta opción está encendido, Navicat le pedirá que guarde nuevas consultas o perfiles cada vez que salga de
la sub-ventana pertinente.

Acoplamiento

Ventanas abiertas
Abrir nuevas ventanas para ventana principal o ventana Dock o como

una nueva ventana. Insight de código (disponible sólo en versión

completa)

Usar terminación de código

Cuando escriba el. símbolo (DOT) entre los nombres de los objetos, SQL Editor le ofrecerá una lista emergente que
mostraráNG algunas variantes para la terminación del código, consideran Terminación de código.
312
Retraso
Puede cambiar la hora que la lista emergente toma para aparecer.

313
Usar terminación de palabras
Cuando escriba el primer carácter de las palabras, SQL Editor le ofrecerá una lista emergente que muestra algunas
variantes para la terminación de la palabra.

Retraso
Puede cambiar la hora que la lista emergente toma para aparecer.

Usar resaltado de sintaxis

Resaltado de sintaxis ayuda a ver códigos claramente. Los códigos se resaltan en el Editor SQL con diferentes
colores y fuentes según las categorías a las que pertenezcan. La función de resaltado de sintaxis se puede limitar
estableciendo el tamaño máximo de archivo (por ejemplo, 10) en Aplicar resaltado de sintaxis para
statemtamaño ENT abajo (MB) para aumentar el rendimiento.

Guardado automático

Usar guardado automático

Guardar automáticamente después de las modificaciones en el Editor SQL definiendo el Auto guardar intervalo (s) (p. ej.
30).

Opciones de apariencia

Mostrar leyenda de barra de herramientas

Mostrar texto en los botones de la barra de herramientas en sub-Windows. De lo

contrario, sólo se presentarán los botones. Pista: Reinicie Navicat para que tenga

efecto.

Mostrar título de la barra de herramientas principal

Mostrar texto en los botones de la barra de herramientas en la ventana principal. De lo contrario, sólo se presentarán los
botones.

Utilizar iconos grandes para la barra de herramientas principal

Utilice iconos grandes en los botones de la barra de herramientas en la ventana principal.

Fuente

Rejilla

Fuente
Defina la fuente y su tamaño utilizados por Grid en el visor de tablas.

Editor fuente
314
Defina la fuente y su tamaño utilizados por los editores.

Fuente de la consola
Defina la fuente ytamaño de s usado en consola.

315
ER Diagram fuente
Defina la fuente y su tamaño utilizados en el diagrama ER.

Color

Colores de cuadrícula
Defina los colores de fondo de la cuadrícula de tabla.

Utilizar tres colores

Muestre el fondo de la cuadrícula de la tabla usando tres colores diferentes respectivamente para ver los datos claramente.

Colores de texto
Esta configuración de color le permite formatear sus consultas SQL en el Editor SQL con el resaltado de sintaxis de
color para sus instrucciones SQL a improvisare legibilidad.

Defina los colores de las fuentes del Editor SQL para marcar fragmentos de texto diferentes: comunes, palabras clave,
comentarios, cadenas y números. Simplemente haga clic en las cajas de color y elija el color deseado de la Selección
de color ventana de diálogo.

Main Window

Mostrar sugerencia de tabla

Mientras que rodillo la ratón puntero sobre a mesa dentro la Objeto Lista panel, que podría Obtener a emergente pista
dando detalles Acerca de la tabla estructura.

Mostrar objetos en el panel conexión

Mostrar objetos de base de datos mediante la estructura de árbol en el panel conexión. Para expandir un nodo,
simplemente haga doble clic en el nodo.

Pista: Reabra la base de datos/esquema para que tenga efecto.

Usar orden de conexión personalizada

Marque esta opción para personalizar el orden de conexión en el panel conexión. (usando método de arrastrar y soltar)

Mostrar elementos del sistema (PostgreSQL, SQL Server)

Marque esta opción para mostrar todos los objetos del sistema, como tabla INFORMATION_SCHEMA

y pg_catalog esquemas. Pista: REopen la base de datos/esquema para que tenga efecto.

Mostrar índice automático (SQLite)

Marque esta opción para mostrar el índice automático generado para la tabla SQLite en el panel de lista de objetos del índice.

Editor

Mostrar número de línea

Mostrar los números de línea en el lado del editor para referenc fácilmentee.

316
Usar plegado de código
El plegamiento de código permite que los códigos se derrumben como un bloque y sólo la primera línea que se muestra en el
editor, ver Plegado de código.

Usar resaltado de ortesis

Resalte el par de llaves cuando el cursor se mueve a cualquiera de los soportes para una referencia fácil, ver Resalte de la
abrazadera.

Ancho de tabulación
Introduzca el número de caracteres que ocupa una ficha, por ejemplo, 5.

Datos y cuadrícula

Mostrar campos de BLOB de texto en cuadrículas de datos

Si esta opción está encendida, los datos que se establecen como tipo de campo de texto son visibles en la cuadrícula de
tabla. Contrario, (WIDEMEMO) se mostrará.

Limitar registros
Marque esta opción si desea limitar el número de records demostró en cada página en rejilla de la
tabla/selección de los datos de la llave extranjera global. De lo contrario, todos los registros se mostrarán en
una sola página.

registros por página

Fije el registros por página valor (por ejemplo, 1000) en el campo de edición. El número que representa el número
de los registros mostrados por página en la cuadrícula de tabla.

Nota: Para ajustar la configuración de una tabla determinada, consulte Visor de tablas.

registros por página en ForeignKey editor

Fije el registros por página en ForeignKey editor valor (por ejemplo, 100) en el campo de edición. El número que
representa el número de registros mostrados por página en Selección de datos de claves extranjeras.

Sincronizar registro actual

Al actualizar/insertar una fila en la cuadrícula de tabla (si existe la clave principal), recargará este registro del servidor.

Por ejemplo: una tabla con 3 columnas-ID, Name y timestamp. Si actualiza la columna nombre, la marca de hora
se actualizará inmediatamente en la cuadrícula.

Altura de la fila
Defina la altura de la fila (p.ej. 17) utilizada en el editor.

NOTE: Para ajustar la configuración de una tabla determinada, consulte Formatear cuadrícula de tabla.

Ancho de columna
Defina el ancho de la columna (p. ej. 150) utilizada en el editor.

Nota: Para ajustar la configuración de una tabla determinada, consulte Formatear cuadrícula de tabla.
317
Transacción de inicio automática
Marque esta opción si requiere confirmación automática de cambiar registros en la cuadrícula de tabla. De lo contrario, haga
clic Cometer o
Rollback botones de la Iniciar transacción para confirmar o revertir los cambios. Ver Mesa Espectador.

Formatos de visualización

Los datos de los tipos Integer, Float, Date, Time y DateTime pueden formatearse cuando se muestran en cuadrículas
de datos. Escriba el formato aquí para cambiar el formato. Si los formatos se dejan en blanco, se usará el formato
predeterminado. Para los campos Date, Time y DateTime, los formatos predeterminados serán los formatos del
sistema DateTime.

Los formatos se definen construyendo una cadena utilizando estos especificadores de formato:

Campos numéricos

Especific Representan
ador
0 Dígitos marcador. Si la valor ser formato ha a dígitos en la posición donde la 0" aparece en el formato
cadena, entonces que dígitos es copiado Para la salida cadena. Contrario, a 0" es almacenados en
que posición en la cadena de salida. (por ejemplo, con 0000 colocados en el campo entero, todos
los resultados enteros de la tabla se
tener 0012 en formato)
# Dígitos marcador. Si la valor ser formato ha a dígitos en la posición donde la "#" aparece en el formato
cadena, entonces que dígitos es copiado Para la salida cadena. Contrario, nada es almacenados en
que posición en la cadena de salida. (por ejemplo, con # # # # colocado en el campo entero, todos
los enteros emiten desde el mesa
tendrá 12 34 en formato)
. Punto decimal. El primer carácter "." de la cadena de formato determina la ubicación del separador
decimal en el valor formateado; se ignoran los caracteres "." adicionales. El carácter real utilizado
como un separador decimal en la cadena de salida es detarmiño por la variable global
DecimalSeparator. El valor predeterminado de DecimalSeparator se especifica en el formato
numérico de la región y
Sección de opciones de idioma en el panel de control de Windows.

318
, Mil separadores. Si la cadena de formato contiene uno o más caracteres ",", la salida tendrá miles
de separadores insertados entre cada grupo de tres dígitos a la izquierda del punto decimal. La
ubicación y el número de caracteres "," en el formato StRing no afecta a la salida, excepto para
indicar que se buscan miles de separadores. El carácter real utilizado como el separador mil en la
salida está determinado por la variable global ThousandSeparator. El valor por defecto de
ThousandSeparator es specified en el formato del número de la región y de la sección de las
opciones de lengua
en el panel de control de Windows.
E+ Notación científica. Si alguna de las cadenas "e +", "e-", "e +", o "e-" están contenidas en la cadena
de formato, el

319
 el número se formatea utilizando notación científica. Un grupo de hasta cuatro caracteres "0" puede
seguir inmediatamente el "e +", "e-", "e +", o "e-" para determinar el número mínimo de dígitos en el
exponente. Los formatos "e +" y "e +" causan un signo más que se emite para exponentes positivos
y un signo menos que se emiten para exponentes negativos. Los formatos "e-" y "e-" emiten un
carácter de signo sólo para
exponentes.
' XX '/' XX Los caracteres incluidos en comillas simples o dobles se emiten tal cual, y no afectan a formatting.
'
; Separa las secciones para los números positivos, negativos y cero en la cadena de formato.

Las ubicaciones de la izquierda "0" antes del punto decimal en la cadena de formato y el derecha "0" después del
punto decimal en la cadena de formato determinan el rango de dígitos que están siempre presentes en la cadena
de salida.

El número que se está formateando es alformas redondeadas a tantos lugares decimales como hay marcadores de
posiciones de dígitos ("0" o "#") a la derecha del punto decimal. Si el formato no contiene ningún punto decimal, el
valor que se está formateando se redondea al número entero más cercano.

Si el número que se está formateando tiene más dígitos a la izquierda del separador decimal que hay marcadores de
posiciones de dígitos a la izquierda del carácter "." en la cadena de formato, los dígitos adicionales se emiten antes
del marcador de posiciones del primer dígito.

La tabla siguiente muestra el efecto de varias cadenas de formato:

Formato de Valor Resulta Comentario

visualización do
#.## 12.2 12.2 Nota el dígito adicional a la izquierda del decimal todavía aparece.
#. 00 2,5 2.50 Nota extra Zero: el campo mostrará siempre dos posiciones
decimales.
00. # # .006 00,01 Nota 0s extra a la derecha de punto decimal y redondeo a dos
decimal
lugares.

Para permitir diferentes formatos para valores positivos, negativos y cero, la cadena de formato puede contener entre
una y tres secciones separadas por punto y coma.

Una sección: La cadena de formato se aplica a todos los valores.

Dos secciones: La primera sección aplica Para positivo valores y ceros, y la segundo sección aplica Para negativo
valores. Tres secciones: La primera sección se aplica a los valores positivos, el segundo se aplica a los valores
negativos, y el tercero se aplica a los ceros.

Si la sección para valores negativos o la sección para valores cero está vacía, es, si no hay nada entre los puntos y
coma que DELIMla sección, la sección para los valores positivos se utiliza en lugar de otro.

Si la sección para valores positivos está vacía, o si toda la cadena de formato está vacía, el valor se formatea
utilizando el formato general de punto flotante con 15 dígitos significativos. Flotador generalel formato de Ing-Point
también se utiliza si el valor tiene más de 18 dígitos a la izquierda del punto decimal y la cadena de formato no
320
especifica notación científica.

Fecha hora campos

Especifica Representan
dor

321
c La fecha utilizando el formato dado por la variable global ShortDateFormat, seguida por el tiempo
utilizando el formato dado por la variable global LongTimeFormat. El tiempo no aparece si la parte
fraccional del
El valor DateTime es cero.
d El día como un número sin un cero principal (1-31).
DD El día como un número con un cero principal (01-31).
DDD El día como abreviatura (Sun-SAT) utilizando las cadenas dadas por la variable global ShortDayNames.
dddd El día como nombre completo (domingo-sábado) usando las cadenas dadas por la variable global
LongDayNames.
"ddddd" La fecha utilizando el formato proporcionado por la variable global ShortDateFormat.
dddddd La fecha utilizando el formato proporcionado por la variable global LongDateFormat.
m El mes como número sin un cero principal (1-112). Si el especificador m sigue inmediatamente una h o
HH
especificador, se muestra el minuto en lugar del mes.
mm El mes como un número con un cero principal (01-12). Si el especificador mm sigue inmediatamente una
h o HH
especificador, se muestra el minuto en lugar del mes.
MMM El mes como abreviatura (Ene-Dic) usando las cuerdas dadas por la Globa ShortMonthNamesl
variable.
mmmm El mes como nombre completo (enero-diciembre) usando las cadenas dadas por el LongMonthNames
global
variable.
YY El año como un número de dos dígitos (00-99).
aaaa El año como un número de cuatro dígitos (0000-9999).
h La hora sin un cero principal (0-23).
HH La hora con un cero principal (00-23).
n El minuto sin un cero principal (0-59).
NN El minuto con un cero principal (00-59).
s El segundo sin un cero principal (0-59).
SS El segundo con un cero principal (00-59).
t El tiempo utilizando el formato dado por la variable global ShortTimeFormat.
TT El tiempo utilizando el formato dado por la variable global LongTimeFormat.
AM/PM El tiempo usando el reloj de 12 horas para el especificador h o HH anterior, seguido de "AM" para
cualquier hora antes del mediodía, o "PM" para cualquier hora después del mediodía. El especificador
AM/PM puede usar mayúsculas, minúsculas o mixtas, y el
resultado se muestra en consecuencia.
a/p El tiempo usando el reloj de 12 horas para el especificador h o HH anterior, seguido por "a" para
cualquier hora antes del mediodía, o "p" para cualquier hora después del mediodía. El especificador de
a/p puede utilizar el caso más bajo, superior, o mezclado, y el resultado
se muestra en consecuencia.
AMPM El tiempo ucante el reloj de 12 horas para el especificador h o HH anterior, seguido del contenido de la
variable global TimeAMString para cualquier hora antes del mediodía, o el contenido del TimePMString
global
variable para cualquier hora después del mediodía.
/ El carácter separador de fecha dada por la variable global DateSeparator.
322
: El carácter separador de tiempo dado por la variable global TimeSeparator.
' XX '/' XX ' Los caracteres incluidos en comillas simples o dobles se muestran tal cual, sin cambios de formato.

Los especificadores de formato pueden escribirse en letras mayúsculas o minúsculas; ambos producen el mismo resultado.

323
Opciones de modelo (disponible sólo en versión completa)

Resaltar objetos
Con esta opción está encendido, cuando un cursor del ratón se cierne sobre un objeto, Navicat se resaltará su borde

con color azul. Pista: Reinicie Navicat para que tenga efecto.

Resalte con relación

Con esta opción es on, cuando un cursor del ratón se cierne sobre una tabla o una vista, Navicat resaltará sus claves
extranjeras o ver relaciones con Blue o GREen color que indica relaciones con otros objetos.

Pista: Reinicie Navicat para que tenga efecto.

Tipo de campo de conjetura

Con esta opción es on, Navicat se predecir tipos de campos al diseñar campos en

tablas. Pista: Reinicie Navicat para que tenga efecto.

Opciones misceláneas

Prioridad del proceso

Prioridad indica la prioridad que se utiliza al planificar el subproceso. Ajuste la prioridad mayor o menor según sea necesario.

Ubicación de archivos
Puede cambiar la carpeta para diferentes tipos de archivos. De forma predeterminada, la mayoría de los
archivos se almacenan en Ubicación de configuración. Sin embargo, algunos archivos se encuentran en el
perfiles directorio y todos los archivos de registro se almacenan en el registros directorio.

Asociación de archivos (disponible sólo en versión completa)

Las asociaciones de archivos son lo que el Navicat utiliza para abrir su archivos guardados con Navicat. Por ejemplo,
a. NPT el archivo (Perfil de transferencia de datos) se abrirá con las ventanas de transferencia de datos y a. NPI (perfil
del asistente de importación) se abrirá de forma predeterminada con el Asistente de importación.

Nota: En vista o arriba, necesita hacer clic en Asociación de archivos para abrir la lista. En XP o abajo, archivo
Associateción está listada aquí.

Editor externo
Elija la ruta del archivo de un editor externo para abrir consultas.

Activación y actualización

Comprobar si hay actualizaciones al iniciar

Marque esta opción para permitir que Navicat Compruebe la nueva versión cuando se inicie.

324
Proxy

325
Usar proxy
Marque esta opción para utilizar proxy para el proceso de activación e introduzca Host, Puerto, Nombre

de usuario y Contraseña. OCI (disponible sólo para Oracle)

Biblioteca OCI (OCI. dll)

Elija el Cliente Oracle / Cliente instantáneo de Oracle carpeta que incluye la biblioteca OCI (OCI. dll) para
Básico/TNS conexión. Ya se ha incluido en la carpeta de instalación de Navicat. Usted puede localizarlo directamente.

Pista: Reinicie Navicat para que tenga efecto.

SQL * Plus
Especifique la ubicación de SQL * PLUS utilizada en consola de la conexión de Oracle. SQL * Plus está incluido en Cliente
Oracle /
Cliente instantáneo de Oracle.

Cliente instantáneo de Oracle es la forma más sencilla de implementar una aplicación de cliente Oracle completa
construida con controladores OCI, OCCI, JDBC-OCI o ODBC. Proporciona las bibliotecas de cliente Oracle
necesarias en un pequeño conjunto de archivos. También puede descargar Cliente Oracle / Cliente instantáneo de
Oracle a-

Cliente Oracle
http://www.Oracle.com/TechNetwork/Database/Enterprise-Edition/downloads/index.html

Cliente instantáneo de Oracle

http://www.Oracle.com/TechNetwork/Database/Features/Instant-Client/index-097480.html

Descargue los paquetes de cliente instantáneo apropiados para su plataforma aND la CPU. Todas las instalaciones
requieren el paquete básico o básico Lite. Descomprima los paquetes y configure los puntos de ruta.

Guía de instalación del cliente Oracle

http://DownLoad.Oracle.com/docs/CD/B28359_01/install.111/b32302/TOC.htm

326
Comandos (disponible sólo en versión completa)
PremiumSoft Tipo de servidor Líneas de comandos
Navicat
Objetos
Backup MySQL, Navicat. exe-copia de seguridad [ProfileName]-u NavicatID-p
PostgreSQL, ProjectName-t ConnectionType-c connectionName-d
SQLite y MariaDB DatabaseName-s SchemaName

Importación Todos Navicat. exe-importar pronombre-u NavicatID-p ProjectName-t

ConnectionType-c connectionName-d DatabaseName-s
SchemaName
Exportar tabla Todos Navicat. exe-exportar pronombre-u NavicatID-p ProjectName-t
ConnectionType-c connectionName-d DatabaseName-s
SchemaName
Exportar Todos Navicat. exe-exportview ProfileName-u NavicatID-p ProjectName
resultado de vista -t ConnectionType-c connectionName-d DatabaseName-s
SchemaName
Exportación Oracle y PostgreSQL Navicat. exe-exportmview ProfileName-u NavicatID-p
Materializado ProjectName-t ConnectionType-c connectionName-d
Ver resultado DatabaseName -s SchemaName
Exportar Todos Navicat. exe-exportquery ProfileName-u NavicatID-p
resultado de ProjectName-t ConnectionType-c connectionName-d
consulta DatabaseName -s SchemaName

Query Execution All navicat.exe -query QueryName -u NavicatID -p ProjectName -t

ConnectionType -c ConnectionName -d DatabaseName -s
SchemaName
Data Transfer All navicat.exe -datatransfer ProfileName -t ProfileType
Data All navicat.exe -datasync ProfileName -t ConnectionType
Synchronization
Batch Jobs All navicat.exe -batchjob BatchJobName
Print Report Todos Navicat. exe-Informe ReportName-u NavicatID-p ProjectName-t
ConnectionType-c connectionName-d DatabaseName-s
SchemaName de tipo de ruta de fichero [-SC DataPipelineName
Value
[valor...] ...]

Nota:

NavicatID -Si la conexión se almacena en Navicat Cloud, se requiere Navicat ID, p.ej.
[email protected] ProjectName -Si la conexión se almacena en Navicat Cloud, el nombre del
proyecto es Obligatorio
ConnectionType - type of the connection: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite, MSSQL or MariaDB
327
ProfileType - type of the data transfer profile: MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, SQLite, MSSQL, MariaDB or

328
 Premium
FileType - output report file type: -pdf, -html, -excel or -printer
PathName -nombre de la impresora o ruta del archivo de destino, p.ej.
C:\Users\Guest\Desktop\report_sample.pdf DataPipelineName-nombre de la tubería de datos bajo
los datos ficha
- value of the criteria with the AutoSearch option is checked under the Search tab of Query Designer
Value
en la ficha datos

Example:
navicat.exe -report MyReport -u [email protected] –p Project1 -t MSSQL -c "SQL Server 2012" -d AdventureWorks -s
dbo -pdf "C:\Users\Guest\Desktop\report_sample.pdf" -sc table1 value1 value2 -sc table2 value1

329
Hot Keys
Ventana principal de Navicat

Llaves Acción
Ctrl + G Settings Location Folder
CTRL+# (# represents 0 to 9) Abrir ventana de objeto desde la lista de favoritos
F6 Consola
Ctrl + H Registro de historial
Ctrl + Q Nueva consulta
F12 Mostrar sólo objetos activos

Común

Keys Action
CTRL+N New Object
SHIFT+CTRL+# (# represents 0 to 9) Add to Favorites
F8 Navicat Main Window
CTRL+TAB or SHIFT+CTRL+TAB Ventana siguiente
F1 Ayuda
Ctrl + F1 Documentación en línea

Diseñador de tablas

Llaves Acción
Ctrl + O Open Table
CTRL+F Find Field
F3 Find Next Field
SHIFT+F3 Buscar campo anterior

Visor de tabla/visor de vistas

Llaves Acción
CTRL+D Design Table/Design View
Ctrl + Q Tabla de consultas/vista de consulta
Ctrl + F Buscar texto
F3 Buscar texto siguiente
Ctrl + G Ir a la fila
Ctrl + flecha izquierda Primera columna de datos del registro actual
Ctrl + flecha derecha Última columna de datos del registro actual
Ctrl + Inicio Primera fila de datos de la columna actual
Ctrl + fin Última fila de datos de la columna actual

330
 Ctrl + pág o Ctrl + flecha arriba Primera fila de datos de la ventana actual
Ctrl + página abajo o Ctrl + flecha abajo Última fila de datos de la ventana actual
Ctrl + R Aplicar filtro en el Asistente para filtros
Mayús + flecha Seleccionar celdas
Ctrl + Intro Editar datos con el editor de apertura
Insertar o Ctrl + N Nuevo registro
Ctrl + Supr Eliminar registro
Ctrl + S Aplicar cambios de registro
ESC Cancelar cambios de registro
Ctrl + T Detener la carga de datos

Ver/consultar

Llaves Acción
Ctrl + O Cargar vista/cargar consulta
Ctrl +/ Línea de comentario
Mayús + Ctrl +/ Línea de descomentar
Ctrl + E Ver definición/editor de consultas
Ctrl + R Ejecutar
Mayús + Ctrl + R Ejecutar seleccionado
F7 Ejecutar una declaración desde aquí
Ctrl + T Parada

Editor SQL

Llaves Acción
Ctrl + F Buscar texto
F3 Buscar texto siguiente
Ctrl + = o Ctrl + MouseWheel arriba Zoom in
Ctrl +-o Ctrl + MouseWheel abajo Alejar
Ctrl + 0 Restablecer zoom

Depurador

Llaves Acción
F9 Ejecutar
F8 Paso
F7 Paso en
Mayús + F7 Salir

Informe

Llaves Acción

331
 Ctrl + O Abrir informe en diseño de informes
Ctrl + P Imprimir en diseño de informes
Ctrl + G Grupos en diseño de informes
Página abajo Página siguiente
Subir página Página anterior
Final Última página
Casa Primera página

Modelo

Llaves Acción
Ctrl + D Nuevo diagrama en el modelo
Ctrl + P Impresión
ESC Seleccione
H Mover diagrama
T Nueva tabla
V Nueva vista
L Nueva capa
A Nueva etiqueta
N Nueva Nota
I Nueva imagen
R Nueva clave extranjera
CTRL + B Tabla seleccionada en negrita, vista, clave
externa o
Forma
Ctrl + = o Ctrl + MouseWheel arriba Zoom In
CTRL+- or CTRL+Mousewheel Down Zoom Out
CTRL+0 Reset Zoom

332
Log Files
Navicat provides number of log files to keep track on the actions have been performed in Navicat and they are located
in the logs directory, e.g. C:\Users\Guest\Documents\Navicat\Premium\logs\. You are allowed to change the log files
location under Options.

HttpDump.log
Store information which response from your HTTP Server.

LogHistory.txt
Store all SQL statements of all the operations executed over databases and database objects in Navicat. Select Tools
-> History Log from the main menu or press CTRL+H to open the LogHistory.txt file in the History Log Viewer.

Note: This log will be overwritten while Navicat is being restarted.

LogImport.txt
Record detailed information on every error (indicating success or failure) that occurred during the import process.

Note: This log will be overwritten on each import.

LogExport.txt
Record detailed information on every error (indicating success or failure) that occurred during the export process.

Note: This log will be overwritten on each export.

LogSynchronize.txt
Record detailed information on every error (indicating success or failure) that occurred during the data synchronization
process.

Note: This log will be overwritten on each synchronization.

LogCmd.txt
Store information for Navicat command line process and all operations while running schedule.

333